Home

"user manual"

Contents

1. Expansion Ath 3rd 2nd 1st board l adapter adapter adapter adapter Aa erlang E oo escription of wiring A Analog data 4 refer to Chapter 3 Platinum resistance thermometer For a detailed description Special devices i acy hcl Measurement Transfer direction 1st adapter M D8260 to M D8269 p l temperature a ai For a detailed description 2nd adapter M D8270 to M D8279 of a basic program refer Setting epee 3rd adapter M D8280 to M D8289 to Section 4 8 lt ______e Setting of averaging time Ath adapter M D8290 to M D8299 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system 1 The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3uc D DSS PLC F 3 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs Vdr nexs UO ddagv dvr nexa eo gt O aa gt v O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld GVv nexs dav OI CWp NeX4 ae ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog input using the PT ADP follow the procedure below to set up the sys
2. H _FX3u BD 1 3 2 FX3UC Series PLC To connect the special function blocks Jor the conversion adapters B Trefer to Subsection 3 2 2 2 A E and C represent the connecting positions For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual supplied with to your PLC gt Refer to the FX3UC Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Po i Analog input F ePressure sensor FX3u 4AD ADP eSignal converter etc fa N Analog output European terminal block elnverter etc FX3u 4D fa An N f Temperature sensor European terminal block npa P uropean terminal DIOC eThermocouple P types K and J FX3u 4AD TC ADP J E Temperature sensor input ePlatinum resistance H thermometer sensor Pt100 FX3u 4AD PT ADP FXsu 4AD PTW AD P 14 An FX3u 232 BD FX3u 485 BD FX3u 422 BD FX3u USB BD or FX3U CNV BD is needed to connect the special adapters FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3 2 2 Connection of special function blocks 1 FX3uc D DSS Series PLC m m T m T Al CI and D represent the connecti
3. Special function block for FX3U FX2N and FXON J S J A Al E CI and D represent the connecting positions For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual supplied with your PLC Refer to the FX3UC Series User s Manual Hardware Edition European terminal block European terminal block Terminal block 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products 3 2 FX3UC Series PLC Analog input eFlowmeter ePressure sensor eSignal converter etc Analog output elnverter etc Temperature sensor input e Thermocouple ePlatinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 e For a detailed description of special function block connectability and system configuration Refer to the FX3uc Series User s Manual Hardware Edition e Use the FX3uUC 1PS 5V extension power supply unit if the capacity of the 5V DC power supply unit incorporated in the FX3Uc Series PLC is deteriorated Refer to the FX3uUc Series User s Manual Hardware Edition The following analog special function blocks for the FX3U FX2NC FX2N and FXON can be connected to the FX3UC Series PLC FX Series Analog special function blocks for the FX3u Analog special function blocks for the FX2NC Analog special function blocks for the FX2N Analog special function blocks for the FXON Type FX3U 4AD FX3U 4DA FX2NC 4AD FX2NC 4DA FX2N 8AD FX2N 4AD FX2N 2AD FX2N 4DA FX2N 2DA FX2N 5A FX2N 4
4. 3 STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS DANGER e Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electrical shock or malfunctions Before cleaning or retightening terminals cut off all phases of the power supply externally Failure to do so may cause electric shock Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC carefully read through this manual and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time i e from a programming tool and a GOT Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program CAUTION e Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Turn of the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the peripheral devices expansion boards special adapters and extension blocks Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition Manual revision 12 2007 F
5. 1 Temperature measurement out of specified range or disconnection of line b0 to b3 1 Description of error The input temperature measurement value is outside the specified range The temperature measurement value is not in the range between 115 C to 615 C Or the line between PTW ADP and the platinum resistance thermometer sensor is disconnected 2 Remedy Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range Also check the wiring condition 2 EEPROM error b4 1 Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or is destroyed 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 3 Averaging time setting error b5 1 Description of error The averaging time set for one of the channels channels 1 to 4 is outside the specified range 1 to 4095 2 Remedy Check that the averaging time is correctly set for each channel G 22 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 5 Error Status Check 4 PTW ADP hardware error b6 1 2 Description of error The PTW ADP does not operate properly Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to the PTW ADP Also check that the PTW ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check p
6. Output type Voltage output Analog output range 10 to 10V Specification of analog value mV BaN i Analog output range 10 to 10V Digital input range 32000 to 32000 BERE i Ofsetdaim adi simient Possible Digital input range 10000 to 10000 g J l Offset gain adjustment Impossible Output voltage V Output voltage V 10 2 gt Digital 100 value 32640 10200 32640 2 Current output characteristics 0 to 20mA Output mode 2 4 Set output mode 4 Set output mode 2 Output type Current output Output type Current output Analog output range 0 to 20mA Specification of anag value uA igital j Analog output range 0 to 20 mA Digital input range 0 to 32000 AE E a oGage Offset gain adjustment Possible g p ge Offset gain adjustment Impossible Current Current output mA output mA 32000 32640 20000 20400 Digital value Digital value 3 Current Output characteristics 4 to 20mA Output mode 3 Set output mode 3 Output type Current output Analog output range 4 to 20mA Digital input range 0 to 32000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Current output mA 32000 32640 Digital value D 8 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output SEU g 3 3 Wiri irin z 9 z This chapter describes wiring of the FX3u 4DA B Observe the following cautions wiring the FX3U 4DA ae ae A gt WI
7. T 3 e2 If the input analog value is out of the A D conversion range the following operation will be performed e If analog input value lt lower limit value in A D conversion range The over scale lower limit bit will turn on xx ee e If analog input value lt upper limit value in A D conversion range ks The over scale upper limit bit will turn on 1 A D conversion range Input type A D conversion range 10 2V to 10 2V 20 4mA to 20 4mA Voltage input Current input 2 Assignment of each bit of BFM 28 Bit No Channel number Description bO Over scale lower limit b1 Over scale upper limit b2 Over scale lower limit C b3 Over scale upper limit h4 Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa b4 Over scale lower limit b5 Over scale upper limit b6 Over scale lower limit b7 Over scale upper limit b8 to b15 Not used 3 Caution regarding use of over scale status data e Perform one of the following operations to turn off the previously turned on bit Turn the power off and on Write H0000 in BFM 28 as the over scale status data e Even if over scale is detected channel data BFM 10 to 13 will continuously be updated dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI gt lt 4 Over scale status data automatic transfer function b7 of BFM 22 iS If the over scale status data automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM 128 the data in BFM 28 ue c
8. This chapter outlines the FX3u 4AD ADP referred to as the 4AD ADP 1 1 Outline of Functions The FX3u 4AD ADP is an analog special adapter Connect the FX3U 4AD ADP to the FX3U FX3UC Series PLC to read 4 channels of voltage current data 1 Up to 4 4AD ADP units can be connected to the PLC including the other analog special adapters 2 Either voltage input or current input can be specified for each channel 3 A D conversion data of each channel will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC System Point and section to be referred to 4 adapters maximum including other a Number of connectable analog special adapters l units FX
9. cccccccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeseeeesaeeseesaeeeeesseeeesseeeeneeas l 22 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method l 23 5 1 Example System and operation cccccccccscccssceceeeceuceceeeecseecueecaueecaceceueesaeecsueecseessueeseeesaueenaass l 23 5 2 Program example of auto tuning step response method and PID control c cccceceeeeeees l 24 5 3 Program example of auto tuning step response MethOd cceccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeas l 26 6 Troubleshooting l 28 0 1 Eror 0010 ner ener ane re See a a ee eee I 28 WV RUE RING ioc os carrer amen aes a a E i REVIS d HISTO coiir SE e EER ii FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Introduction Common Items 1 1 Outline and Features of Analog Control 1 Introduction SWW9 UOWLWOD This manual describes the analog products for the FX3U FX3UC Series PLC B This chapter describes the analog control methods and applications uy AD 1 1 Outline and Features of Analog Control 5 For the FX Series there are 3 types of analog control Voltage Current input Voltage Current output and C Temperature Sensor input M It is important to select products that are optimum for the purpose of use 2S FX3U Series PLC FX3UC gt 3 5 e O gt TI dav var nexs M E Voltage current input Voltage current m Temperature sensor control type output contro
10. 2 Thermocouple cable Use a non grounded type thermocouple and connect the thermocouple using the compensating lead wire In addition separate the cable of the thermocouple from the other power cables or inductive cables 3 To use thermocouple type J To use thermocouple type J shortcircuit the J type terminals If these terminals are not shortcircuited the temperature measurement data cannot be read out correctly For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 W Special Device Check Check whether the special devices for the TC ADP are correctly used 1 Selection of type K orJ Check if the special device for type K J selection is correctly set Turn off the device to select thermocouple type K Turn on the device to select thermocouple type J 2 Temperature measurement Check if the special device of the selected channel is correctly set This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel 3 Averaging time Verify if the set averaging time is within the specified range The averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set averaging time is outside the specified range an error occurs 4 Error status Check that no error is detected in the TC ADP If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wiring and programs For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual
11. 6 Table Output Function 6 3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 4 Example of transfer of data table The data table below shows the writing of K5000 to BFM 98 and H0001 to BFM 99 Data starting from D5000 is transferred to the buffer memory in the FX3U 4DA D 46 PLC main unit FX3U 4DA Data register Set value Faren een D5000 K2 100 D5001 D5001 K3 101 D5002 D5002 KO 102 D5003 D5003 K3000 103 D5004 D5004 K18 104 D5005 D5005 H0021 105 D5006 D5006 K8000 106 K26 D5007 D5007 K26 107 D5008 D5008 H0011 108 D5009 D5009 K5000 109 D5010 D5010 K5 110 D5011 D5011 H0011 D5012 K4 Transfer to buffer a memory D5013 K1 400 D5012 D5014 K2000 gt 401 D5013 D5015 K6 402 D5014 D5016 H0022 403 D5015 D5017 K10000 404 D5016 D5018 K15 405 D5017 D5019 H0002 406 D5018 D5020 K500 407 D5019 D5021 K45 408 D5020 D5022 H0021 409 K45 D5021 D5023 K4000 410 D5022 D5024 K9 411 D5023 D5025 H0012 412 D5024 413 D5025 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory 5 Cautions regarding data table transfer While the table output function is executed it is impossible to start transferring the data table The number of patterns is not transferred to the buffer memory in FX3U 4DA
12. Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 5 4 Program Check 5 4 Program Check Check the following items for the program 1 Cancellation of error status at power on When the power is turned off and then on again the error status should be cleared the b6 and the b7 should turn off using the program 2 Check of storage devices Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by the other parts of the programs avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs 5 5 Error Status Check If an error occurs in the TC ADP the corresponding bit will turn on The temperature measurement data of bO channel 1 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of b1 channel 2 is outside the specified TC ADP hardware error Description Averaging time setting error Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of b2 channel 3 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error Le To solve a problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below TC ADP communication data error 1 Temperature measurement out of specified range or disconnection of line b0 to b3 1 Description of error The
13. BFM 119 Maximum peak value resetting Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H BFM 109 can reset the minimum peak value BFM 101 to 104 and BFM 119 can reset the maximum peak value BFM 111 to 114 Channel numbers are assigned to the bits of BFM 109 and 119 to specify the channel to be subject to peak value resetting Turn on each bit to reset the peak value of the corresponding channel 1 BFM 109 119 bits Channel number assignment Description bO Channel 1 maximum peak value BFM 111 resetting b1 Channel 2 maximum peak value BFM 112 resetting b2 Channel 3 maximum peak value BFM 113 resetting b3 Channel 4 maximum peak value BFM 114 resetting b4 to b15 Not used Bit No Two or more bits can be turned on at a time 5 4 21 BFM 125 Peak value automatic transfer to first data register specification Setting range 0 to 7992 Initial value at delivery K200 Numeric data type Decimal K If the automatic transfer to first data register is specified in BFM 125 the minimum peak value BFM 101 to 104 and the maximum peak value BFM 111 to 114 will be automatically transferred to the specified data registers 8 points registers starting from the first data register specified When the peak value is updated data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scan time of the PLC c
14. OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 6 Examples uses of table output function 6 6 Examples uses of table output function Uses of table output function e Inverter frequency setting servo speed control etc 1 Inverter frequency setting The output frequency can be controlled by inputting analog signals e g voltage from 0 to 10 V and current from 4 to 20 mA to inverter frequency setting signals The analog signals and output signals have the following proportional relationship Output frequency Hz 60 30 5 10V Analog signal To control the frequency as shown below where control the analog signal is proportional to the frequency use the table output function Output frequency Hz 60 30 Time Example of table output Output voltage V Point 2 10 p 5 Point 3 No interpolation S shaped interpolation S shaped interpolation lt gt lt gt lt gt Time Output update Output update Output update time at point 1 time at point 2 time at point 3 D 52 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Changing Output Characteristic FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 7 1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics re 3 3 7 Changing Output Characteristic 5 For FX3U 4DA t
15. Resolution 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 2 AuA 16mAx1 4000 2 z Overall accuracy Does not include any load fluctuation D Time required for D A 4ms x number of selected channels V conversion Operation synchronized with sequence program e O gt 10V 2OMAg a 5 oi 5 2 i D gt l 1 ad 1 O l i O O i Output characteristics z ETS 1 18 z 4mA 1 it 0 4000 0 4000 Digital input Digital input If the input data consists of 13 bits or more only the lower 12 bits will be valid and the other bits will be ignored e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC lati h nsulation method e Channels are not insulated from each other dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1 Use the adjustment volume to adjust the FX2N 2DA 2 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will change the resolution MLld AYt N X4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS A 23 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 2 3 FX3uU 4DA 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 2 Analog Output FX3U 4DA Specifications Voltage output 4ch Number of output points 10V to 10V DC Analog output range External load 1k to 1MQ Ambient temperature 25 5 C 0 3 60mV for 20V full scale Ambient tempe
16. Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version a a ey ee ee os bee ee ee ee a gt J Pcie e T T Version data Example Ver 1 00 5 PC type Example 24 FXan FX3u FX2nc and FXsuc series D 2 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number x E The year and month of production of the product can be seen from the manufacturer s serial number S gt SERIAL indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product Example FX3U 48MR ES production number 570001 MITSUBISHI RGaeorrer MODEL FX3u 48MR ES Right side 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 40W OUT 30VDC 240VAC 2A COS 1 TI dav var nexs M SERIAL 570001 CE v Mus LISTED 80M1 IND CONT EQ gt lt ate MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN gt a 2 S0 et Uvedeededecesed Leccencescecesd E EE E E E ENEE E E Ty E Control number Month Example 7 July 1 to 9 January to September T X October Y November Z December a Year Example 5 2005 last digit of dominical year amp J gt U 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number T Use the programming tool with the following version number to create programs for PTW ADP of the FX3u 2 FX3uc Series PLC E gt GX Developer Ver SWE Porla 5 SWLOID5C GPPW J T she jap r When selecting a model select FX3U CY 1 e SWLI
17. av DC ee 2 D gt 1E z Clags D grounding VLI ILJ chhl LJ represents the channel number 1 Use 2 core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog output lines and separate the analog output lines from other power lines or inductive lines 2 Ground the shielded wire at one point on the signal receiving side 3 5 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below O ddv ld ave nexd TT dav var nex4 e The grounding resistance should be 100Q or less e Independent grounding should be performed for best results x When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following F figure S For details refer to User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC Series 6 3 g RS ee RE PLC a edupmeni z aun equipment H A 4 1 I 4 2s Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding T Best condition Good condition Not allowed 5 5a gJ e The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm BY e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible f 5 OQ oS E 13 F X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 1 Writing of D A Conversion Data 4 Programming 4 1 This chapter describes how to create programs that can output the analog data using the 4DA ADP Writing of D A Conversion Data E 14 1 2
18. BFM 91 to 94 the result will be written to BFM 27 as the E abrupt change detection status data The minimum value of channel data written to BFM 10 to 13 x Saale holdin will be written to BFM 101 to 104 as the minimum peak value Sancection E b3 function 9 and the maximum value of channel data written to BFM 10 to 5419 gt 13 will be written to BFM 111 to 114 as the maximum peak E 5 value If the automatic transfer to first data register is specified in BFM Subsection F _ 125 the minimum peak value BFM 101 to 104 and the U Peak value automatic 5 4 19 2S b4 maximum peak value BFM 111 to 114 will be automatically transfer function i T l l Subsection E written to the specified data registers 8 points registers gt l ie 5 4 21 starting from the first data register specified y J lispenlowerlinierncr If the upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to Subsection t b5 wie dats aulomalic data register is specified in BFM 126 the upper lower limit error 5 4 16 G l status data BFM 26 will be automatically written to the Subsection transfer function EA U specified data register 5 4 22 2S C Abrupt change If the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to Subsection b6 detection status data data register is specified in BFM 127 the abrupt change 5 4 17 z ta automatic transfer detection status data BFM 27 will be automatically written to Subsection g function the spe
19. If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 5 TC ADP communication data error b7 1 2 Description of error A communication error is detected between the TC ADP and the PLC Remedy Check that the TC ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 A B FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers C User s Manual Analog Control Edition z PID Instruction FNC 88 D dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 ddv L L AYt NEX4 gt O z Foreword This manual describes the control methods for using the PID instruction in combination with analog products and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward gt B it to the end user 5 8 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CO
20. L 2 Cautions regarding error status data automatic transfer to data register specification V e Ifa data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify the same T data register gt e Be sure to turn on the error status data automatic transfer function b8 of BFM 22 3 e The data written to BFM 129 will be retained in the EEPROM 3 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD an TI EEPROM Zza For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 gs B 47 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 26 BFM 197 Selection of cyclic data update function function for data history Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Use this function to update the data history in BFM 200 to 6999 Channel numbers are respectively assigned to the 4 lower bits of BFM 197 Turn each bit on or off to select the data history update function ON Ifa bit is turned on the corresponding data will be stored in the buffer memories in the order of the smallest BFM number to the largest BFM number but when 1 700 points of data are stored data will be then overwritten in the buffer memories starting from the smallest BFM num
21. Sets the averaging time to 1 for the channel 1 data of the 1st analog special adapter Normally ON Sets the averaging time to 5 for the channel 2 data of the 1st analog special adapter avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa eo gt O aa gt v O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld GVv nexs dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 6 Error Status 4 6 Error Status F 18 If an error is detected in the PT ADP the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data Special data register D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to determine the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors Description Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data bO of channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data b1 of channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PT ADP hardware error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data b2 of
22. The transferred data table is stored in the buffer memory in FX3U 4DA The data table stored in FX3uU 4DA will be erased when power is turned off Therefore it is necessary to transfer the data table after rebooting the power At completion of transfer BFM 99 will automatically change to H0000 Also when transfer is stopped due to an error BFM 99 will automatically change to H0000 When BFM 99 changes to HOOOO check the error flag For a detailed description of errors related to table output refer to Subsection 6 5 If an error occurs during transfer of the data table the data up to the error is transferred Subsequent data is not transferred It is possible to write the data table directly in the buffer memory without using the data table transfer command BFM 99 In this case the correctness of the data table is not evaluated until the table is output by the table output start stop function BFM 80 If a data table with incorrect data is output the data up to the point where incorrect data occurs is output At the point where incorrect data occurs an error is registered and only the data output just before the occurrence of the error is held Execute the data table transfer command BFM 99 as a pulse execution type instruction During transfer of the data table the scan time increases by up to about 10 ms The standard data table transfer time is obtained by the following formula Number of data table items Trans
23. a MOV f for channel 1 data 7 G FNC 12 Sets the averaging time to 5 pees for channel 2 data a E L M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D100 Stores the A D converted E MOV channel 1 digital data into D100 FNC 12 FNC 12 pez61 D101 Stores the A D converted X MOV channel 2 digital data into D101 z gt gJ Even if the input data is not stored into D100 or D101 the data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used 2o in the timer counter setting value or in a PID instruction Be OQ oS C 19 F X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input Characteristics FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics ee 5 Changing of Input Characteristics r Use the scaling instruction SCL FNC 259 for the FX3uU FX3uc Series PLC to change the input characteristics For a detailed description of scaling instruction refer to the FX3U FX3UC Series Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Edition 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital output range of 400 to 2000 when the voltage input is 1 to 5V to the digital output range of O to 10000 1 Input characteristics Voltage input characteristics Digital output value to be changed product specifications Y axis ra ara aa 10000 2 2 z a3 D a5 A 3 Ss
24. data Output of channel 4 over scale upper limit data Output of error detection signal Y21 Output of setting error detection signal A D converted digital value of channel 1 D1 A D converted digital value of channel 2 D2 A D converted digital value of channel 3 3 A D converted digital value of channel 4 D100 Upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to data register D101 Over scale status data automatic transfer to data register D102 Error status data automatic transfer to data register B 55 Q O 3 O T 3 e2 dyr oNeX4 dyr NEXd Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa TI dav var nexs M O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld dVv Nexs dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 2 Example of sequence program B 56 Initial pulse M8002 FNC 12_ H3300 UO GO RUN monitor Mov E M8000 TO FNC 12 H0142 UO G22 Mov FNC 12 K100 UO G126 Mov B FNC 12 K101 U0 G128 Novi 6101 _ vos128 FNC 12 K102 U0 G129 ovg 102 voen FNC 15 UaG10 K4 BMOV Clearance of upper lower FNC 12 H0003 UO G99 Novi H0008 uocoo limit error data FNC 12 KO U0 G28 Novia X000 FNC 12 D100 K2Y000 MOV FNC 12 D101 K2Y010 MOV Setting error detection D102 8 poz Clearance of over scale data X001 RUN monitor M8000 Error detection D102
25. e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible aVv onexs avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa TI dav var nexs M gt ddv Ld QVp Nexs M1d OVt NEXS4 T ddv 88 ONS OL Vr NEXA UOHONSU Aid FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data 4 Programming 4 1 This chapter describes how to create programs that can read analog data using the PTW ADP Loading of A D Conversion Data 1 The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX3U FX3uUC Series PLC 2 If data is stored in the special devices the averaging time can be set and the input mode can be specified 3 Special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest to the main unit For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Section 4 2 Coa High speed input output FX3U 4AD FX3U 4AD FX3uU 4AD hows FX3U 4AD special PTW ADP PTW ADP PTW ADP adapter PTW ADP adapter FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Special devices Special auxiliary relays M8260 to M8269 Special data registers D8260 to D8269 Special auxiliary relays M8270 to M8279 Special data register
26. gain data 2 n BFM 28 disconnection detection status BFM 32 to 35 output data upon PLC stop 2 BFM 38 upper lower limit function setting 2 BFM 41 to 44 lower limit values of upper lower limit function 2 Z BFM 45 to 48 upper limit values of upper lower limit function AE BFM 50 Setting of output corrective function by load resistance 85 1 FX3uU 4DA initializes the corresponding bit to the channel where the user has changed the output mode 2 FX3uU 4DA initializes the corresponding buffer memory to the channel where the user has changed the output mode 3 These settings are initialized only when the output mode is changed from current output mode mode 2 3 or 4 to voltage output mode mode 0 or 1 e HFFFF use of no channels cannot be set D 21 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 2 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 5 10 to 17 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will also be written to the FX3U 4DA EEPROM Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories The maximum number of EEPROM rewrites is 10 000 times Therefore when creating a program do not frequently write data to the above buffer memories BFM 5 4 2 BFM 1 to 4 Output data Initial value KO Numeric data type Decimal K Input the digital va
27. method e Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC occupied 1 Combined use of voltage and current inputs is not possible 2 Adjustment of the volume offset or gain value will change the resolution 3 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will change the resolution A 29 sw UOWLUOD aVr nexs WO QVv Onexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr7 nexa dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS F X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 1 FX3uU 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Number of input points 4ch Specifications 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor s JIS C 1604 1997 Rated temperature range 50 C to 250 C 58 F to 482 F Digital output 500 to 2500 580 to 4820 Input signal Ambient temperature 25 5 C 0 5 for full scale Ambient temperature 0 0 to 55 C 1 0 for full scale Overall accuracy Time required for conversion 200us Data updated every scan time Input characteristics 491 F 0 gt 250 C oe 500 Temperature O 589 Temperature e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from t
28. movia 12 voce e Input modes of channels 1 to 4 will be specified 1 For channels 1 and 2 the averaging time will be set to 10 The digital filter function of channels 1 and 2 will be disabled The digital values set for channels 1 to 4 will be read out to DO to D3 1 After setting the input mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each setting The specified input mode will be retained even if power failure occurs After specifying the input mode if the same input mode is used it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time TO K50 2 To use the default value set for the digital filter function it is not necessary to set the digital filter function in the sequence program FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions 7 2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions This section describes a program that uses the 4AD convenient functions BFM 22 1 Conditions The sequence program described in this section is created under the following conditions 1 2 system configuration The FX3U 4AD unit No 0 should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC Input mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 voltage input 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 3 current input 4mA to 20mA gt 0
29. programs can be created efficiently For a detailed description of buffer memory reading writing refer to Section 5 2 For a detailed description of the buffer memory refer to Section 5 4 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method To read or write the buffer memory of FX3U 4DA use FROM TO instructions or the buffer memory direct specification function To use the buffer memory direct specification function however it is necessary to adopt the software compatible with the FX3U FX3uUC Series PLC For a detailed description of the software compatible with the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC refer to Section 1 4 D 16 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method 5 2 1 Buffer memory direct specification 9 3 3 When directly specifying the buffer memory specify the following device in the source or destination area of 5 the applied instruction as follows 3 U LI G Enter a numeric value in LJ B Unit number 0 to 7 fal E Buffer memory number 0 3098 T OR te 1 Example 1 If the following program is created data in buffer memory BFM 10 of unit 1 will be multiplied by the data C K10 and then the multiplication result will be output to the data registers D10 D11 a x lt EAD command T FNC 22 A p 0 l E Multiplication result Unit number Buffer memory number Multiplier 2 Example 2 If the f
30. should be 150 or more Farget value 3V For the details refer to 2 Cautions on setting below Sampling time TS 1 000 ms or more For the details refer to 2 Cautions on setting below Input filter a 2 Differential gain KD 5 When setting the input filter set the differential gain to 0 usually Others Set other items as necessary 2 Cautions on setting 1 Difference between the target value SV and the measured value PV If the difference between the target value SV and the measured value PV is less than 150 when auto tuning is started auto tuning is not executed normally Accordingly if the difference is less than 150 set the target value for auto tuning Set the target value again when auto tuning is completed Set item Setting in PID instruction Make sure that the difference from the measured value is 150 or male weedy more when auto tuning is started 2 Sampling time Ts Make sure the sampling time is set for auto tuning to 1 second 1000 ms or more It is recommended that the sampling time is set to that it is considerably longer than the output change cycle 3 Setting to ON bit 4 of Css 1 operation setting ACT to start auto tuning When the variation from the measured value at the start of auto tuning to the target value reaches 1 3 or more auto tuning is completed And bit 4 of CS3 1 operation setting ACT is automatically set to OFF 1 Important point Start auto tuning while the
31. together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit For the timing of power on off when using an external power supply see the following manual of the PLC to be connected Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 3 2 To connect to the FX3uc Series PLC 4AD ADP FX3uc Series PLC FX2Nc Series PLC Main unit Input extension 15V block Power HH Power Power crossover connector connector connector Terminal T Black T F Green Black T block C a ee L Class D 24V DC grounding Cautions regarding connection of the power supply line e For the 24V DC power supply line be sure to use the same power as the FX3UC Series PLC e Ground the terminal to a class D grounded power supply line 1009 or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 3 4 Analog Input Line 3 4 Analog Input Line 5 3 O For analog input voltage input or current input can be selected for each channel Terminal an 1 ween 147kQ cho gt gt A S V POOO ahe E e gt SS eee ae Connection of external power supply line PN gt E ee Class D grounding Vdr nexs w dadY dYr N X4 VLI ILJ ch represents the channel number 1 Use the 2 core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog input lines and separate the analog input lines from other power lines or
32. 0 24 Terminal Crimp orles screw terminal 6 3 mm 0 25 or more 63 2 0 13 6 2 mm 0 24 gt Terminal or less i 3 mm 0 25 gt kes more D 10 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 3 3 Wiring to Power Supply Terminals 3 3 Wiring to Power Supply Terminals 5 3 3 1 Examples of Power Supply Circuit 2 Below are examples of circuits for using the 24V DC service power supply of the FX3U Series PLC B 1 Sink input common wiring lt x OE AC power SG 100 to 240 V li x5 Class D T grounding 5 gt s FX3U Series PLC main unit Vdar nexas Connect the S S terminal of the main unit to the 24V terminal 2 Source input common wiring AC power 100 to 240 V dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT 2s T gt gt amp ga U FX3U Series PLC main unit H 2 2s Connect the S S terminal of the main unit to the OV terminal 5 O bg z 3 3 2 Cautions regarding wiring to the power supply terminals I U O e Ground the terminal and terminal to the Class D grounding line 100 Q or less together ca with the ground terminal of the main unit a5 e For the timing of power on off when using an external power supply see the following manual of the g5 connected PLC Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wi
33. 13 peak data BFM 101 to 104 BFM 111 to 114 or data history BFM 200 to 6999 1 Cautions regarding addition data setting e To use the addition data be sure to turn on the data addition function bO of BFM 22 e When setting the lower limit error data BFM 71 to 74 or the upper limit error data BFM 81 to 84 add the addition data BFM 61 to 64 to the error data to be set FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 16 BFM 71 to 74 Lower limit error setting BFM 81 to 84 Upper limit error setting Setting range See below Initial value See below Numeric data type Decimal K Set the upper lower limit error data so that the upper lower limit error status BFM 26 can be detected The data setting range depends on the input mode set in BFM 0 The following table shows the data setting range for each input mode Input mode BFM 0 Initial value Set Setting range Lower limit value Upper limit value Description Channels 1 to 4 Channels 1 to 4 vas BFM 71 to 74 BFM 81 to 84 Voltage input 0 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 32768 to 32767 32768 32767 Voltage input 1 10V to 10V 4000 to 4000 4095 to 4095 4095 4095 Voltage input 2 Analog value direct indication mode 10200 to 10200 10200 10200 10V to 10V 10000 to 10000 Current input 4 Current input 4
34. 3 3 3 Wirin g 7 This chapter describes the 4DA ADP wiring B Observe the following caution to wire the 4DA ADP ae ae Os AD WIRING PRECAUTIONS DANGER SO e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product C x T WIRING PRECAUTIONS A N gt gJ CAUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual a If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be D burnt out a Do not wire vacant terminals externally es i E Doing so may damage the product is gt Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage li
35. 4AD PT ADP ccc ccccccccseeseceecceeeeeeeeeececaeeseseeseeaesaeeeesesaeaseeeeeessaaeeeeeeesseaseeeeeessaaegeeeeeesaags A 30 AAD IE XSUsAAD P TVW ADP eaa a ae pend anepuaieandes suc a a ease dbasteneecseaseaenes A 31 AA SE KOU AAD CADP eian yee nat ec aS ua hac Gad ae geet ETEN A 32 EA REAA D sce pected ees sees cola a be eee bale aca ape aee emetic pease eee tas sores A 33 AES we 7 Bete tee a ee ee eee A 34 OL et ce a cg se sci EEE bn gies db EE AET EA E ete ee ce scence eS PE AE ene wane aan A 35 AAT FAN 2i See ere ar ee ee Oe ee ee Ee eee eee A 36 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment 5 1 How to User the Manuals ssc03168 gt 4 0b cise caens enon iseus aaa a a S 5 2 Description of Related Manuals cccccccccseccceeeeeceeeeceeeesseeeeseeesseeeesaeeees 5 2 1 Analog COMtol manuals senasis e inn areata veeeeeein Eai 5 2 2 Manuals related to the FX3U FX3UC Series PLC main unit ccccccee 5 2 3 ManvialS Of analog UNIS 2 ae ee oe eo 6 Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual Table of Contents FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents FX3u 4AD 4 channel Analog Input F X3uc 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 1 Outline B 3 121 SOUTING ON FUNCIONS sarissa na a T seesaw eno e a as een Rae age B 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ccc cecccceecccsececeeeeeseee
36. A D converted digital value is out of the data table range specified by the scaling instruction SCL cj FNC 259 the FX Series PLC will detect an operation error error code K6706 2 ZX EG OR SO O Vdr nexs w dagv dvr nexa TI dav var nexs M O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld dVv nexs dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS C 21 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 6 1 PLC Version Number Check 6 Troubleshooting This chapter describes troubleshooting methods and error statuses If the A D conversion data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the following items e PLC version number e Wiring e Special devices e Programs e Error status 6 1 PLC Version Number Check e Any versions from Ver 2 20 initial version to the latest version of the FX3U Series are compatible e Check the version number of the FX3UC Series PLC The version number should be 1 20 or later For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 6 2 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Power The 4AD ADP needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of the 4AD ADP is on 2 Analog input line Use 2 core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog input line In addition be sure to sepa
37. BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 21 BFM 63 Specification of data register for automatic transfer at disconnection 9 detection 3 Setting range 0 to 7999 3 Initial value K202 Numeric data type Decimal K B Tl TI Use this function to automatically transfer the disconnection detection status data BFM 28 to the data 25 2 register specified in BFM 63 cs Only when wire break is detected data will be automatically transferred from FX3U 4DA to the PLC For this 6 reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened For a detailed description of the disconnection detection status BFM 28 refer to Subsection 5 4 9 C a 1 If BFM 63 K202 initial value a z Specified data Description s register v D202 Value of disconnection detection status BFM 28 2 Cautions regarding disconnection detection status automatic transfer function setting e Ifa data is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify the same data register Vdar nexas e This function is valid by turning on b2 of the status automatic transfer function setting BFM 60 e When a value out of the above setting range is set b9 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on e The data set in BFM 63 will be retained in the EEPROM 3 Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 5 10 to 17 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60
38. BFM 98 and H0001 is written in the data table transfer command BFM 99 the data table will be transferred from the data register D1000 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory 3 Buffer memory contents in FX3U 4DA after transfer O The transferred data table is stored in the following buffer memory areas E O aj pins Description number 100 y Number of points B 101 Condition after output at final point in pattern viN 02 2 Output data Se KD 103 Point 4 Output update time O Unit of output update time at each point and point to 104 a point interpolation method C E lt pi gt 396 Output data 9 gt j UO 397 Point 99 Output update time Unit of output update time at each point and point to 398 Ea point interpolation method 399 Not used var NeX4 2800 Number of points 2801 Condition after output at final point in pattern E 2802 Output data a A 2803 Point 1 Output update time z Unit of output update time at each point and point to o point interpolation method MO 3 F V z 3096 Output data gt as 3097 Point 99 Output update time 57 Unit of output update time at each point and point to 3098 a point interpolation method G gt x lt z gt gt T 10 E L L AYt NEX4 ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS D 45
39. C 2 lt T gt s k Time Sampling time TS D Alarm flag Y bit A onN 5 bit1 When the output variation CS 1 bit 2 is set to 1 Variation Na CNEL Aa Output MV dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI A T Time gt Sampling time TS 2 gt U Alarm flag s Gs a i 3 24 H bit2 r 424 ON x bit3 5 When the preset input output variation is exceeded T Each bit of 24 alarm flags turns ON immediately after PID instruction execution a UONONISUI did 88 ONS l 17 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Auto Tuning PID Instruction FNC 88 4 1 Limit Cycle Method SEU 4 Auto Tuning This chapter describes the auto tuning function of PID instruction The auto tuning function will automatically set the important constants such as the proportional gain and the integral time to ensure optimum PID control There are two auto tuning methods limit cycle method and step response method 4 1 Limit Cycle Method 4 1 1 Parameters set in auto tuning of limit cycle method Parameter Setting position Proportional gain KP 3 Integral time T1 4 Differential time TD 6 1 18 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Auto Tuning PID Instruction FNC 88 4 1 Limit Cycle Method A 4 1 2 Auto tuning procedure k 3 3 1 Set the forward or backward operation a Set the operation direction flag bit 0 in the operation setting param
40. C BFM 2 to 5 BFM 6 to 9 Channel data type Update timing V oo EOE data Each time the A D conversion is performed the z Toress 0 The digital filter 0 will be set and the data will be updated T will not be used averaging time setting error The update timing will be as follows s b10 of BFM 29 will occur 0 The digital filter Update time 500us x Number of D will not baused mediate gata selected channels pi i gt lt Each time the A D conversion is performed the TE 1 1 to 1600 Immediate data data will be updated gt The digital filter The digital filter function will The update timing will be as follows will be used be used Update time 5ms x Number of selected channels E Each time the A D conversion is performed the x data will be updated z The update timing will be as follows 2 2 to 400 Average data Update time 500us x Number of v O The digital filter selected channels F 401 to 4095 will not be used Average data Each time the A D conversion is performed for A dat the set averaging time the data will be updated 3 i K o The update timing will be as follows A 4096 will be set and the gt 4096 or more a cra 4 T3 averaging time setting error Update time 500us x Number of gt I b10 of BFM 29 will occur selected channels x Averaging time O 1 500us represents the A D conversion time However if one of the channels uses the digital filter function the A
41. C 19 4 0 Basi PVOGlaliy EXamplE ament a as ado yent creates a a a a a a EE C 19 5 Changing of Input Characteristics C 20 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics cccccccccceececseeeeceeeeseeceeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeaes C 20 6 Troubleshooting C 22 6 1 PEC Version Number CneCku4 525 ae tances ten aelan A ee C 22 0 2 NINE CROKE aren een et eo ae eo nee ora ee C 22 6 5 Special Device CHECK osc sass erecta eee eee ee cae eae eae ceeds eee ee C 23 0A Progrant CCK Seen ase chs See nce cence tet maseaced eased a tiaddensetuapicao sens C 23 0o em a e 8 ko CECR oea ne ee ee ee eer ee ene C 24 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents FX3u 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 1 Outline D 3 AA OUTING OP RUMC OMS tein scion a oat oh Phe bach ad se tea tararee a kat tdatur ene nat at aidtarerud ee duieaa crane de aes D 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation cccccccccseccccececeeeeeceeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeseaeesseeesaeeees D 4 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers ccccseececcaseeeeeaeeeecaeeceesaeesecsauseeseaeseesaeesessaeeeneas D 5 1 4 Version Number of Compatible Programming ToOOIS cccccceceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeeas D 5 2 Specifications D 6 ZA GOMENIC SOCGCIICALIONS sos cctctan acolesetncabosibe cece T D 6 2 2 POWEROUDDIV SD CCI CANOINS seriea a euletatilac stud aadue Mae teszoden thea bdlede D 7 2 3 PEROlManGe SPECIIC
42. D conversion start END instruction A D command conversion ee Digital value writing a 200us 4ch A D conversion during PLC stop Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated If two or more analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter 2nd adapter 4th adapter A D conversion speed data update time During execution of the END instruction the A D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 200us and the data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 200us x number of connected adapters Temperature Measurement F 8 To stabilize the temperature measurement warm up the system for 30 minutes or more after power on FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input re 3 Wiring This chapter describes the PT ADP wiring Observe the following caution to wire the PT ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS OD ANGER e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring
43. D conversion time will be 5 ms for all the channels MLld AYt N X4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS B 31 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 9 4 5 BFM 19 Data change disable Setting range K2080 or value other than K2080 Initial value at delivery K2080 Numeric data type Decimal K Disables adjustment of the following BFMs e Input mode specification BFM 0 e Initialization function BFM 20 e Input characteristics writing BFM 21 e Convenient functions BFM 22 e Offset data BFM 41 to 44 e Gain data BFM 51 to 54 e Automatic transfer to data register specification BFM 125 to 129 e Data history sampling time setting BFM 198 Set the value of BFM 19 Data change disable as follows Set value Description K2080 Data change enabled Value other than K2080 Data change disabled Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 5 4 66 BFM 20 Initialization function resetting to factory default status Setting range KO or K1 Initial value KO Numeric data type Decimal K Use this function to initialize all data in BFM 0 to 69
44. DC power supply line of the PTW ADP to the 24 and 24 terminals of the terminal block 3 3 1 To connect to FX3u Series PLC 1 To use an external power 2 To use the 24V DC power of the PLC PTW ADP FX3uU Series PLC PTW ADP FX3uU Series PLC Main unit Main unit 5 V 5V TE Terminal w g Terminal block block Class D Class D 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line Ground the terminal to a class D grounding power supply line 100Q or less together with the ground terminal of the PLC main unit For the timing of power on off when using an external power supply see the following manual of the PLC to be connected Refer to the FX3U Series User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 3 2 To Connect To The FX3uc Series PLC PTW ADP FX3uc Series PLC FX2NC Main unit Series PLC 5V Input extension block Power Power Power crossover connector connector connector Terminal Black Green Black block Class D 24V DC grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line e For the 24V DC power supply line be sure to use the same power as the FX3UC Series PLC e Ground the terminal to a class D grounding power supply line 100Q or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 4
45. Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed Vdr nexs w dadY dYr N X4 day G eave nexs TI aavvarnexa ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav OI CWp NeX4 ae ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS C 9 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of the 4AD ADP are arranged as follows Signal 24 24 24 24 oooooo0o0o0o0o0 OOOO OOO os Vit 11 COM1 V2 I2 COM2 V3 IS COM3 V4 14 COM4 V3 COM2 2 V2 COM1 l Vi COM4 4 V4 COM3 3 loo000 Oooo Application External power Grounding terminal Channel 1 analog input Channel 2 analog input Channel 3 analog input Channel 4 analog input 3 1 Terminal Layout FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Applicable Cables a
46. For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 9 3 Program Check Check the program as follows 1 Check the output mode and output data Check that data has been set correctly in BFM 0 to 4 2 Check the settings Check that the offset data BFM 10 to 13 gain data BFM 14 to 17 upper lower limit function setting BFM 38 and table output function start stop setting BFM 80 are correct FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 9 Troubleshooting FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 9 4 Error Status Check 9 4 Error Status Check g 3 O When an error occurs in FX3U 4DA the bit appropriate to the error is turned on in the error status BFM 29 Take measures referring to the following table 2 Bit No Items B bO Error detection uly b1 O G error Of SO b2 Power supply error b3 Hardware error bd C b5 Error in setting of function for setting output upon PLC stop a b6 Upper lower limit function setting error T J gt b7 Error in corrective function setting by load resistance T Valid only in voltage output mode b8 Table output function setting error b9 Status automatic transfer setting error b10 Over scale z b11 Disconnection detection Valid only in current output mode z b12 Setting data change prohibited b13 to b15 1 Error detection b0 1 Description of error If any of b1 is turned on this bit 611 will turn on 2 O G error b1 1 Description of error T
47. G 12 3 9 2 TO ConnectTo The FX3UC Series PUC roren a ee ee ee ee G 12 3 4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer SeENSOl cccccsececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees G 13 3 5 Wiring of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor ccccceecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaaeeeesaees G 13 OST OUI a A alata aa N yescs tis Sassen to E ecb cera G 13 4 Programming G 14 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeaeeseeeseeeeeesseeeesseseeeseeeeesaaeees G 14 4 2 LISTOL Special DEVICES orena AA diets dhted scence deine antes adtnan tes G 15 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit 0 0 0 ce ccccccccceececeeeeseeeeeseeeesseeeeseeeseeeeeseeeseeeessaeesseeessaaees G 15 4 4 Temperature MEaSUreMen cccccccescccsececeeeceueeceeccueeceuceseeceucesuessaeecaueeceessueesueesuseneeesaaaes G 16 AI FAV Crain WING Gato senctes cnc sce i see ncsumecaaaresealarceurecesnisenoas ge apaamsacaaecimeadasuemeanaarisiete eeeaees G 17 AO EMO tens ai one sancns tea maratenasmeeie sears Secne acs eeenebocomscneece tee oreh edema cute ee G 18 As MOON COG cere S EE G 20 AO Basi Program Example pasren a a a a onesie ae ate G 20 5 Troubleshooting G 21 5 1 PEC Version Number Check auo iaer etter sca a elec ae eect meee G 21 92 WINO C DOCK ms eats tact ters dh hands hearin atic ictal aoe ah ea ta reat cette G 21 Ho DpeClal DEVICE CHECK sees seca tt eaa unread seedacvendeta dita a cancun debaniedciese G 21 LOGI
48. If the voltage input mode is set write the offset and gain data in mV If the current input mode is set write the offset and gain data in uA To change the offset data or gain data turn on the corresponding bit of BFM 21 buffer memory for input characteristics writing The data setting range is shown in the following table Voltage input mV Current input uA 10000 to 9000 20000 to 17000 2 Gain data 9000 to 10000 17000 to 30000 2 Offset data 1 The offset and gain values should meet the following condition Gain value Offset value gt 1000 2 The offset and gain values should meet the following condition 30000 gt Gain value Offset value gt 3000 3 Cautions regarding offset gain data change e Ifthe analog value direct indication mode is used the input characteristics cannot be changed e Even if the input characteristics are changed the actual valid input range will not be changed from 10V to 10V for the voltage input mode and from 20mA to 20mA for the current input mode e Even if the input characteristics are changed the resolution will not increase For a detailed description of input characteristics change refer to Chapter 6 5 4 15 BEM 61 to 64 Addition data B 40 Setting range 16000 to 16000 Initial value KO Numeric data type Decimal K If the addition data BFM 61 to 64 is set the set data will be added before storing the channel data BFM 10 to
49. J 4 4 Selection of Type K or J Turn on the J type or off the K type selection special auxiliary relay to select the thermocouple type J or K for TC ADP The thermocouple type will be selected for all the channels at the same time To select the thermocouple type use the following special auxiliary relays Special auxiliary relay ee ee Selection of type K or J M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 OFF Type K ON Type J 1 Program Example Description 1 To select thermocouple type K for the 2 To select thermocouple type J for the 1st adapter 2nd adapter M8001 s26 M8000 ear Normally OFF Normally ON 4 5 Temperature Measurement The temperature data input in the TC ADP will be stored in the special data registers The special data registers that store the temperature data are shown in the following table Special data register a 1st Description S D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Stores the channel 3 temperature measurement data D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Stores the channel 4 temperature measurement data The immediate data or the average data data averaged in accordance with the specified averaging time will be stored in the above data registers as the temperature measurement data For a detailed description of the averaging time refer to Section 4 6 1 Caution regarding tem
50. OF rs 4000 Jo yet Van 32640 e A080 ff e 10200 2 Current input characteristics 4 to 20mA Input mode 3 to 5 Set input mode 5 Set input mode 3 Set input mode 4 Input type Current input Input type Current input Input type Current input COE i analog value direct indication Analog input range 4 to 20mA Analog input range 4 to 20 mA i i Analog input range 4 to 20 mA Digital output range O to 16000 Digital output range 0 to 4000 Digital output range 4000 to 20000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Offset gain adjustment Possible g p ge Offset gain adjustment Impossible Digital value Digital value Digital value 20mA Current 0 4mA 20mA Current input input Q O 3 O T 3 e2 dyr oNeX4 dyr NEXd Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa day dav OL OYH NEX4 me Mid Ovb nex4 Q id ave nexd TI aav var nexs M ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 2 4 Input Mode Characteristics BFM 0 3 Current input characteristics 20 to 20mA Input mode 6 to 8 Set input mode 6 Set input mode 7 er upu mope i i Input type Current input Input type Current input Input type Current input eee s analog value direct indication Analog input range 20 to 20mA Analog input range 20 to 20mA re a Analog input range 20 to 20mA Digital output
51. ON Setting is provided TI dav var nexs M The upper limit and lower limit of the output value work as shown in the graph below x The upper limit and lower limit of the output value can moderate the increase of the integral item in the PID T control When using the upper limit and lower limit of the output value make sure to set 1 bit 2 is set to OFF 57 Set item Setting setting range G Operation setting CSS H ACT N v ACT os USe o ACT Output value upper lower limit setting SFF Not used i T gt U Output value Gs When the upper limit and lower These values H limit of output value are not set gr not output ZTN A gt Ss 22 y pa Output value P S E I ie upper limit lt SN ae Nr i z O S3 23 i Output value gt ae r Th lower limit g RAZ ge sepa E SI PA put When the upper limit and lower DN ae limit of output value are set Aa Time Be 1 11 F X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters 3 2 3 Input filter a S3 2 Setting range 0 to 99 PID control Proportional operation integral operation and differential operation The input filter a is a software filter to reduce the fluctuation of the measured value PV caused by noise By setting this time constant of the filter according to the control target characteristics and noise level the effect of noise can b
52. Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor 3 4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor Select the Pt100 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor This thermometer will not be affected by voltage drop in the wiring area and will ensure accurate measurement 3 5 Wiring of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor PTW ADP 5 Twisted shielded tien 4 7kQ l 4 7kKQ Pt100 cable bloc JE We es eo 2 _ Shield S 5V Twisted shielded 4 7KQ 4 7KQ 1 cable d 100k chu O LLI l aa os e 24 voc E T He 24 eea Pt100 N Class D grounding LU LU ILJ chl LI represents the channel number 1 Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer sensor from the other power cables or areas easily affected by inductive noise of the commercial power etc 3 6 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below e The grounding resistance should be 100Q or less e Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC Series PLC Other Other Other R equipment equipment equipment Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed e The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm
53. Specifications 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input Specifications FX2N 8AD Number of input points 8ch A Thermocouple type K J and T Parag JIS C 1602 1995 Type K e Type K 100 C to 1200 C 148 F to 2192 F Type J e TypeJ eee 00C to 600 C 148 F to 1112 F Type T e TypeT 100 C to 350 C 148 F to 662 F Type K e Type K 1000 to 12000 1480 to 21920 E Type J e Type J PE oa 1000 to 6000 1480 to 11120 Type T 1000 to 3500 e TypeT 1480 to 6620 Resolution 0 1 F gt Type K e Type K g 0 5 6 5 C for full scale 0 5 11 7 F for full scale Ambient temperature Type J e Type J 0 to 55 C 0 5 3 5 C for full scale 0 5 6 3 F for full scale S Type T e Type T 6 0 7 3 15 C for full scale 0 7 5 67 F for full scale Time required for conversion Input characteristics 40ms x number of selected channels 350 C 1200 C 662 F 2192 F Type T Type K Type T Type K a 1480 gt Temperature Temperature e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs e Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC A 35 SWW9 UOWLWOD aVr Nexs WU QVv Onexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa dav G eave nexs T
54. Supply Circuit Q O 3 O T 3 e2 3 3 1 FX3u 4AD Below are shown examples of circuits for using the 24V DC service power supply of the FX3U Series PLC 1 Sink input common wiring lt gt AC power so 100 to 240 V FX3U Series PLC main unit Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa Connect the S S terminal of the main unit to the 24V terminal 2 Source input common wiring AC power 100 to 240 V dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 ddv FX3U Series PLC main unit L FX3U 4AD Connect the S S terminal of the main unit to the OV terminal L AYt NEX4 ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 3 Examples of Power Supply Circuit 3 3 2 FX3UC 4AD 3 3 3 Class D grounding 24V DC Terminal block Terminal block FX3uc Series PLC Main unit FX2NcC Series PLC Input extension block FX3UC 4AD FX3UC 4AD 15V 15V Power Power crossover connector connector Power crossover connector Power crossover connector Power connector connector Red Black connector Black FX2Nc 10BPCB1 FX2NC 10BPCB1 Power crossover cable Power crossover cable FX2NcC 100BPCB Power cable Cautions regarding connection of power cables B 16 Ground t
55. TC ADP to the 24 and 24 terminals of the terminal block 3 3 1 To connect to FX3u Series PLC 1 To use an external power 2 To use the 24V DC power of the PLC TEADE FX3u Series PLC IOn FX3u Series PLC 5V Main unit 5V Main unit Terminal Terminal block 7 z a block Class D Class D 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line e Ground the terminal to a class D grounding power supply line 100Q or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit For the timing of power on off when using an external power supply see the following manual of the PLC to be connected 3 3 2 Refer to the FX3uU Series User s Manual Hardware Edition To connect to the FX3uc Series PLC TC ADP FX2NC FX3Uc Series PLC Series PLC 5V Main unit Input extension block Power F Power Power crossover T3 A connector connector connector Terminal Black Green Black block L Class D 24V DC grounding Cautions regarding connection of the power supply line e For the 24V DC power supply line be sure to use the same power as the FX3UC Series PLC e Ground the terminal to a class D grounding power supply line 100Q or less together with the ground terminal of the PLC main unit FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 3 4 Selection of the Thermocouple 3 4 Sele
56. Type K 148 F to 1832 F range Type J 100 C to 600 C Type J 148 F to 1112 F E Type K 1000 to 10000 Type K 1480 to 18320 Digital output Type J 1000 to 6000 Type J 1480 to 11120 Resolution Input signal Total accuracy 0 5 full scale 1 C A D conversion 200us The data will be updated at every scan time time For a detailed description of data update refer to Section2 4 elype K 18500 __ 18320 f 9 iu IO w I 0 4148F 0 I i wit 1832 F Or ap oe 1480 Input tere TTO0 0 j Ile 1660 characteristics e yp 11300 Qnccecnceccencecesce ee 11120 f are IO i I 148 F 0 I uot 1112 F oir o M 1480 ane 1660 e The photo coupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the driving power supply line from the analog input area e Channels are not insulated from each other Insulation method Number of I O 0 points points occupied This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC aVv onexs avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI gt O ddv 88 ONS M1d QVt NEXS4 OL AVP NEXA UONONISU id FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 2 4 A D Conversi
57. V4 COM3 l3 E 10 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque 5 3 O Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment Terminate the cable end as shown below 1 Cable Applicable cable and tightening torque B Wire size stranded Tightening Te nin acon ce single wire torque amp gt 0 3mm to 0 5mm e To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable igi we AWG22 to 20 and then twist the core before connection P e To connect a single wire cable just peel the cover off the C 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 cable before connection p j 7 0 22N m to e Rod terminal with insulation sleeve a Rod terminal 9 3mm to 0 5mm recommended terminal with AWG22 to 20 Al 0 5 8WH Manufactured by Phoenix Contact T insulation Refer to me fos una e Caulking tool z sleeve aie i CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact Stolow ng AGUE or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact D ae gt lt 2 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve z e To directly terminate the end of a stranded single wire cable Termination crcableend Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude a Zz Do not sol
58. X4 gt D UONONISUI did 88 ONS l 15 F X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters Example 1 PID operation in heating backward operation Changes caused by disturbance TDs PID operation Target value SV PI operation without differential operation TD2 PID operation Temperature TD1 PID operation TD3 gt TD2 gt TD1 Time e Changes in output caused by disturbance Output MV TDs PID operation Tp3 gt Tp2 gt TD1 TD1 PID operation TD2 PID operation PI operation without differential operation Time Example 2 PID operation in cooling forward operation TD3 gt TD2 gt TD1 PI operation without differential operation Changes caused by disturbance Temperature Tp1 PID operation Tb2 PID operation gt Target value SV Tps PID operation Time TD3 gt TD2 gt TD1 J Changes in output caused by disturbance To2 PI operation Output MV Tp1 PID operation PI operation without differential operation TDs PID operation Time 1 16 F X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters 3 2 8 Alarm output flag S3 24 a 3 3 When the input variation CS3 1 bit 1 is set to 1 3 Variation a 7 B 3 BA ZR D DA INAN i D gt
59. analog input area from the PLC e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs e Channels are not insulated from each other 0 points This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 4 FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD PT Specifications Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Number of input points 4ch 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor s DIN43760 Apur gna Pt100 JIS C 1604 1997 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 Input signal current 1mA Constant current system Rated temperature range 100 C to 600 C 148 F to 1112 F Digital output 1000 to 6000 1480 to 11120 Resolution 0 2 C to 0 3 C 0 36 F to 0 54 F Overall accuracy 1 0 for full scale Time required for 60ms 15msx4ch conversion RR E T5 oe Ao Input characteristics 0 gt 1112F r Temperature P Temperature e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs e Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Count either the input or output points of the PLC A 33 SWW9 UOWLUOD aVr nexs WU QVv Onexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr7 nexa dav G eave n
60. and Test Program 8 Digital filter setting error b11 1 Description of error The digital filter value BFM 6 to 9 is not set correctly 2 Remedy Set the digital filter value again in the range from 0 to 1600 Also check that the averaging is not set for the selected channel 9 Abrupt change detection value setting error b12 1 Description of error The abrupt change detection value BFM 91 to 94 is not set correctly 2 Remedy Check that the abrupt change detection value is in the range specified for the selected input mode If the value is out of the range correct it 10 Upper lower limit detection setting error b13 1 Description of error The lower limit error detection value BFM 71 to 74 or the upper limit error detection value BFM 81 to 84 is not set correctly 2 Remedy Check that the upper lower limit error detection value is in the range specified for the selected input mode If the value is out of the range correct it 11 Addition data setting error b15 1 Description of error The addition data BFM 61 to 64 is not set correctly 2 Remedy Set the addition data again in the range from 16000 to 16000 8 5 4AD Initialization and Test Program If the remedies above cannot solve the problem initialize and then check the conditions of the 4AD using the test program For a detailed description of 4AD initialization program refer to Subsection 7 4 For a detailed de
61. at the point The setting range depends on the output mode and offset gain setting 7 Output update time number of data items 1 Output time to the next point The output update time for the n th point is the output time between the n th point and the n 1 th point When the pattern is repeated the output update time at the final point is used as the output time between the final point and the first point When the pattern is not repeated the output update time for the final point is ignored The setting range is 1 to 32767 For the unit refer to Item 8 When a value out of the setting range is set the error code is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 2 Preparation of data table 8 Output update time unit and point to point interpolation method number of data items 1 Set the unit of the output update time and the point to point interpolation method for each point The output update time unit and the point to point interpolation method for the n th point are applied between the n th point and the n 1 th point When the pattern is repeated the output update time unit and the point to point interpolation method are applied between the final point and the fi
62. channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PT ADP communication data error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data b3 of channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error 1 Caution regarding use of error status data If a PT ADP hardware error b6 or PT ADP communication data error b7 is detected it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at the next power on of the PLC For this reason be sure to create the following program M8002 Error status of 1st analog special adapter RST b6 OFF hardware error D8268 6 Initial pulse Error status of 1st analog special adapter RST b7 OFF communication data error D8268 7 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 6 Error Status 2 Program Example 9 5 S D8268 0 000 The temperature measurement data 2 of channel 1 is outside the specified 2 range or disconnection is detected D8268 1 B Yo00 The temperature measurement data ERUS of channel 2 is outside the specified a a range or disconnection is detected On D8268 2 So 002 The temperature measurement data a of channel 3 is outside the specified D8268 3 range or disconnection is detected C Yo03 The temperature measurement data p of channel 4 is outside the specified 2S range
63. constant AMV Output variation Kb _ Differential gain MVn Operation quantity at this time 2 Expression for calculating the measured value after the filter in sampling at this time PVnf The value PVnf is obtained from the following expression based on the read measured value Measured value after filter PVnf PVn L PVnf 1 PVn PVn Measured value in sampling at this time L Filter coefficient PVnf 1 Measured value in previous cycle after filter FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 How to Use PID Instruction PID Instruction FNC 88 2 1 Explanation of function and operation 2 Howto Use PID Instruction 1 Instruction format 16 bit Operation Condition 32 bit Operation Condition Instruction Instruction 9 steps PID A peice 2 Set data Operand type Description Data type Data register storing the target value SV Binary 16 bit Data register storing the measured value PV Binary 16 bit Data register storing PID parameters Binary 16 bit CD Data register storing the output value MV Binary 16 bit 3 Target devices Operand Digit Specification System User ie type Lf ee 2 ee eee lity ty ft ie iey S tt yt 2 1 Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit PID operation Once the target value S1 measured value and PID parameters to CS3 6 are set and the program is executed the operation result MV is transferred to the output v
64. controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Revised History re Revised History Date 7 2005 2 2006 3 2006 3 2007 12 2007 Revision Description A First Edition D E FX3U 4A
65. data are shown in the following table Special data register D8260 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data D8261 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data D8262 Stores the channel 3 temperature measurement data D8263 Stores the channel 4 temperature measurement data The immediate data or the average data data averaged in accordance with the specified averaging time will be stored in the above data registers as the temperature measurement data For a detailed description of the averaging time refer to Section 4 6 Description Caution regarding temperature measurement The special data registers for temperature measurement data is for reading only Do not change rewrite the current data using the sequence program indicator or device monitor of the programming tool Program Example M8000 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in D100 FNC 12 D8260 D100 ney 02260 roo FNC 12 D8261 D101 ney ove oor Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in the D100 or the D101 the D8260 or the D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction Normally ON Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in D101 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Da
66. deleted the previously set functions will still be valid FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 3 Program That Uses Data History Function 7 3 Program That Uses Data History Function This section describes a program that uses the data history function of the 4AD Q O 3 O T 3 e2 1 Conditions The sequence program described in this section is created under the following functions 1 System configuration x The FX3U 4AD unit No 0 should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC SE 2 Input mode ae Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 voltage input 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 3 current input 4mA to 20mA gt 0 to 16000 3 Averaging time For all the channels the averaging time should be set to 1 default To use the default value it is not necessary to set the averaging time in the sequence program 4 Digital filter function For all channels the digital filter function should be disabled default To use the default value it is not necessary to set the digital filter function in the sequence program 5 Data history function For all channels the data sampling time should be set to 100 ms The sampling cycle should be 100 ms x 4 number of selected channels 400 ms For all channels data will be sampled 100 times and the sampled data wil
67. e E S E atau oassusincsastenmesaeneusanes D 63 9 5 FX3U 4DA Initialization and Test Program sisi tienes os ectseeehonteiaotents eelerteatents le erts aetents itil D 64 10 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents F X3u 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 1 Outline E 3 AA OUTS Ol FE UIC WON SS ott en celal eh daca 8 at date os ey ad a ant iyladat tara dyae ol E 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ccc ceccccsececsececeeeeeceeeeseeeeeseeesseeeeseaeesseeesseeeees E 4 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers ccccsseccccsseeeceeeeeecaeececeaueeeccaeeseessaeeesaaeeeesaeeeeesaaes E 5 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeseeesaaeeeesseeeeesaees E 5 2 Specifications E 6 ZA Geneng SOS GIN CAUOINS xscs cctures 5s olcee tne uate a E A E 6 2 2 POWErOSUDDIV SPCCIICAOINS ennen A a n E 7 2 3 PEMORMANCe Specification Sas uani a E E A AA E 7 24 DIA CONVEFSION TINE cene A TR ETTEN E 8 3 Wiring E 9 Ms Terminala yout astro esis aces E Sees geese sate mn Maes N seme eae E 10 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ccccccceeccceeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeseeeeseeeeseeeseeeeaes E 11 6 0 Power SUD DIY IMC ica ere a ated E A E 12 331 TO Commect tothe FXASU Senes PLG aieri bias saad alta a a E N E 12 392 To Connect Fo ine FXSUC Senes PLC eee a ae E E 12 S4 Analog QUtpP t LINS seina E aed eae E E S E 13 39 Gr
68. end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve If the cable sheath is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into Insulation sleeve Contact area the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while Canales referring to the external view Caulking tool CRIMPFOX ZA 3 0 1 0 55 or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 8WH 3 Tool e To tighten terminals use a small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the figure to the right Note If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not be able to be achieved Use the following recommended screwdriver or Mca cae an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm straight Manufacturer Type Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4 x 2 5 0 4m 25mm 0 01 gt lt 0 09 F 11 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt QVv ONnexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa eo z gt O 1 gt U O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld dVv nexs dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 3 Power Supply Line 3 3 Power Supply Line Connect the 24V DC power supply line of the PT ADP to the 24 and 24 terminals of the terminal block 3 3 1 To connect to FX3u Series PLC 1 To use an external power 2 To use the 24
69. for l 1ms The number of selected channels will not affect this value D A conversion e The photo coupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC Insulation method The DC DC converter is used to insulate the analog output area from the power supply unit e Channels are not insulated from each other day G eave nexs TI aavvarnexa ITI Numoer of VO 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC points occupied v 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In output mode 1 or 4 however the iS offset gain cannot be adjusted i gt 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition Se 1V lt Gain Offset lt 10 V 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 3 mA lt Gain Offset lt 30 mA L L AYt NEX4 ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS D 7 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 2 4 Output Mode Characteristics BFM 0 2 4 Output Mode Characteristics BFM 0 For the FX3U 4DA there are two types of output characteristics voltage 10 to 10V and current 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA output characteristics The output characteristics depend on the set output mode as described below 1 Voltage output characteristics 10 to 10V Output mode 0 1 Set output mode 1 Set output mode 0 Output type Voltage output
70. for optimizing the PID control These constants can be set automatically For a detailed description of auto tuning limit cycle method refer to Section 4 1 For a detailed description of auto tuning step response method refer to Section 4 2 F X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 1 Parameter List S3 to S3 28 SOU g O 3 3 3 Parameter 2 This chapter describes various parameters of PID instruction B T TI i 25 eS 3 1 Parameter List S3 to S3 28 ST SO J er It cannot be shorter than operation Subsection Sampling time TS 1 to 32767 ms cycle of the PLC 324 as A bitO 0 ONA Parana Operation direction S 1 Backward operation gt UO 0 Input variation alarm is invalid X bit1 a 1 Input variation alarm is valid D 0 Output variation alarm is invalid Do not set to ON bit 2 and bit 5 at bit2 fie i U 1 Output variation alarm is valid same time gt lt Not available E gt ES Operation 0 Auto tuning is not executed Subsection C33 1 setting ACT 1 Auto tuning is executed 3 2 2 0 Upper and lower limits of output value are not valid Do not set to ON bit 2 and bit 5 at bit5 A 1 Upper and lower limits of output same time value are valid 0 Step response method 1 Limit cycle method Select auto tuning mode CS 2 ied is set input filter is not aril Dia pomno erre Fa x lai oe r
71. for the data registers D1000 to D7999 because at least six points are occupied or KO to K32762 for the expansion registers RO to R32767 because at least six points are occupied Example When the data table is set starting from D1000 set K1000 in BFM 98 When a value out of the setting range is set the error code K21 is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the number of the buffer memory K98 that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on Start transferring the data table BFM 99 initial value H0000 Transfer the data table from the PLC to the FX3U 4DA using the data table transfer command BFM 99 Invalidte Data table transfer command Invalid Register type e Data table transfer command Set value Transfer command 0 No processing 1 Execution of transfer of data table Other than above Invalid values e Register type Set value Register type 0 Transfer of data table from data registers D1000 to 7999 Transfer of data table from expansion registers RO to 32767 Other than above ae Invalid values When a value out of the setting range is set the error code is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the number of the buffer memory K99 that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on Example When K1000 is written in the head device number of data table
72. function b3 of BFM 22 Note dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI e Ifthe data addition function bO of BFM 22 is used together with this function the addition data will be added to the measurement data e Ifthe value holding function is not used the peak value will be KO 2 Peak value automatic transfer function b4 of BFM 22 If the automatic transfer to first data register is specified in BFM 125 the minimum peak value and the maximum peak value will be automatically written to the specified data registers 8 points registers starting from the first data register specified MLld AYt N X4 ddv L When the peak value is updated data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For this X reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scan time of the PLC can be z shortened 5 O Represents a numeric value 38a a U Convenient tunetion Automatic data transfer function setting l Transfer to data register specification z E BFM 125 KO ON Valid Transfer from buffer memory 8 points registers starting from the 38 specified data register ae oe BFM 22 b4 ON BFM 101 to 104 DLI to DLI 3 BFM 22 b3 ON BFM 111 to 114 DLI 4 to DLI 7 B 43 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 20 BFM 109 Minimum peak value resetting
73. hardware of the FX3u Series PLC main unit such as product oe ge a l specifications wiring and installation FX3U Series User s Manual Hardware Edition J 997D16501 FX3UC Series PLC FX3uc D DSS Series HARDWARE MANUAL JY997D28601 Provides detailed information on the hardware such as ee ak Fanya JY997D28701 e the input output specifications and detailed wiring EPAL installation and maintenance methods for the FX3uc PLC FX3U FX3UC Series PLC FX3U FX3UC Series Ss Proarammina Manual Basic JY997D16601 Supplied This manual describes the basic and application g g separately commands necessary for the FX3U FX3UC Series PLC amp Applied Instruction Edition FX3U Series PLC FX3U Series HARDWARE MANUAL This manual describes various items necessary for the FX3U Series PLC main unit and various items for the hardware such as extension specifications wiring and installation Supplied separately The input output specifications and the wiring and installation methods for the FX3uc D DSS PLC are excerpted from the FX3uc Series User s Manual for Hardware For details refer to the FX3uc Series User s Manual for Hardware Supplied with product A 38 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 5 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment 5 2 3 Manuals of analog units The manuals of various analog units are described belo
74. input temperature measurement value is outside the specified range The temperature measurement value of thermocouple type K is not in the range between 110 C to 1010 C or the temperature measurement value of thermocouple type J is not in the range between 110 C to 610 C Or the line between TC ADP and the thermocouple is disconnected 2 Remedy Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range Also check the wiring condition day G eave nexs TI aavvarnexa ITI MLld AYt N X4 gt O 2 EEPROM error b4 x 1 Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory is unreadable or is destroyed gt 2 Remedy gt g Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office i 3 Averaging time setting error b5 1 Description of error g The averaging time set for one of the channels channels 1 to 4 is outside the specified range 1 to 4095 aa 2 Remedy oe Check that the averaging time is correctly set for each channel H 23 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 5 5 Error Status Check H 24 4 TC ADP hardware error b6 1 2 Description of error The TC ADP does not operate properly Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to the TC ADP Also check that the TC ADP is correctly connected to the PLC
75. is set to 0 WVhen the input mode is set to 6 7 16320 16000 7 3 T x oY IQ v 20mA 0 hat F P 20mA Ei 2 ee oO G Input characteristics an Z 16000 gt edocs 16320 y WVhen the input mode is set to 3 U 16400 G 16000 7 le IE z IN oo 1 1 T 1 IN e 1 gt i Oo gt U 0 4mA 20mA 53 z e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs L e Channels are not insulated from each other X GE A Seoc ORO pomt 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC S occupied 2 BO 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In the direct indication mode however the aS offset gain cannot be adjusted l 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 7 1V lt Gain Offset J 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition gt B 3mA lt Gain Offset lt 30mA ae 4 The resolution and the input output characteristics depend on the selected mode Be 5 If 1 or more channels use the digital filter s the time required for A D conversion will be 5 ms x number of selected channels F X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 4 FX2N
76. mal 5 4 15 41 Channel 1 lower limit of upper lower limit function K 32640 gt lt 42 Channel 2 lower limit of upper lower limit function Depending on the K 32640 Subsection e gt 43 Channel 3 lower limit of upper lower limit function mode used K 32640 5 4 16 z 44 Channel 4 lower limit of upper lower limit function K 32640 45 Channel 1 upper limit of upper lower limit function K32640 46 Channel 2 upper limit of upper lower limit function Depending on the K32640 Subsection E 47 Channel 3 upper limit of upper lower limit function mode used K32640 5 4 16 x S 48 Channel 4 upper limit of upper lower limit function K32640 gt 4 Corrective function setting by load resistance 4 40000 Hexadeci Subsection Ri 50 Valid only in voltage output mode mal 5 4 17 F 51 1 Load resistance value for channel 1 Unit Q K1000 to K30000 K30000 gt lt 52 1 Load resistance value for channel 2 Unit Q K1000 to K30000 K30000 sibe 53 Load resistance value for channel 3 Unit Q K1000 to K30000 K30000 5 4 17 ate am 54 1 Load resistance value for channel 4 Unit Q K1000 to K30000 K30000 0 60 Status automatic transfer function setting ae ae x aT C iN Error status data BFM 29 automatic transfer eaeection 61 to data register specification Valid if b0 of BFM K200 Decimal 5419 gt U 60 is set to ON E 5 Upper lower limit function status data BFM 39 dtu gaara H 4 Bena 61 62 and 63 Subsection 62 automatic
77. mode 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 YO go OLLE E 10V to 10V 10000 to 10000 analog value mV specification mode 2 Current output mode OmA to 20mA O to 32000 3 Current output mode 4mA to 20mA O to 32000 ene ee OMA to 20mA 0 to 20000 analog value uA specification mode F Channel not used For a detailed description of the standard output characteristics refer to Section 2 4 For a detailed description of the output mode BFM 0 refer to Subsection 5 4 1 D 13 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs dagv dvr nexa Vdar nexas dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav O CWp NeX4 on ddv UONONISU Gid m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Output FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 4 1 Analog Output Procedures 3 Creation of sequence program Create the program as follows to output analog signals e While referring to step 2 set the output mode H e While referring to step 1 set the unit number in L Output mode step 2 Unit number step 1 Initial pulse M8002 FNC 12 kxk Specify the output mode BFM 0 for channels RUN monitor M8000 Data to be output to channel 1 is written in DO Data to be output to channel 2 is written in D1 Data to be output to channels 1 to 4 are stored in Data to be output to channel 3 is written in D2 DO to D3 Data to be output to channel 4 is written in D3 TO Data BMF 1
78. mounting method cannot be used 12 SAMPER SAUP ER SAMIR TEN Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed For a detailed description of grounding refer to Section 3 5 3 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use the FX3u 4DA as it may malfunction D 6 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications z aj z Item Specifications D A conversion 24V DC 10 160mA B circuit drive power It is necessary to supply 24V DC from the terminal block yy 5V DC 120mA os CPU drive power Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit it is not necessary to supply power SG externally 2 3 Performance Specifications 2 gt z gt UO U Specifications Analog output OmA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC range External load 1kQ to 1MQ External load 500Q or less Digital input With sign 16bits binary 15bits binary Resolution 0 32mV 20V 64 000 0 63uA 20mA 32 000 e Ambient temperature 25 C 5 e Ambient temperature 25 C 5 C 0 3 60mV for 20V full scale 0 3 60uA for 20mA full scale Ambient temperature 0 C 55 C e Ambient temperature 0 C 55 C 0 5 100mV for 20V full scale 0 5 100uA for 20mA full scale Item Vdar nexas Overall accuracy Time required
79. not being supplied properly 2 Remedy Check the wiring condition or the supplied voltage 3 Hardware error b3 1 Description of error 4AD may be defective 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 4 A D conversion error b4 1 Description of error The A D conversion value is abnormal 2 Remedy dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI Check the over scale status data BFM 28 to localize the error channel After that check to make sure 3 the input analog data is in the specified range iS J 5 BFM reading writing impossible b6 Ss 1 Description of error While voltage input characteristics are being changed this bit will turn on If this bit b6 is on A D L conversion data cannot be read out correctly or cannot be written to the BFM correctly x 2 Remedy 5 Check the sequence program and confirm that the input characteristics BFM 21 bO to b3 are not being ot written continuously 5 6 Data setting error detection b8 f 1 Description of error z If any bits from b10 to b15 are turned on this bit b8 will turn on E Z5 7 Averaging time setting error b10 a 1 Description of error The averaging time BFM 2 to 5 is not set correctly 2 Remedy Set the averaging time again in the range from 1 to 4095 B 61 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 8 5 4AD Initialization
80. of buffer memory Refer to Chapter 6 When the table output function is used Table output function e Preparation of data table e Transfer of data table to buffer memory e Execution of table output function Refer to Chapter 7 Adjustment of output characteristics Adjustment of output characteristics e Output characteristics change procedure Refer to Chapter 8 Program edit Program edit e Basic program e Convenient function program If the error status data or the output analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 9 Troubleshooting FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers 1 4 FX3U 4DA is compatible with the following PLC Compatible PLC Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later from the first product FX3uUC Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later August 2004 and later Version check Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version D8001 2 4 1 0 0 Tai aa a WN Ea PC type and g Version data Example Ver 1 00 version number PC type Example 24 FX2n FX3u FX2nc and FX3uc series How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of product production can be seen from the manufacturer s serial number SERIAL indicated on the label adhered to the right side
81. optimum output mode for the analog signal to be output L 3L dAVt N X4 ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Changing Output Characteristic FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 7 1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics 3 D 54 Determine the output characteristics to be changed Example Change to output voltage of 1 to 5 V with digital values 0 to 32000 Output mode 0 Output characteristics provided at the time Output characteristics newly provided of factory shipment Voltage output value Voltage output value ee BV Digital 1V i Digital 1 1 value gt value 32000 0 32000 AEE E 10V 10 2V Determine the offset data Determine the analog output value for the digital output value of 0 Set the analog output value in mV for the voltage output mode and the analog output value in uA for the current output mode Example To set the offset value of 1 V set 1000 mV For a detailed description of the offset data refer to Subsection 5 4 6 Determine the gain data Determine the analog output value for the digital output value of 16000 Set the analog output value in mV for the voltage output mode and the analog output value in uA for the current output mode Example To set the gain value of 3 V set 3000 mV 5 1 2 1 3V 3000 mV For a detailed description of the gain data refer to
82. or disconnection is detected re D8268 4 S 004 EEPROM error in 1st adapter amp D8268 5 ae l l D Yo05 Averaging time setting error in 1st n adapter 2S D8268 6 lt Yo06 PT ADP hardware error in 1st adapter D8268 7 o Yo07 PT ADP communication data error in a 1st adapter x gt J J gt J U O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld dVv nexs dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS F 19 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 7 Model Code 4 7 Model Code Initial value K20 Numeric data type Decimal K When the PT ADP is connected model code 20 will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code Special data register D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code Use the special data registers above to check whether PT ADP is connected or not Description 1 Program Example FNC224 D8269 K20 T Checks the model code of the 1st LD analog special adapter 4 8 Basic Program Example Create the following basic program example to read out the temperature measurement data The following program will store the temperature measurement data C from channels 1 and 2 of the 1st adapter to D100 and D101 respectively The averaging time is set to 1 immediate data for channel 1 and 5 for chann
83. output at the final point in the last cycle of a pattern the table output completion flag is turned on When the table output BFM 80 is set to be stopped the table output completion flag is turned off HOOOO naed Hom Value for each Table output completion flag channel 0 Table output uncompleted 1 Table output completed D 49 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt QVv ONnexs dagv dvr nexa Vdar nexas dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT M1d QVt NEXS4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 5 Details of table output error 6 5 Details of table output error When an error related to the table output function occurs the error code is stored in BFM 90 and the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the error is stored in BFM 91 1 Error code table and details of error source numbers Error code Dauis oremor Table output error source number BFM 90 BFM 91 The number of patterns in the data table that is held in Device number where the number of K111 the PLC does not meet the following requirement patterns is specified same as the head 1 lt Number of patterns lt 10 device number in the data table The number of points in the data table that is held in the K121 PLC does not meet the following requirement 1 lt Number of patterns l
84. output update time at each point and point to point interpolation method avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt _ A NAA dyr NeX4 2 Preparation of data table Prepare the data table consisting of the following items in the data registers D1000 to D7999 in the PLC main unit or the expansion registers RO to R32767 It is convenient to prepare the data table on spreadsheet software and copy and paste the data to the device memory of GX Developer ddgv dvr nexa Setting item Device number in PLC assignment x 1 Number of patterns x Device number specified in BFM 98 E VI 3 Number of points in pattern 1 n Device number 1 specified in BFM 98 A 4 Condition after output at final point in pattern Device number 2 specified in BFM 98 6 Output data Device number 3 specified in BFM 98 7 Output update time Device number 4 specified in BFM 98 waeyed Z 5 Point 1 8 Unit of output update time at each point and point to point interpolation method Device number 5 specified in BFM 98 6 Output data 7 Output update time 5 Point n 8 Unit of output update time at each point and point to point interpolation method dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT TI x lt 1 3 Number of points in pattern X m oy 4 Condition after output at final point in pattern 5 sb T 6 Output data z x 5 Point 1 7 Output update time H 8 Unit of output update time at each point 2 and po
85. penta nat Reno Ratt otra ae Oe ern ee oe H 10 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ccccccccceeccceececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseecesaeeeeeaes H 11 39 POWT SUPP INV ENING acct adtesactacre Mesa tea e a a send taecea H 12 Bue LO CONMEGULO A SU SOMOS PLG ss cece ec ied e ean oct wants Mahe wetel a vga ieee ec louiee H 12 3 3 2 TO connect to the FX3UC Senes PLC siriar aE EE EEE EAE EE H 12 3 4 Selection of the Thermocouple cccccccceeccccececseeeeceeeeseeeeesecessuecesecesseeeeseaeessuseeseeeeseueessaaes H 13 34 b Thermo coupIe ype onnaa E EE TE EA H 13 342 Compensating lead Wie acerca ee a ee ee H 13 325 WirinGcOf THEMNOCOUDIE zsecccceeseivestesseeioeie teen be eidonseieenedetbamadeaniedatbamsasiianc i H 13 3 5 1 Wiring of thermocouple type K ccccccssseeeccenseeecececececeeseeceeeeeeeseuseeeecsagecessuueeessesseessesaaass H 13 3 5 2 Wiring of the thermocouple type J cnc ccaccchacenectvescccednacnsdeieansecdveds ttuenacecdeigecsaueneesttwdiacnsdueentereeies H 14 3 6 Caution Regarding WIRING issin ten ei E slender E suse nel E A mde ashaelea heated H 14 OT GTOUndiNg sir Sesh E E E E EE A EE iaa se eee gece Meee oes Sense eeee ee ase H 14 4 Programming H 15 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data cccccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeesseeseeesseeessaeeeeesaeeeessaeeees H 15 AZ sLIStOPxs PCClal DEVICE S oina aN H 16 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit 0 0 00 cece ccccccceseeceeeeeseecese
86. range 16000 to 16000 Digital output range 4000 to 4000 Diaital output range 20000 to 20000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Offset gain adjustment Possible g P ge Offset gain adjustment Impossible Digital value Digital value Digital value Current Current Input 20 4mA 20 4mA 20 4mA B 10 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input re 3 Wiring This chapter describes the 4AD wiring Observe the following cautions when wiring the 4AD WIRING PRECAUTIONS D ANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order t
87. refer to Subsection 5 4 1 Q O 3 O T 3 e2 5 4 22 BFM 126 Upper lower error status data automatic transfer to data register specification dyr NEXd Setting range 0 to 7999 Initial value at delivery K208 Numeric data type Decimal K dyr oNeX4 Use this function to automatically transfer the upper lower limit error status data BFM 26 to the data C register specified in BFM 126 A When the upper lower limit error is detected data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC amp For this reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scanning time of the PLC z can be shortened g For a detailed description of the upper lower limit error status data BFM 26 D refer to Subsection 5 4 9 1 If BFM 126 K208 initial value z gt Specified data register Description S D208 Upper lower limit error status data in BFM 26 2 Cautions regarding upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to data register specification e Ifa data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify the same data register e Be sure to turn on the upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer function b5 of BFM 22 and the upper lower limit detection function b1 of BFM 22 e The data written to BFM 126 will be retained in the EEPROM TI dav var nexs M 3 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is wr
88. register es D8264 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8265 Averaging time for channel 2 data D8266 Averaging time for channel 3 data D8267 Averaging time for channel 4 data 1 Cautions regarding averaging time setting e Ifthe averaging time is set to 1 the immediate data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register Description e Ifthe averaging time is set to 2 or more the average value will be calculated in accordance with the set averaging time and the average value obtained will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register e After turning the PLC power on the average data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data registers D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 until the number of data items is increased to the set averaging time e Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set value is outside the setting range the error signal will be output For a detailed description of error status refer to Section 5 5 D8264 D8265 2 Program Example M8000 FNC 12 K32 ormally ON FNC 12 K128 PAR Sets the averaging time to 32 for the channel 1 data of the 1st analog special adapter Sets the averaging time to 128 for the channel 2 data of the 1st analog special adapter H 18 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermoc
89. resistance b7 1 Description of error The bit will turn on when the setting value of the corrective function by load resistance is not correctly set 2 Remedy Check the output mode BFM 0 and the load resistance values BFM 51 to 54 for the channels 8 Table output function setting error b8 1 Description of error The bit will turn on when the setting value of the table output function is not correctly set 2 Remedy Check the output mode BFM 0 and the setting value of the table output function 9 Status automatic transfer setting error b9 1 Description of error The bit will turn on when the setting value of the status automatic transfer function is not correctly set 2 Remedy Check the setting values in the automatic transfer destination data register specification field BFM 61 to 63 10 Over scale b10 1 Description of error This bit will turn on when analog output is out of the specified range 2 Remedy Check the output mode BFM 0 setting value and the values in the output data BFM 1 to 4 11 Disconnection detection b11 1 Description of error The bit is turned on when a cable is disconnected 2 Remedy Check that no cables are disconnected or have contact failure 12 Setting data change prohibited b12 1 Description of error The bit will turn on while the setting change is prohibited 2 Remedy To change any setting set BFM 19 to K3030 9 5 FX3uU 4DA Initialization and Te
90. shown in the following figure 2 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use the rod terminal with insulation sleeve e To directly terminate end of stranded single wire cable Termination of cable end Terminate the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude g ZZZ Do not solder plate the end of the cable e To terminate cable end using rod terminal with insulation sleeve If the cable sheath is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while referring to the external view Insulation sleeve Contact area Crimp area Caulking tool CRIMPFOX ZA 3 2 6mm Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 8WH or CRIMPFOX UD 6 0 1 Manufacturer 0 31 3 Tool e To tighten terminals use a purchased small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the right figure Note If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not be able to be achieved Use the following recommended screwdriver or ae an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm straight Manufacturer Model Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 0 4m 25mm 0 01 7 lt 0 09 B 14 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 3 Examples of Power Supply Circuit 3 3 Examples of Power
91. system is stable If the system is unstable when auto tuning is started auto tuning may not be executed normally 1 21 aVv onexs avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI ddv M1d QVt NEXS4 T gt O 88 ONS OL AVP NEXA UONONISUI Cid FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Auto Tuning PID Instruction FNC 88 4 3 Cautions on Auto Tuning Execution 4 2 3 Reference How to obtain three constants in PID control step response method For acquiring satisfactory control results during PID control it is necessary to obtain the optimal value of each constant parameter suitable for the control target This paragraph explains the step response method to obtain three constants in the PID control proportional gain KP integral time T1 and differential time TD What is the step response method In this method by giving stepped output from 0 to 100 to the control system three constants in the PID control are obtained from the operation characteristics maximum ramp R and dead time L and the input value variation 1 The stepped output may be obtained from 0 to 75 or from 0 to 50 Operation characteristics 100 Output value Output value MV 0 Time Input value variation Maximum ramp R Time s Dead time L 1 s s Operation characteristics and three constants Control type Proportional
92. the PLC For this T reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened For a detailed description of the status automatic transfer function refer to Subsection 5 4 18 l U a D 27 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 10 BFM 29 Error status D 28 Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Error data is assigned each bit of BFM 29 1 Assignment to each bit of BFM 29 bO Error detection If one of b1 to b11 is turned on bO will turn on b1 O G error Gain setting error error in offset gain data or in EEPROM offset gain setting 24 V power is not supplied properly ne FOWSESUPP I SIMON Check the wiring condition or the supplied voltage b3 E eee ee FX3U 4DA may be defective Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 2 Loo cs Error setting function for l b5 output setting upon PLC The setting value of the function for output setting upon PLC stop stop BFM 5 is not set correctly Correctly set the value b6 Upper lower limit function The setting value of the upper lower limit function BFM 41 to BFM 48 setting error is not set correctly Correctly reset the value ae Hee Mase ela tetae The setting value of the corrective function by load resistance b7 eed BFM 51 to 54 is not set correctly
93. the channel setting error b10 of BFM 29 will gt data will be updated occur gt 1 initial Immediate data i Each time the A D conversion is performed the channel D value l data will be updated p Average data a 2 to 400 Each time the A D conversion is performed the average i S value will be calculated and the channel data will be 2 updated Average data E 401 to 4095 When the A D conversion data reaches the averaging time i the average data will be calculated and the channel data will x be updated Te UO Average data 4096 will be set and the averaging i 4096 or more Each time the A D conversion is performed the channel time setting error 010 of BFM 29 will data will be updated occur F a sat 2s 1 Application If the measurement signal contains comparatively reduced ripple noise such as supply voltage frequency 5 averaging will result in obtaining of stable data U 2 Cautions regarding averaging time setting G e To use the averaging function be sure to set the digital filter of the corresponding channel to 0 Digital T filter setting BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 To use the digital filter function be sure to set the averaging time of the corresponding channel to 1 gt Averaging time BFM 2 to 5 for channels 1 to 4 gt U If the averaging time is set to a value other than 1 and the digital filter BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 E is set to a value other than 0 the digital filter s
94. the main unit to be used for your system F X2NC Series special FX2NC 4AD FX2Nc 4DA function block F XON Series special FXon 3A function block 4 Peripheral unit Abbreviation generic name Description Peripheral unit Generic name for programming software handy programming panel Peripheral unit and display units Programming tool Programming tool Generic name for programming software and handy programming panel Programming software Generic name for Programming software Generic name for SWLID5C GPPW J and SWLID5C GPPW E programming software packages 5 Manual Abbreviation generic name Description FX3U hardware manual FX3U Series User s Manual Hardware Edition FX3uc hardware manual FX3uc Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Programming manual FX3uU FX3UC Series Programming Manual Basic and Applied Instruction Edition A 42 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input Q O 3 O T 3 e2 aVr nexs QVv Onexs FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD 4 channel Analog Input FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa TI dav var nexs M O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld dVv nexs ddv L x gt Foreword 2o a U This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for the FX3u 4AD FX3uc 4AD special extension b
95. the number of connectable units refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the main unit to be used for your system Generic name for FX2N Series input output powered extension unit FX2N Series FX2N Series extension unit input output extension block FX2N Series special function unit and FX2N Series special function block l Generic name for FX2NC Series input output extension block and FX2Nc Series FX2NC Series extension unit i special function block Generic name for FXON Series input output extension block and FXON Series FXON Series extension unit l special function block Generic name for FX3U Series special function block FX3UC Series special Sy cisitincionaniblodk function block FX2N Series special function unit FX2N Series special function P block FX2NC Series special function block and FXoN Series special function block peo Pera FX3u 4AD FX3U 4DA FX3U 20SSC H function block F X3UC Series special EX3UC 4AD function block FX2N Series special FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM FX2N 1RM E SET FX2N 1RM SET function unit FX2N 232IF FX2N 16CCL M FX2N 32CCL FX2N 32ASI M FX2N 2AD FX2N 4AD FX2N 8AD FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 2LC FX2N 2DA FX2N Series special FX2N 4DA FX2N 5A FX2N 1HC FX2N 1PG E FX2N 1PG FX2N 10PG function block The number of connectable units however depends on the type of main unit To check the number of connectable units refer to the User s Manual Hard ware Edition of
96. to 17 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3uU 4DA Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 Therefore when creating a program do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories BFM 5 4 18 BFM 60 Status automatic transfer function setting Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H When the bits bO to b2 of BFM 60 are turned on the assigned functions see the table below are valid When the bits are turned off the functions are invalid 1 Assignment to each bit of BFM 60 When the value of the error status BFM 29 changes bO the status value is transferred to the data register specified by BFM 61 When the value of the upper lower limit function status b1 BFM 39 changes the status value is transferred to the Subsection 5 4 10 Subsection 5 4 19 Subsection 5 4 14 Subsection 5 4 20 data register specified by BFM 62 When the value of the disconnection detection status Subsection 5 4 9 b2 BFM 28 changes the status value is transferred to the Subsection 5 4 24 data register specified by BFM 63 a b3 to b15 Invalid setting values unchanged 2 Cautions regarding the status automatic transfer function e While changing the settings the output is stopped and HOO00 is automatically written in the output status BFM 6 At the
97. to 63 the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3uU 4DA Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 Therefore when creating a program do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories BFM TI dav var nexs M ld QYY NE X4 dy 5 4 22 BFM 80 to 3098 Table output function O Related BFM BFM 80 start stop command of table output function a BFM 81 to 84 output pattern setting of channels b BFM 85 to 88 output execution cycle number of channels ue BFM 89 completion flag of table output function OS BFM 90 table output error code BFM 91 table output error source number L BFM 98 data table head device number 2 BFM 99 data table transfer command E BFM 100 to 398 2800 to 3098 data table in patterns T Table output function Sets predetermined output patterns as data table and outputs analog signals according to the data table For a detailed description of the table output function refer to Chapter 6 a OQ oS D 37 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 1 Outline of Table Output Function SEU 6 Table Output Function This chapter describes the table output function of FX3U 4DA 6 1 Outline of Table Output Function 1 Explanation of the function This functi
98. to be used in each pattern at the top of the pattern Up to 99 points can be provided The setting range of number of points is 1 to 99 When the number of points is out of the setting range the error code is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on 4 Condition after output at final point in pattern number of data items 1 The condition after output at the final point in a pattern can be set to continue to output the output signal at the final point or output the offset signal The setting is shown in the following table Set value Condition after output at final point KO Continuing to output the output signal at the final point K1 Outputting the offset signal Other than above TA Invalid values When a value out of the setting range is set the error code is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on 5 Point number of data items 3 Data output point The data indicating a point consist of output data output update time output update time unit and point to point interpolation method Each pattern can have up to 99 points 6 Output data number of data items 1 Digital value corresponding to the analog signal to be output
99. to the 4AD Unit Unit Unit D number 0 number 1 number 2 x5 Main unit Input output FX3u Series extension Input output Special Special extension Special PLC block function block function block block function unit 2 Input mode BFM 0 setting Depending on the analog signal generator to be connected set the input mode BFM 0 for each channel Use hexadecimal numbers for input mode setting Set the corresponding channel digit to the input mode setting value specified in the following table HOOOO med he Setting Input mode Analog input value range 0 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 1 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 4000 to 4000 dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI Digital output range MLld AYt N X4 ddv L j TI bale al a E 40Vto 10V 10000 to 10000 25 Analog value direct indication mode z 3 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 S gt 4 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 z AEN eee E 4mAto20mA 4000 to 20000 l Analog value direct indication mode a 6 Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 16000 to 16000 g 7 Current Current input mode mode 20mA to 20mA to 20mA 4000 to 4000 E QO O OOOO mpe e 20mA to 20mA 20000 to 20000 88 Analog value direct indication mode F Channel not used For a detailed description of the standard input characteristics refer to Section 2 4 For a detailed description of the input mode BFM 0 re
100. to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems eo gt O aa gt v Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions 2 Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage
101. transfer to data register specification musi havedirfereni K201 Decimal 5 4 20 Valid if b1 of BFM 60 is set to ON hess B X Disconnection detection status data BFM 28 l z 4 PDE l Subsection gt 63 automatic transfer to data register specification K202 Decimal 54 21 y Valid if b2 of BFM 60 is set to ON Ei EG U 1 If power failure occurs the EEPROM will retain the data 2 Specify the use of the upper lower limit function for each channel setting one of hex code 0 to 2 in 5 pecily Pp g i D each digit ae ar 3 Use bO to b1 228 4 Specify the use of the corrective function by load resistance for each channel setting a hex code 0 or 1 in each digit 5 Use bO to b2 D 19 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Datatype Reference 80 Start stop of table output function H0000 81 Channel 1 output pattern K1 to K10 82 Channel 2 output pattern K1 to K10 83 Channel 3 output pattern K1 to K10 84 Channel 4 output pattern K1 to K10 Decimal 495 Number of times of output execution of table KO to K32767 KO Dedal from channel 1 H96 Number of times of output execution of table KO to K32767 KO Badiiial Chapter 6 from channel 2 97 Number of times of output execution of table KO to K32767 KO Becia from channel 3 488 Number of times of output ex
102. value K10 Numeric data type Decimal K When the TC ADP is connected model code 10 will be stored in the special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code Special data register D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code Use the above special data registers to check whether TC ADP is connected or not Description 1 Program Example FNC224 D8269 K10 010 Checks the model code of the 1st LD analog special adapter 4 9 Basic Program Example Create the following basic program to read out the temperature measurement data The following program will select thermocouple type K and will store the temperature measurement data C of channels 1 and 2 of the 1st adapter in the D100 and the D101 respectively The averaging time will be set to 32 for channel 1 and 128 for channel 2 M8002 Error status of 1st analog special RST D8268 6 adapter b6 OFF hardware error Error status of 1st analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error RST D8268 7 T day G eave nexs TI aavvarnexa ITI M8001 M8260 Sets the temperature unit to centigrade C l Selects thermocouple type K M8002 FNC 12 K32 D8264 Sets the averaging time to 32 for MOV channel 1 data FNC 12 Sets the averaging time to 128 for S120 D8265 channel 2 data Stores the current value of the channel 1 measurement M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D100 MOV temperature data to D100 FN
103. var nexs M Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions 2 Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 gt Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem gt Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires z Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed MLld AYt N X4 dav O CWp NeX4 ae ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS G 9 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of the PTW ADP are arranged as follows Signal Application i p A External power OTL L Ground terminal 5 OF Li Channel 1 platinum 5 olL L1 resistance thermometer OJLL 11 sensor input i L2 Channel 2 platinum J L2 resistance thermometer a oL 2 sensor input 4 O L3 Channel 3 platinum OIL L3 resistance thermometer gt oll 13 sensor input 3 o L4 Channel 4 platinum OL L4 resistance thermometer a Ol j4 sensor input Doo FX3U FX3UC Seri
104. version number should be 1 30 or later For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 5 2 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Power The PT ADP needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of the PT ADP is on 2 Platinum resistance thermometer sensor cable Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer from other power cables or inductive cables For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 5 3 Special Device Check Check whether the special devices for the PT ADP are correctly used 1 Temperature measurement Verify that the special device for the selected channel is correctly selected This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel 2 Averaging time Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range The averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set averaging time is outside the specified range an error occurs 3 Error status Check that no error is detected in the PT ADP If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wiring and programs For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 F 21 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa eo gt O aa gt v O ddv MLd
105. which the user should follow Moreover please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system machine and apparatus with which a user is using e If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards If in doubt about the operation or use please consult the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor e Since the examples indicated by this manual technical bulletin catalog etc are used as a reference please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples e This manual content specification etc may be changed without a notice for improvement e The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however if you have noticed a doubtful point a doubtful error etc please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor Q9 Nr Registration e Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or trademarks of each company FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents Table of Contents SAFETY PRE
106. wire cable Terminatonereablecnd Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude a Do not solder plate the end of the cable e To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve If the cable sheath is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into Insulation sleeve Contact area the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while Canales referring to the external view Caulking tool CRIMPFOX ZA 3 0 1 0 55 or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 8WH 3 Tool e To tighten terminals use a small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the figure to the right Note If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not be able to be achieved Use the following recommended screwdriver or Mca cae an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm straight Manufacturer Type Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4 x 2 5 0 4m 25mm 0 01 gt lt 0 09 QVv ONnexs avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa TI dav var nexs M gt ddv Ld QVp Nexs M1d OVt NEXS4 T ddv 88 ONS OL Vr NEXA UONONISU id m FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 3 Power Supply Line 3 3 Power Supply Line Connect the 24V
107. writes the data in the special data registers FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP n th Ast FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Sequence program A D conversion start A D command conversion Digital value writing 200us 4ch A D conversion start END instruction A D command conversion ee Digital value writing a 200us 4ch A D conversion during PLC stop Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated If two or more analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter 2nd adapter 4th adapter A D conversion speed data update time During execution of the END instruction the A D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 200us and the data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 200us x number of connected adapters Temperature Measurement G 8 To stabilize the temperature measurement warm up the system for 30 minutes or more after power on FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input re g 3 3 3 Wirin g 7 This chapter describes the PTW ADP wiring B Observe the following caution to wire the PTW ADP ae ae Os AD WIRING PRECAUTIONS DANGER SO e Make sure to cut off
108. 0 7 Examples of Practical Programs 7 2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions Input modes of channels 1 to 4 will be specified 2 The convenient functions will be set 2 The upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to data register will be set to D100 2 The over scale status data automatic transfer to data register will be set to D101 The error status data automatic transfer to data register will be set to D102 2 Reads the digital values of channels 1 to 4 from BFM 10 to 13 into DO to D3 Clearance of upper lower limit error data Clearance of over scale data The upper lower limit error status data of each channel will be output to YOOO to YOO7 The over scale status data of each channel will be output to YO10 to YO17 The error detection signal will be output to Y020 The setting error detection signal will be output to Y021 1 After setting the input mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each setting After this if the same input mode is used it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time TO K50 again 2 The set input mode convenient functions upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to data register number over scale status data automatic transfer to data register number and error status data automatic transfer to data register number are retained in the 4AD EEPROM For this reason even if the sequence program is
109. 0 at delivery Q O 3 O T 3 e2 Hexadeci Subsection mal 5 4 8 96 Upper lower limit value error status Valid if b1 40000 Hexadeci Subsection of BFM 22 is set to ON mal 5 4 9 497 Abrupt change detection status Valid if b2 of 40000 Hexadeci Subsection BFM 22 is set to ON mal 5 4 10 28 Over scale status H0000 MEXAQ CIE AUVSOENON mal 5 4 11 detection abrupt change detection peak value holding aVr nexs QVv Onexs mal 5 4 12 30 Model code K2080 ae K2080 a 41 Channel 1 offset data Unit mV or uA Voltage input KO at delivery 10000 to 42 Channel 2 offset data Unit mV or uA 9000 2 KO at delivery ubseciin Uni Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa 43 1 Channel 3 offset data Unit mV or uA Bi Current input KO at delivery 5414 20000 to 441 Channel 4 offset data Unit mV or uA l 17000 4 KO at delivery 511 Channel 1 gain data Unit mV or uA e Voltage input K5000 at delivery 9000 to mA i t A i 52 Channel 2 gain data Unit mV or uA 10000 3 K5000 at delivery Subsector 53 Channel 3 gain data Unit mV or uA yi Current input K5000 at delivery 5 4 14 17000 to 54 Channel 4 gain data Unit mV or pA 30000 4 K5000 at delivery cr a T T 464 Channel 1 addition data Valid if b0 of BFM 22 16000 to 16000 KO is set to ON 462 Channel 2 addition data Valid if b0 of BFM 22 16000 to 16000 KO is set to ON Subsection E iti id i
110. 00 o mode 3 K50 ch4 Current output 0 mA to 20 mA output mode 2 Data to be output to channel 1 is written in DO Store the data to be output to channels 1 to 4 Data to be output to channel 2 is written in D1 in DO to D3 in the following ranges Data to be output to channel 3 is written in D2 DO and D1 32000 to 32000 Data to be output to channel 4 is written in D3 D2 and D3 0 to 32000 FNC 15 DO BFM 1 output to channel 1 BMOV U0 G1 K4 D1 BFM 2 output to channel 2 D2 BFM 3 output to channel 3 D3 BFM 4 output to channel 4 After setting the output mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each setting The specified output mode will be retained even if power failure occurs After the output mode is specified if the same output mode is used it is not necessary to set the output mode and the waiting time TO K50 D 56 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 8 2 Example of Program using Useful Functions 8 2 Example of Program using Useful Functions This section describes a practical program that uses the disconnection detection function BFM 28 upper lower limit function BFM 38 to 48 corrective function by load resistance BFM 50 to 54 and status automatic transfer function BFM 60 to 63 of FX3U 4DA 1 Conditions The sequence program described in this secti
111. 000 0 to 170007 Se L Gain data 9000 to 10000 3000 to 30000 2 2 1 The offset and gain values should meet the following conditions z 1000 lt Gain value Offset value lt 10000 gt 2 The offset and gain values should meet the following conditions gt g 3000 lt Gain value Offset value lt 30000 i U Ea D 25 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 7 3 Cautions regarding offset gain data change e Ifthe analog value specification mode mode 1 or 4 is used the offset gain cannot be changed However the characteristics can be changed as those in the output mode 1 or 4 by setting the following offset and gain data in the output mode 0 or 2 Offset data Gain data Change characteristics from output mode 0 to 1 oo o 16000 Change characteristics from output mode 2 to 4 16000 e The offset and gain data should be set before the value write command BFM 9 is executed e The resolution cannot be increased by changing the output characteristics e When the value specified as the output mode BFM 0 is changed the initial value of offset and gain data in each output mode will be automatically written e Even if the output characteristics are changed the actual valid output range will not be changed 10 V to 10 V for the voltage output mode and 0 mA to 20 mA in the current output mode For
112. 10V to 10V DC With sign 16 bits binary 100mV to 100mV DC With sign 12 bits binary Resolution 312 5uV 20Vx1 64000 1 25uA 40mAx1 32000 50uV 200mVx1 4000 10nA 40mAx1 4000 10V to 10V DC Ambient temperature 0 3 60mV for 20V full scale 0 5 200uA for 40mA full scale 25 5 C 100mV to 100mV DC Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input 0 5 1mV for 200mV full scale 10V to 10V DC Ambient temperature 0 5 100mV for 20V full scale 1 0 400uA for 40mA full scale 0 55 C 100mV to 100mV DC Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input 1 0 2mV for 200mV full scale Digital input output With sign 15 bits binary Overall accuracy Time required for ims x number of selected channels dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI conversion When the input mode is set to 0 When the input mode is set to 2 x 32767 7 r T ie 32000 p ae z tt Ye gt U ie iis Se iS 1 IO jj 20mA Q ee H ti 20mA a El gt t Oi ee NE ot T a Ti 1 gt ai Oii gt I O characteristics i AA Beat F ee y an E 32768 D When the input mode is set to 1 32107 T eG 3200 p e v ae TI 5 amp 4000 A 27 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items A 28 2 Analog output Specifications Number of output points Analog input output range Offset Gain Digital input output Resolution Ambient temperature 259 C Ambie
113. 1131 2 lt 2000m 1 If PT ADP is connected to the FX3uc Series PLC direct installation is not possible e men e men e men quip AKIPI JUR Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 6 3 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use the PT ADP The PT ADP may malfunction F 6 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications z 5 S T z Items Specification A D conversion circuit 24V DC 20 15 50MA B driving power It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power supply to the terminal block yy 5V DC 15mA Of Interface driving power Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit it is not SG necessary to supply the power 2 3 Performance Specifications lt T gt Specifications Items S Centigrade C Fahrenheit F D nouson 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor D perag Pt100 JIS C 1604 1997 e lt Plea pelatule 50 C to 250 C 58 F to 482 F gt range O gt Digital output 500 to 2500 580 to 4820 Toaca e 0 5 for full scale when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C E y e 1 0 for full scale when ambient temperature is in the range from 0 to 5
114. 198 7 Examples of Practical Programs 7 3 Program That Uses Data History Function Input modes of channels 1 to 4 will be specified 2 The sampling time will be set to 100 ms The digital values set for channels 1 to 4 will be read out to DO to D3 Data history of all the channels will be erased Data history of all the channels will be temporarily stopped Temporary stoppage of data history will be canceled for all the channels Channel 1 history data 100 data samples will be read out to D100 to D199 The watchdog timer will be refreshed Channel 2 history data 100 data samples will be read out to D200 to D299 The watchdog timer will be refreshed Channel 3 history data 100 data samples will be read out to D300 to D399 The watchdog timer will be refreshed Channel 4 history data 100 data samples will be read out to D400 to D499 The watchdog timer will be refreshed After setting the input mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each setting After this if the same input mode is used it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time TO K50 again The set input mode and the sampling time are retained in the 4AD EEPROM Therefore even if the sequence program is deleted the previously set functions will still be valid If a large amount of history data is read out the scan time of the PLC will be become longer If the scan time ex
115. 2 1 Types of Analog Products Analog input output products are required to perform analog control using the FX Series PLC There are 2 types of input output products the special adapter and the special function block The differences between special adapter and the special function block are clarified below 2 1 1 Special adapter The analog special adapter uses PLC devices to send receive data to from the PLC 1 FX3uU Series PLC e Connect the special adapter s to the left side of the FX3U Series PLC e An expansion board is needed to connect the special adapter s e Up to 4 analog special adapters can be connected e When using the high speed input output special adapter s be sure to connect the high speed input output special adapter s first and then connect the analog special adapter s High speed Analog special adapters input output Expansion board PLC special adapters o 9 e i Oo e e e o o l FX3U BD B feeecofocooo00000 o JRA 5 o 00000 o LILI a 23 E S SR 57 HAHEI M eocoo00000 AO O U LF fecocol ALLL i Y Wk ee wow Up to 4 Analog adapters can be connected Ags ces ee i For a detailed description of the system configuration refer to the PLC User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 FX3uc D DSS Series PLC e Connect the
116. 2 to M8272 to M8282 to M8292 to Unused Do not use M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 l EU E TT E as temperature measurement E D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel 2 temperature measurement data Section 4 Section 4 4 3 4 5 D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 o 3 temperature measurement D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 v temperature measurement l Averaging time for channel 1 P D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Setting range 1 to 4095 ata Averaging time for channel 2 register g D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Setting range 1 to 4095 Sedin Averaging time for channel 3 4 6 D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Setting range 1 to 4095 Averaging time for channel 4 D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Setting range 1 to 4095 D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code 10 ORO E i 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit The state of special auxiliary relays decides the TC ADP s temperature unit as shown in the table below To switch the temperature unit use the following special auxiliary relays Special auxiliary relay D ibti escription Selection of temperature unit M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 OFF Centigrade C ON Fahrenheit F 1 Program Example 1 To switch the temperature unit to 2 To switch the temperature unit to centigrade C for the 1st adapter Fahrenheit F for the 2nd adapter M8001 M8000 Normally OFF Normally ON FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 4 Selection of Type K or
117. 2717 When the abnormal range is specified Tw is handled as 0 Output value ULV LLV Time Input value I I 3 1 a a I lt lt _ _ E S gt o TEE To Ti T2 Time s SHpv PV input threshold hysteresis Operation characteristics and three constants Control type Proportional gain KP Integral time TI x100ms Differential time TD x10ms Only proportional 1 control P operation Cii LLV 7 P aha PID sate 12 ra FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Auto Tuning PID Instruction FNC 88 4 2 Step Response Method 4 2 Step Response Method 4 2 1 Parameters to be set by auto tuning step response method Parameter Setting position Parameter Setting position Operation setting ACT 1 bit O operation direction Integral time T1 4 Proportional gain KP 3 Differential time TD 6 4 2 2 Auto tuning procedure 1 Transferring the output value for auto tuning to the output value CD Set the output value for auto tuning to the maximum available output value multiplied by 0 5 to 1 for the output equipment 2 Setting the parameter target value SV etc that cannot be set in auto tuning according to the system Note that auto tuning may not be executed normally if the cautions described below are not fol lowed 1 Set items Set item and parameter Remarks The difference from the measured value PV
118. 3 The input digital data will be converted into analog data and then output to the terminals If data is stored in the special devices the averaging time can be set and the output mode can be specified Special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest the main unit For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Section 4 2 Se High speed cation j FX3u 4DA FXsu ADA FXsu 4DA special FXou 4DA MRO Mut ADP ADP ADP adapter ADP adapter FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Special devices Special auxiliary relays P special data registers D8260 to D8269 Special auxiliary relays M8270 to M8279 F O L Special data registers D8270 to D8279 Sequence program Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8289 Special auxiliary relays va TED speciai data registers D8290 to D8299 The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on In this case however do not include the high speed input output special adapter and the communication special adapter FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices If 4DA ADP is connected special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the follo
119. 3 e ae 3 400 tA 3 i i i X axis 0 4v 5V gt 10V 0 400 1V 2000 5V Analog input T d Digital value actually obtained by A D conversion 2 Example of program For example create the following program to change the digital input data of the 1st analog special adapter M8001 M8260 Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage input mode 0 V to 10 V M8002 Error status b6 OFF D8268 7 Error status b7 OFF End point M8000 ae D8264 Sets the averaging time to 1 for the channel 1 data Me002 Fencl o l a U ee aia eee O Program for setting scaling instruction data table eF Device FNC 12 K400 D51 Number of points Sets the number of points DSO MOV x A D converted digital value fae ee ENC 12 Start coordinate start point data D52 point Y Digital output value of changed D52 coordinate X axis value start point X A D converted digital value end Y Digital output value of changed i FNC 12 X axis value end point 10990 sees i K10000 D54 i MOV fi MEOOO Tesco acl e a a ean SCL D8260 D50 D100 The scaling instruction operation results will be stored in D100 C 20 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input Characteristics FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics 3 Cautions regarding programming o e GX Developer version 8 13P or later supports scaling instruction SCL FNC 259 3 e Ifthe
120. 30 5 Numeric data type Decimal K 3 K3030 fixed value is stored as the model code gt lt gt lt 5 4 12 BFM 32 to 35 Data to be output upon PLC stop 2 i Se Initial value KO Numeric data type Decimal K To enable the output data set when the PLC stops Set 2 for any digit in the output data H0000 at PLC s C stop Set the BFM values as follows T BFM number Description gJ 32 Data in channel 1 gt 33 Data in channel 2 E 34 Data in channel 3 35 Data in channel 4 2 The setting range depends on the output mode z Output mode BFM 0 Setting range 0 32640 to 32640 1 10200 to 10200 2 3 O to 32640 4 O to 20400 TI dav var nexs M 1 Cautions regarding data output setting when PLC is in stop a x lt e While changing the settings the output is stopped and HOOO0 is automatically written in the output status i BFM 6 5 After the completion of writing the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and output 23 will be restarted O e The analog values to be output depend on the output mode e When a value out of any of the above ranges is set b5 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on x C 2 Cautions regarding EEPROM writing 5 If data is set in BFM 0 5 10 to 17 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will be written in the 6 3 G EEPROM of FX3u 4DA Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories The maximum number o
121. 3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 1 BFM 0 Input mode specification B 28 Initial value at delivery H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Specify the input modes of channel 1 to 4 4 hexadecimal digits are assigned to specify the input modes of the 4 channels Change the value of each digit to change the input mode of each channel 0 to 8 or F can be set for each digit HOOOO go Loe The different types of input modes are shown in the following table For a detailed description of input characteristics refer to Section 2 4 Set value Analog input Digital output 0 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 4000 to 4000 Voltage input 2 Analog value direct indication mode ec een 5 ae ae direct indication mode AOAO ROUI _ Current input 9 Analog value direct hdication made Mee ere 740900 t0 T0990 9 to E Setting not possible a ee F Channel not used Ce 1 The offset gain values cannot be changed 1 Cautions regarding input mode setting e Ifthe input mode is set changed the analog input characteristics will be changed automatically Furthermore when the offset gain value is changed the characteristics can be set to the desired values The resolution cannot be changed e Ifthe analog value direct indication 1 is specified the offset gain value
122. 3u FX3uc Series PLC aL eeii om ar TF To check the connectable ae 7 aE E S ao na OO PLC model number refer E s 8 E 4 4 to Section 1 3 i o ji o i o j o f B z ea 5 4th 3rd 2nd 1st Expansion board adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed Analog data ABR description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 Flowmeter pressure sensor etc For a detailed description Special devices of special devices refer to Transfer direction M D8260 to M D8269 eAnalog data 1st adapter M D8260 to M D8269 Chapter 4 eaten hincutmieds 2nd adapter M D8270 to M D8279 For a detailed description eowltcning of INpu of a basic program refer to eSetting of averaging lt lt o 3rd adapter M D8280 to M D8289 Section 4 8 time 4th adapter M D8290 to M D8299 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system 1 The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3uc D DSS PLC C 3 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt x lt o T N gt Vdr nexs w dadY dYr N X4 day G eave nexs TI aavvarnexa ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav OI CWp NeX4 ae ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Opera
123. 4 D8294 oo range 1 to 4095 ata Averaging time for channel 2 register g D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Setting range 1 to 4095 Sedin Averaging time for channel 3 4 5 D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Setting range 1 to 4095 Averaging time for channel 4 D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Setting range 1 to 4095 D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code 21 s poi 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit pra Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa TI dav var nexs M ld QYY NEX4 gt To switch the temperature unit of the PTW ADP turn the special auxiliary relay ON for Fahrenheit F or OFF for Centigrade C To switch the temperature unit use the following special auxiliary relays 7 Special auxiliary rela gt i id d Description l i oF l U Selection of temperature unit M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 OFF Centigrade C H ON Fahrenheit F T 2 1 Program Example gt 1 To switch the temperature unit to centigrade C 2 To switch the temperature unit to Fahrenheit F 2 O for the 1st adapter for the 2nd adapter U M8001 M8000 i 8260 Normally OFF Normally ON O2 aS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 4 Temperature Measurement 4 4 Temperature Measurement The temperature data input in the PTW ADP will be stored in the special data registers The special data registers that store the temperature
124. 4 Auto Tuning PID Instruction FNC 88 4 1 Limit Cycle Method 4 1 3 Reference How to obtain three constants in PID control limit cycle method 1 20 Output upper limit value Output lower limit value SVtSHPy pratenn SV target value fm ST SV SHPv t fL 4 a _ l l E I I I I For acquiring satisfactory control results in PID control it is necessary to obtain the optimal value of each constant parameter suitable to the control target This paragraph explains the limit cycle method to obtain the amplitude a and vibration cycle T Ton of the input value and then calculate the proportional gain KP integral time T1 and differential time TD based on the expressions shown in the table below What is the limit cycle method Changes in the input value in two position control in which the output Upper Limit Value ULV and output Lower Limit Value LLV are switched according to the deviation are measured and then three constants in the PID control are obtained Operation characteristics in an example of backward operation During the tw period after the tuning cycle is finished the output value is held at the output Lower Limit Value LLV and then normal PID control is started The value tw can be obtained by the expression Tw 50 Kw 100 x T Ton and the wait setting parameter Kw can be set in the parameter 28 Setting range Kw 50 to 3
125. 4AD FX2N 4AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 4ch 20mA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC Input resistance 250 Q Absolute maximum output 32mA Digital output With sign 11 bits binary 10V to 10V DC Analog input range Input resistance 200kQ a Ambient temperature i 325C O O 14 Ambient temperature r 1 0 400uA for 40mA full scale 3 0 to 55 C eee eee A Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input Time required for A D Normal conversion mode 15ms x number of selected channels conversion High speed conversion mode 6ms x number of selected channels When the input is set from 20 mA to 20 mA gt 1600 7 N 1000 a 5 i lt ig 1 10 20MA 0 I i gt O oi lt i Oi Eroi ee Yi Nit Input characteristics PIA 1000 l 1600 When the input is set from 4 mA to 20 mA 1750 p 1000 ehste 32mA 0 4mA 20mA e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs e Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset lt 15V 3 The of
126. 4e Lechi S ch3 ch2 g The different types of output modes are shown in the following table For a detailed description of output characteristics refer to Section 2 4 lt Set value rae HEX Output mode Analog output range Digital input range S 0 Voltage output mode 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 4 ees Op 10V to 10V 10000 to 10000 analog value mV specification mode 2 Current output mode OmA to 20mA O to 32000 3 Current output mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 32000 41 ole oe ee OMA to 20mA 0 to 20000 analog value uA specification mode 5 to E Invalid setting values unchanged F Channel not used 1 The offset gain values cannot be changed 1 Cautions regarding output mode setting e While the output mode is being changed the output is stopped and H0000 is automatically written in the output status BFM 6 At the completion of change of the output mode the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI H1111 and the output is restarted 3 e It takes approximately 5 seconds to determine the output mode For this reason after changing the output mode be sure to wait for 5 seconds or more and then write the ue other data OS e When the output mode is changed the settings in the following buffer memory are initialized according to the new output mode L BFM 5 output setting upon PLC stop 3 BFM 10 to 13 offset data BFM 14 to 17
127. 5 C z A D conversion 200us The data will be updated at every scan time T time For a detailed description of data update refer to Section 2 4 S a FAGO en r 4820 9 7y 3 TI i I gt lt E x Input cE gt characteristics 1 io bY 58F QO rit TRE 482 F Gt Joa 580 G A 670 x gt e The photo coupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC ue The DC DC converter is used to insulate the driving power supply line from the analog Os Insulation method input area e Channels are not insulated from each other L Number of I O 0 points x points occupied This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC 5 O te 38 Ss S F 7 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 5 This section describes the A D conversion time A D conversion and special data register update timing A D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP n th Ast FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Sequence program A D conversion start A D command conversion Digital value writing 200us 4ch A
128. 5 4 15 463 Channel 3 addition data Valid if bO of BFM 22 16000 to 16000 KO Decimal is set to ON 464 Channel 4 addition data Valid if b0 of BFM 22 16000 to 16000 is set to ON Decimal dy d OL OYH NEX4 la MLd OYH NEXH Q id ave nexd TI aav var nexs M Decimal Decimal ddv Channel 1 lower limit value error setting Valid if Minimum digital 71 b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON value in input Decimal range 79 Channel 2 lower limit value error setting Valid if From minimum sla oe Decimal a b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON iqi i O l rae range Subsection a ie ini igi 5 4 16 73 Channel 3 lower limit value error setting Valid if UPPer limit value pst coe Pema b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON error setting value YAS IN npu iii v range aP 5 Channel 4 lower limit value error setting Valid if Minion vigita ae 74 b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON value in input Decimal 53 range Qo 2 J re ee ee ee ee ee 1 If power failure occurs the EEPROM will retain its data 2 Use bO to b7 3 The offset and gain values should satisfy the following conditions Gain value Offset value gt 1000 4 The offset and gain values should satisfy the following conditions 30000 gt Gain value Offset value gt 3000 B 25 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM BFM number s Description Sett
129. 61 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data D8262 Stores the channel 3 temperature measurement data D8263 Stores the channel 4 temperature measurement data The immediate data or the average data data averaged in accordance with the specified averaging time will be stored in the above data registers as the temperature measurement data For a detailed description of the averaging time refer to Section 4 6 Description Caution regarding temperature measurement The special data registers for temperature measurement data is for reading only Do not change rewrite the current data using the sequence program indicator or device monitor of the programming tool Program Example M8000 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in D100 FNC 12 D8260 D100 ney 02260 roo FNC 12 D8261 D101 ney ove oor Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in the D100 or the D101 the D8260 or the D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction Normally ON Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in D101 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 5 Averaging Time 4 5 Averaging Time Setting range 1 to 4095 Initial value K1 Numeric data type Decimal
130. 8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 OFF Voltage input M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the input mode of channel 3 ON Current input H M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 Switches the input mode of channel 4 gt lt eee p gt 1 Program Example S S5 To switch the channel input mode create a sequence program as follows 5 1 To switch the input mode of channel 2 To switch the input mode of channel 2 1 of the 1st analog special adapter to the of the 1st analog alae adapter to voltage input mode the current input mode U M8001 M8000 18260 ae Normally OFF Normally ON OF o 5 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 4 Input Data 4 4 Input Data Numeric data type Decimal K The data converted by the 4AD ADP will be stored in the special data registers The special data registers that store the input data are shown in the following table Special data register Par D8260 D8280 Stores the channel 1 input data D8261 Stores the channel 2 input data D8262 Stores the channel 3 input data D8263 Stores the channel 4 input data The converted A D immediate data or averaged data data average conforming to the specified averaging time will be stored in the above data registers as the input data For a detailed description of the averaging time refer to Section 4 5 Description 1 Caution regarding input data Input d
131. 99 to the factory default status Set value Description KO Normal K1 Initializes all data Set K1 to initialize all data When initialization is complete KO will be set automatically 1 Caution regarding initialization function setting e It takes approximately 5 seconds to initialize all the data e Priority is given to BFM 19 which prevents a data from being changed To initialize set K2080 in BFM 19 5 4 7 BFM 21 Input characteristics writing B 32 Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Channel numbers are assigned to the 4 lower bits of BFM 21 If any of these bits are turned on the offset data BFM 41 to 44 and gain data BFM 51 to 54 of the corresponding channel will be written to the internal memory EEPROM When written to the internal memory the data will become valid BFM 21 bits channel number assignment Bit No Description bO Channel 1 offset data BFM 41 and gain data BFM 51 writing b1 Channel 2 offset data BFM 42 and gain data BFM 52 writing b2 Channel 3 offset data BFM 43 and gain data BFM 53 writing b3 Channel 4 offset data BFM 44 and gain data BFM 54 writing b4 to b15 Not used The WRITE command can be given to two or more channels at the same time Set HOOOF to write all channel data to the EEPROM When writing is complete H0000 bO to b3 OFF will be set automatically 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details FX3U FX3UC Seri
132. AC bit 1 or bit 2 of 1 is exceeded m Input variation decremental is bit4 not exceeded Input variation decremental is exceeded Subsection 1 Alarm output tee j Output variation incremental is 3 2 8 bit2 not exceeded Output variation incremental is exceeded Output variation decremental is bit3 not exceeded Output variation decremental is exceeded The setting below is required when the limit cycle method is used when the operation direction ACT b6 is set to ON PV value threshold Set it according to measured value 25 hysteresis width SHPV PV fluctuation Output value upper limit Set maximum value ULV of output S3 C33 26 ULV value MV They are occupied when operation Set minimum value LLV of output direction ACT bit 6 is ON limit Chapter 4 Output value lower limit 27 LLV Wait setting from end of tuning C 3 28 cycle to start of PID control KW 4 CS3 1 value MV cycle method 50 to 32717 CS3 20 to 24 become occupied only if bits 1 2 or 5 are set to 1 to determine the action ACT of F X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters 3 2 Details of Parameters o 3 3 2 1 Sampling time Ts S3 a Setting range 1 to 32767 ms B Set the cycle time ms for the PID operation u e Inthe PID control Se Set the sampling time longer than the operatio
133. AD PT FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 2LC FXON 3A A 14 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 1 Analog Input 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications The analog product performance specifications are shown in the following tables Select the optimal product for your equipment 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 1 FX3uU 4AD ADP FX3U 4AD ADP Voltage input Current input Specifications Number of input points 4ch OV to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC ematOg nO Tange Input resistance 194 kQ Input resistance 250 Q Absolute maximum output 0 5V 15V 2mMA 30mA Offset l Impossible to change Impossible to change ain Digital output 12 bits binary 11 bits binary Resolution 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 10nA 16mAx 1 1600 Ambient temperature 2520 C 0 5 50mV for 10V full scale 0 5 80uA for 16mA full scale Ambient temperature o o 0 to 55 C 1 0 100mV for 10V full scale 1 0 160uA for 16mA full scale Overall accuracy Time required for A D conversion 200us Data updated every scan time 16009 Input characteristics Digital output Digital output 0 gt 10V 0 4mA gt 20mA Analog input Analog input e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs e Channels are not insulated from
134. ALIONS resimin E E Gace E A A a D 7 2 4 Output Mode Characteristics BFM 0 cccccccsseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeseeseeseeeseeeseeeeesaeeseneas D 8 3 Wiring D 9 ot Terminal Layout rassa E E E Sodeateneee caged D 10 3 2 Cable and Terminal Tightening TOrque cccccsccccssescccesscecceuseecsescecceeeecseeeeesaeeeesaeeeessaaes D 10 3 3 WINNA tO Power Supply Terminals saisisiseri case E EE EEA A A D 11 331 Examples of POWer SUDDIY CIRCUIT sirnaa a a a a eal od D 11 3 3 2 Cautions regarding wiring to the power supply terminals cccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeees D 11 S4 Analog Output WIring eeren E E E E EE D 12 39 am 6 8 g 0 a 0 esene n a Se ce nog E E E ee D 12 4 Analog Output D 13 4 1 Analog Output PrOCEAUIES t2cc272s 0rcashcnctcanseuscaazsenaaaenismauaasaeaanaaategasaaaeauece cas E D 13 5 Buffer Memory BFM D 15 5 1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory cccccececeseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesaaeees D 15 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method cccccccecsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeessaeeeesaaeeeesnees D 16 5 2 1 Buffer memory direct SPECIFICATION stisi a iaa aaa aiana adria ddiddan adaa iadaaa nas D 17 5 2 2 FROM TO instruction conventional method c cccccecseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeecseeeeeeseaeeeeesseeeeesaaeeees D 17 5 BUnemIVIEMOrY ELISE BEIM c cssncss tadccnecdenistadtuancncucadeas eaasaemnrsttentCnncaeeiacnns A D 18 5 4
135. Analog input range Gain standard value Initial value Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 16000 20000uA Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 4000 20000uA Set the analog input value in mV for the voltage input mode and set the analog input value in uA for the current input mode Example To set the gain value of 3 V set 3000 mV For a detailed description of gain data refer to Subsection 5 4 14 B 52 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Changing Input Characteristics FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 6 1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics 5 Create a sequence program To change the input characteristics write the offset data BFM 41 to 44 and the gain data BFM 51 to 54 in the sequence program and then turn on the corresponding bit of BFM 21 for the corresponding channel The following example shows a program for the unit number 0 Q O 3 O T 3 e2 Example Program for changing the input characteristics of channels 1 and 2 aVr nexs Command for writing input characteristics 2 FNC 12 HFFOO UO GO vag MFC YG FNC 16 K1000 UO G41 K2 FMOV ral 1000 uoc Ke FNC 16 K3000 UO G51 K2 FMOV ral 2009 fuocs Ke FNC 12 H0003 U0 G21 toy fg 10003 uosa dyr NEX4 Input mode specification for channels 1 to 4 Offset value of channels 1 and 2 Gain value of channels 1 and 2 Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa Batch wr
136. BMF 41 to 44 or more than the upper limit BFM 45 to 48 the relevant bit of the upper lower limit function status is turned on In this setting analog values more than the upper limit and less than the lower limit are not output Analog value ye Values more than the upper limit are not N output Upper limit 3 Lower limit p sss acs Values less than the lower limit are not output D 30 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 14 BFM 39 Upper lower limit function status O Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H 3 When any of the output data BFM 1 to 4 is out of range between the lower limit and the upper limit BFM 41 to 48 the relevant bit is turned on B TI TI 1 Assignment to each bit of BFM 39 Zg be Bit Description D bO Data output from channel 1 lt Lower limit BFM 41 b1 Data output from channel 1 gt Upper limit BFM 45 C b2 Data output from channel 2 lt Lower limit BFM 42 a b3 Data output from channel 2 gt Upper limit BFM 46 5 b4 Data output from channel 3 lt Lower limit BFM 43 T gJ b5 Data output from channel 3 gt Upper limit BFM 47 2 b6 Data output from channel 4 lt Lower limit BFM 44 b7 Data output from channel 4 gt Upper limit BFM 48 b8 to b15 Not used Vdar nexas 2 Cautions regarding use of the upper lower limit functio
137. Buffer Memory DetailS cccccccccccssssceccssececceececseeeecceuececseeeecseaseeseeeesseseeeseuseessagseeessageees D 21 5 4 1 BFM 0 Output mode SPECIFICATION 0 0 ee ee cece a a D 21 54 2 BEM 1 10 FAs Output Cale gorse tec tete cesenie aie a a a aae aL iS D 22 543 BFM 5 O tput setting upon PLC SIOP arene a a ia a E a E D 22 5 4 4 BFM 6 Output Status ccc ccececesececeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeseeseaeeessaeeesseeesseesesseeeeeseeeesaeaeeeseeees D 23 5 4 5 BFM 9 Offset gain setting value write command ceccceecseeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesuaeeeeeeeueeeesaeeeeees D 24 5 4 6 BFM 10 to 13 Offset data BFM 14 to 17 Gain data ccc cecceccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees D 25 5 4 7 BFM 19 Data change prohibition of Setting CHANGE cccceceecceeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeseaeees D 26 5 4 8 BFM 20 Initialization function resetting to factory default status cc ceceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeees D 27 5 4 9 BFM 28 Disconnection detection status only in current output mode ceeeee eee eeeee ees D 27 5410 BiEWI29 Error Status tcc casket el eet A ee Aa a aS oe Sh ead ere D 28 5411 e 2016 an Model colina a a ee ee eee ee ee eee D 29 5 4 12 BFM 32 to 35 Data to be output upon PLC StOP cece cc eecceceeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeesaeeees D 29 5 4 13 BFM 38 Upper lower limit function setting 2 0 0 ce cccccecceceeeceeeeeeeceececeeecesseecesseeeesseeeesaeeees D 30 5 4 14 BFM 39 Uppe
138. C 12 Stores the current value of the D8261 D101 channel 2 measurement temperature data to D101 fe Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored to D100 or D101 data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction H 21 QVr onexs avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa gt O ddv 88 ONS M1d QVt NEXS4 OL AVP NEXA UONONISU id FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 5 1 PLC Version Number Check 5 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status If the temperature measurement data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the following items e Version number of the PLC e Wiring e Special devices e Programs e Error status 5 1 PLC Version Number Check e Any versions from Ver 2 20 initial version to the latest version of the FX3U Series are compatible e Check the version number of FX3UC Series The version number should be 1 30 or later For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 5 2 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Power The TC ADP needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of the TC ADP is on
139. CAUTIONS cisiceiscdc cco cs siccceccs ences shes aka ee cess eee 1 Common Items 1 Introduction A 1 1 1 Outline and Features of Analog Control ccccccccccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeseeseesseeeeesaeeeeeas A 1 Le hc ANa ITU CO MUON iasi r E O A 2 EZANA OUPUT CONTO asri nia a E A 2 1 1 3 Temperature sensor input contohe ee ee ee ee es A 3 2 Description of Analog Products A 4 21 Types Or Analog a 80 8 0 0 Cc geen puerta ence E E eee ne ee eee ee eee A 4 2 lel Special adapter sci ee ee ee ee ee ee A 4 21 2 SPeClall TUMCIOM DIOCK iers tach dedi sani a a ok ou e oa A 5 22 LISt OF ANaIOG PrOGUCE MOG CS inst Ai baleen eden ata uta ene Dereon attra de alma tetera E A 6 220 SPCClal ACADIC ssa alas ec de ec se ee A 6 22 2 SPeClall TUMCTOMN DIO C Kisco ies ce scerasencus dennnacence selene oucrene denscutateounans a ane ceuasen A 7 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products A 9 ST FA U SETTES PEG icteta increas anita tnd a a be atessshi eect peanneustea teats A 9 3 1 1 Connection of special adapters cece cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeceeeeeceeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeesseeeesseeeeeees A 9 3 1 2 Connection of special function blocks c cc eecccceecccceeceeceeceeseeeeeeeeeessueeeesuaeeeseaeeseaeeesseeeesaeeeees A 10 32 FA SUC SENES PLG ara iirchancu onesie dedetausl a aS A 11 3 2 1 Connection of special adapters ce ccccceccceceeceeceeeeeceeeeceeeeessucesseeessuecesaeeeeesue
140. Cancels the output holding function for channel 2 Performs D A conversion with the digital data stored in D100 for channel 1 Performs D A conversion with the digital data stored in D101 for channel 2 M8000 ee MOV MOV Using the indicator or the sequence program input the digital data to be subject to D A conversion to be output as analog data in D100 and D101 E 18 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Output Characteristics FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics SEU 5 Changing of Output Characteristics Use the scaling instruction SCL FNC 259 for the FX3uU FX3uc Series PLC to change the output characteristics For a detailed description of scaling instruction refer to the FX3u FX3uc Series Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital value range from 400 to 2000 when analog output range is 1 to 5V to 0 to 10000 1 Output characteristics Voltage output characteristics 6 Digital value characteristics product specifications z Z to be changed EO anae oa 5 ta O S D lt Y axis O O O D Cee 2 EL 4 z 332 xt 075 2000 5 N gt n 5V 400 1V l O 400 2000 4000 0 10000 2S Digital value inp
141. Changes for the Better a MITSUBISHI PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS ME Voltage Current Input FX3U 4AD FX3U 4AD ADP FX3UC 4AD Voltage Curret Output FX3U 4DA FX3U 4DA ADP Temperature Sensor Input FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP GHEE S2fety Precautions MD Read these precautions before use Before installation operation maintenance or inspection of this product thoroughly read through and understand this manual and all of the associated manuals Also take care to handle the module properly and safely This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories DANGER and A CAUTION DANGER Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury CA TION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in U medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Depending on the circumstances procedures indicated by may also cause severe injury It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be taken out and read whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 1 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS DANGER Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most import
142. Controllers C User s Manual Analog Control Edition z FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output Vdar nexas TI dav var nexs M O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld dVv nexs ddv L x T gt 2 Foreword bg SAN g This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for the FX3u 4DA special extension block 4 channel analog output and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit 5 Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward Z it to the end user a5 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION D 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 1 1 Outline of Functions OO 1 Outline This chapter outlines the FX3U 4DA 1 1 Outline of Functions FX3U 4DA is an analog special function block which is connectable to the FX3u or FX3uc Series PLC to convert 4 channel digital signal from the PLC to analog signal voltage current 1 Up to 8 1 units can be conne
143. D is added to B FX3U 4DA is inserted to D Adding and revising the other descriptions B 8 page 2 2 The Power Supply Specification for the FX3u 4AD regarding the A D conversion circuit drive power Revised from 24V DC 10 80mA to 24VDC 10 90mA JIS Japanese Industrial Standards for temperature sensors are added Clerical Error Correction FX3uc D DSS Series PLC added FX3U 4AD PTW ADP is inserted to G Clerical Error Correction USER S MANUAL Analog Control Edition FX3u FX3uc SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN HIMEJI WORKS 840 CHIYODA CHO HIMEJI JAPAN FX3U U ANALOG E JY997D16701E Effective Dec 2007 MEE Specifications are subject to change without notice
144. D5C GPPW E Bi If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used programming will not be possible 25 4 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer select FX3UC for the PLC type es G 5 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for the PTW ADP 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating temperature 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative A humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Compliant with EN 68 2 6 Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm NESS ibrati Tested 10 times in each resistance DIN Rail Mounting direction X Y and Z Direct Mounting 1 Shock Compliant with EN 68 2 27 resistance 147 m s2 Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise Using noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min voltage Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt 2 Between all termi
145. DC service power supply is also available 2 The FG terminal and the terminal are connected internally There is no FG terminal for ch1 When using ch1 connect directly to the terminal dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT 3 Use a 2 core twisted shield wire for analog input line and separate it from other power lines or inductive lines 2 lt 4 For the current input short circuit the V terminal and the l terminal 5 If there is voltage ripple in the input voltage or there is noise in the external wiring connect a capacitor l 5 of approximately 0 1 to 0 47uF 25 V SA L L AYt NEX4 ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 5 Grounding 3 4 2 FX3uc 4AD If current input is 4 block ae saaan E VO OOO 20 _ a pA oe E en oo selected Pears bn vor SESS cho NOOO RS a gt aan Somat panko L Class D grounding 7 VLI ILJ ch LJ represents the channel number 1 Use the 2 core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog input lines and separate the analog input lines from the other motive power lines or inductive lines 2 To use the current input be sure to short circuit the line between the VLI terminal and the ILI terminal LI channel number 3 The SLD and terminals are connected to each other inside 4 Do not con
146. DP communication data error b7 1 2 Description of error A communication error is detected between the PT ADP and the PLC Remedy Check that the PT ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office F 23 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt QVv ONnexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa eo gt O aa gt v O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld dVv nexs dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 5 Error Status Check MEMO F 24 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input A B FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers C User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input TI dav var nexs M ld QYY NEX4 gt M1d OVt NEXS ddv T x T gt F Foreword ots This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for the FX3U 4AD PTW ADP special I adapter 4 channel platinum resistance thermometer input and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit 5 Store this manual in a safe place so that you c
147. Data is read from the channel 2 Auto tuning is started X010 RST D502 The PID output is initialized M1 PID operation M1 E D500 D501 D510 D502 PID instruction FNC 12 Auto tuning operation is D511 K2M10 confirmed Auto tuning ON flag M14 PLF Auto tuning is finished Auto tuning is finished M2 RST Auto tuning is completed l 26 F X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method PID Instruction FNC 88 5 3 Program example of auto tuning step response method 9 3 3 PID operation M1 7246 Heater operation cycle timer 3 K2000 2 sec T246 i i lt gt RST T246 NE be operation cycle timer es a preset SE operation gt S M1 PID operation C M1 FNC226 s546 ps0 D Heater output x5 LD lt gt J gt Error flag v M8067 Y020 Error occurs D x D gt U i TI aovvornex M ld QYY NE X4 ddv M1d QVt NEXS4 Q ddv T L AYt NEX4 gt O z UONONISUI did 88 ONS l 27 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting PID Instruction FNC 88 6 1 Error Codes 6 Troubleshooting 6 1 Error Codes When an error occurs in the set value of a control parameter or the data acquired during the PID operation the operation error flag M8067 turns ON and a corresponding error code is stored in D8067 Error code 6730 Incorrect sampling time TS TS
148. FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input re g 3 3 3 Wirin g 7 This chapter describes the TC ADP wiring B Observe the following caution to wire the TC ADP ae ec Os AD WIRING PRECAUTIONS DANGER SO e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product C x T WIRING PRECAUTIONS A N gt gJ CAUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual a If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be D burnt out a Do not wire vacant terminals externally es i E Doing so may damage the product is gt Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are lik
149. G28 Clearance of disconnection detection status data RUN monitor Pi M8000 FNC 15 FNC 12 D201 K2Y000 ov 221 Transfer of data that will be output from channels 1 to 4 Output of upper lower limit error status of channels to Y000 to YOO7 ae 010 Disconnection detected in channels 3 and 4 D202 3 Output to YO10 D200 0 Error detected Output to Y011 1 The output mode setting setting of corrective function by load characteristics and status automatic transfer function setting are retained in the EEPROM of FX3uU 4DA For this reason even if the sequence program is deleted the previously set functions will still be valid 2 After setting the output mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each setting After the output mode is specified and the same output mode is used it is not necessary to set the output mode and the waiting time TO K50 D 58 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 8 3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation Pattern Output Operation 8 3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation Pattern Output Operation This section describes a practical program that uses the table output function 1 Conditions The sequence program described in this section is under the following conditions 1 System configuration FX3U 4DA unit No 0 should be connected to the FX3
150. GVv Nexs ld GVv nexs dav OI CWp NeX4 ae ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 4 Program Check 5 4 Program Check Check the following items for the program 1 Cancellation of error status at power on When the power is turned off and then on again the error status should be cleared b6 and b7 should turn off using the program 2 Check of storage devices Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by the other parts of the programs 5 5 Error Status Check If an error occurs in the PT ADP the corresponding bit will turn on The temperature measurement data of bO channel 1 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of b1 channel 2 is outside the specified PT ADP hardware error Description Averaging time setting error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of b2 channel 3 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected PT ADP communication data error The temperature measurement data of b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to 15 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error o To solve a problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below 1 Temperature measurement out of specified range or disconnection
151. Good condition Not allowed e The grounding wire size should be AWG14 2mm e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible D 12 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Output FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 4 1 Analog Output Procedures re 4 Analog Output This chapter describes the minimum programming necessary for analog output by the FX3U 4DA Follow the procedure below to confirm that correct analog values can be output 4 1 Analog Output Procedures 1 Unit number check Unit numbers from 0 to 7 will be assigned to the special function units blocks starting from the left When the units blocks are connected to the FX3Uc 32MT LT PLC the unit numbers from 1 to 7 are assigned Check the unit number assigned to the FX3U 4DA Unit Unit Unit number 0 number 1 number 2 Main unit Input output FX3U Series extension PLC Input output Special Special Sensin Special block function block function block block function unit 2 Output mode BFM 0 setting Depending on the analog signal generator to be connected set the output mode BFM 0 for each channel Use hexadecimal numbers for output mode setting Set the corresponding channel digit to the output mode setting value specified in the following table HOOOO nsed Hom Setting Output mode Analog output range Digital input range value 0 Voltage output
152. Hexadecimal H BFM 51 to 54 Decimal K B The output characteristics of FX3U 4DA have been adjusted at 30 kQ load resistance as a factory default When the load resistance is 1kQ the output deviation is approx 4 3 to 20V in full scale whereas the ge output deviation is approx 0 15 to 20V in full scale when the load resistance is 1MQ When the load cs resistance is 30 kQ or less 1 kQ to 30 kQ the deviation of the output characteristics can be corrected by 6 specifying the output corrective function BFM 50 and the load resistance values BFM 51 to 54 Analog value C The deviation of output characteristics is x corrected by the corrective function by load PLOV Posey resistance gt A7 32000 4 eee o o o o o o o o o o o o o 32000 Digital value a a o a a a a s s a Vdar nexas Pid s o Pid eo Output characteristics after correction I I I I I I I l A I I I I I I I I manane 10V Output characteristics before correction 1 Setting of output corrective function BFM 50 The corrective function by load resistance is valid or invalid by writing a 4 digit hexadecimal number HOOOO in the output corrective function setting BFM 50 HOOOO naed Lent dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT Set value Description 0 Corrective function by load resistance is invalid x C 1 Corrective function by lo
153. I dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 7 FX2N 2LC FX2N 2LC 1 2 Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Number of input points 2ch Thermocouple type K J R S E T B N PL Il WRe5 26 U and L JIS C 1602 1995 Specifications puE sional 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor s Pt100 JIS C 1604 1997 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 Examples Examples e Type K Type K Rated temperature range 100 C to 1300 C 100 F to 2400 F Type J e Type J 100 0 C to 800 0 C 100 F to 2100 F Examples Examples e Type K e Type K Digital output 100 to 1300 100 to 2400 Type J e Type J 1000 to 8000 100 to 2100 Resolution 1 C or 0 1 C 1 F or 0 1 F Ambient temperature 23 5 C 0 3 C 1digit for full scale Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 0 7 C 1digit for full scale Overall accuracy 1 0 C 2 0 C if the input value is in the range from 150 C to 100 C 3 0 C if the input value is in the range from 200 C to 150 C Cold junction temperature compensation error Time required for 500ms Sampling period conversion When type K input mode 2 When type K input mode 4 t is set 2400 9 3 v5 o D Input characteristics OS 100 F 0
154. K If the averaging time is set for the PT ADP the averaged temperature measurement data will be stored in the D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 The averaging time can be set for each channel Set the averaging time in the following special data registers Special data register D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 data D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel 3 data D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel 4 data 1 Cautions regarding averaging time setting Description e Ifthe averaging time is set to 1 the immediate data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register e Ifthe averaging time is set to 2 or more the average value will be calculated in accordance with the set averaging time and the average value obtained will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register e After turning the PLC power on the average data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data registers D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 until the number of data items is increased to the set averaging time e Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set value is outside the setting range the error signal will be output For a detailed description of error status refer to Section 5 5 2 Program Example M8000
155. M 0 5 gt Determine the optimum input mode BFM 0 for the selected channels and the voltage current iz specifications D e Set vae Input mode Analog input range Digital output range 25 HEX 0 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 gt 1 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 4000 to 4000 2 Voltage input analog value direct indication The offset and the gain cannot be adjusted 4mA to 20mA O to 16000 4mA to 20mA O to 4000 Current input mode ra 3 O Q D 4 Current input mode Current input analog value direct indication The offset and the gain cannot be adjusted 20mA to 20mA 16000 to 16000 20mA to 20mA 4000 to 4000 Current input mode 7 Current input mode e O Q D Current input analog value direct indication 8 The offset and the gain cannot be adjusted 9 to E Not used day G eave nexs TI aavvarnexa ITI 3 O Q D F Channel not used a Example Enter HFF00 in BFM 0 to set input mode 0 for channels 1 and 2 and prevent use channels 3 and x 4 Caution regarding data setting E g e Ifa channel is set to the value 2 5 8 or F the input characteristics of the channel cannot be changed H e Set the optimum input mode for the analog signal to be input L is gt F ots U QO gS B 51 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Changing Input Characteristics FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 6 1 Procedure for Changing Inpu
156. MPUtoutput x TC ADP TC ADP TC ADP adapter TC ADP Solel FX3uU F X3uc Series PLC z O gt Special devices Special auxiliary relays M8260 to M8269 AID TH Special data registers D8260 to D8269 Special auxiliary relays M8270 to M8279 a ell Special data registers D8270 to D8279 Special auxiliary relays I A D M8280 to M8289 S l l L special data registers D8280 to D8289 am Special auxiliary relays M8290 to M8299 aD Pe sp ecial data registers e The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on However in this case do not include the high speed input output special adapter and the communication special adapter dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 gt O OL OVP NEXA ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices If TC ADP is connected special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table R Read W Write Special Device number i Description Refer to device EEE ee ee Section M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R W Special auxiliary M8261 M8271 m8281 m8291 gt Witches the thermocouple type R W relay between type K and type J M826
157. RING PRECAUTIONS OD ANGER gt S e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product C x5 E WIRING PRECAUTIONS A N z CAUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with he
158. RPORATION FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 F X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline PID Instruction FNC 88 1 1 Outline of function re 5 1 Outline 3 This chapter describes the outline of PID instruction FNC88 for the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC B 25 2 1 1 Outline of function SE SE The PID instruction requires the system to calculate the output MV value from the measured PV value Through combining the P proportional action integral action and D derivative action the target SV value can be obtained See diagram below C 1 Alarm output function x The alarm function can be set for input variation measured value or output variation value 5 2 Setting limit values T The upper limit and lower limit can be set for the output value 5 3 Auto tuning function D The proportional gain KP integral time TI and differential time TD can be set automatically for both a the limit cycle method and step response method a 4 Operation method of the PID instruction S Both PID speed type operation and measured value differential type operation are executed FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Measured value PV Target value SV Controlled PID Instruction object Output value MV day G eave nexs TI aavvarnexa ITI MLld AYt N X4 ddv L 3L dAYt N X4 gt e UOHONSU dlid 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Ser
159. Subsection 5 4 6 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Changing Output Characteristic FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 7 1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics 6 Create a sequence program To change the output characteristics write the offset data BFM 10 to 13 and the gain data BFM 14 to 17 in the sequence program and then turn on the corresponding bit of BFM 9 for the corresponding channel Example Program for changing the output characteristics of channels 1 and 2 FNC 12 K3030 UO G19 MOV B Ka030 uowc19 FNC 12 HFF MOV B csi X000 Cancellation of setting change prohibition mode Output mode specification for channels 1 to 4 Setting of offset data channels 1 and 2 Setting of gain data channels 1 and 2 FNC 16 K3000 U0 G14 K2 FMOV B K000 uota Ke FNC 12 H G9 mov g FNC 12 KO U0 G19 mea e voc Transfer the sequence program to change the output characteristics Offset gain setting value write command Setting change prohibition Transfer the sequence program and start the PLC After the PLC is started and the output characteristic write command X000 is turned on the offset data and gain data will be written Since the offset data and gain data are stored in the EEPROM incorporated in FX3U 4DA it is pos sible to delete the pre written sequence program Check the analog output signals Check that the output anal
160. TIMNG ON FUNCIONS aaisa E mate siatas eueeabse A A eas nase dante tales edbase F 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ccc cccccceecccsececeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeceeeesaeeeeseeesseeeesseeeees F 4 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version NUMDEP ccccccecccceeeeeeeeceeeeseecesaueceseecesseeeeseeeeseeesseeeees F 5 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version NUMDED c ccccccseeeecneeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeseeeeeaeeeees F 5 2 Specifications F 6 2 1 Generne SPECI CALONS oreren aE e E eke a r a A F 6 2 2 POWE SUDDIV SPECIGIS rresia E eemesia ates od dy setesuceact cick selene de F 7 2 3 PERIOMMANGE S PECIIICANONS sorrerara E ee vale aster wil a EEE F 7 24 AND CONVERSION TING eictealis sesame hates Geen canta nsae nasa seme scuendabianesbde neaeeladnensedeccsei naar Matesaed teaaustaaes F 8 20 Temperature Measurement sate cinta re che Ac al elas ies ek ters i oe ere i oct ad led ila Seen doce eevee F 8 3 Wiring F 9 Od WGP MIMI Layout ota cat cia rele a acest ede a bel ti Reale ela ree F 10 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque cccccccccecceceeeeceeeeceecetseeeeseeeesseeeeanees F 11 D0 POW FP SUDD EN G naan a a aeaea a al F 12 3 3 1 To connect to FX3U Series PLC cccccccccsesecccsseececeeeecceneeccsseeceeneecesaeccaececaeesecaeeeesauseesauseeess F 12 3 3 2 TO ConnectTo The FX3UC Series PLC 2 6 2 ona hehe ec F 12 3 4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer SeENSO
161. TRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN Month Example 7 July 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December Year Example 5 2005 last digit of dominical year erea B 5 Q O 3 O T 3 e2 dyr NEXd dyr oNeX4 Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 1 4 Version Number of Compatible Programming Tools 1 4 Version Number of Compatible Programming Tools Use a programming tool with the following version number to create 4AD programs for the FX3uU FX3UC Series PLC FX3U 4AD Software Compatible version number Remarks Ver SW8 P or later GX Developer e SWLID5C GPPW J Ver 8 13P When selecting the model select FX3U C e SWLIDSC GPPW E FX3UC 4AD Software Compatible version number Remarks GX Developer Ver SW8 P or lat er or later e SWOID5C GPPW J Ver 8 13P When selecting the model select FX3U C e SWLID5C GPPW E If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used some instructions and devices cannot be used 1 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer select FX3UC for the PLC type B 6 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifi
162. U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 2 Preparation of data table 4 Example of data table The following table shows an example of data table containing two patterns prepared in and after D5000 Patterns 1 and 2 are in the output mode 1 Data Description register D5000 Number of patterns 2 patterns D5001 Y Number of points in pattern 1 3 points T y ee Holding of value D5002 5 Setting of condition after output at final point in pattern 1 output at final point D5003 K3000 p Data to be output at point 1 in pattern 1 3V D5004 Output update time at point 1 in pattern 1 1800 ms Output update time unit at point 1 in pattern 1 100 ms BoP nee Point to point interpolation method S shaped interpolation D5006 K8000 p Data to be output at point 2 in pattern 1 8V D5007 K26 Output update time at point 2 in pattern 1 2600 ms N Output update time unit at point 2 in pattern 1 100 ms pees POUN Point to point interpolation method Linear interpolation D5009 K5000 F Data to be output at point 3 in pattern 1 5V D5010 Output update time at point 3 in pattern 1 500 ms Oo a a D5011 H0011 Output update time unit at point 3 in pattern 1 100 ms Point to point interpolation method Linear interpolation D5012 Y Number of points in pattern 2 4 points D5013 Setting of condition after output at final point in pattern 2 Output of offset value D5014 K2000 x amp Data to
163. V DC power of the PLC PT ADP FX3u Series PLC PT ADP FX3U Series PLC Main unit Main unit 5V 5V a EL N Terminal Terminal block block Class D Class D 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line Ground the terminal to a class D grounding power supply line 100Q or less together with the ground terminal of the PLC main unit For the timing of power on off when using an external power supply see the following manual of the PLC to be connected Refer to the FX3U Series User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 3 2 To Connect To The FX3uc Series PLC PT ADP FX3uc Series PLC FX2NC Main unit Series PLC 5V Input extension block pa Power Power Power crossover connector connector connector Terminal Black Green Black block Class D 24V DC grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line e For the 24V DC power supply line be sure to use the same power as the FX3uc Series PLC e Ground the terminal to a class D grounding power supply line 100Q or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor 3 4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor Select the Pt100 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer senso
164. Valid only in voltage output Correctly set the value mode b8 Table output function The setting value of the table output function is not set correctly setting error Correctly set the value EEE E TE ae The setting value of the status automatic transfer function b9 BFM 61 to 63 is not set correctly setting error Correctly set the value b10 The analog output is out of the specified range b11 e P Wire break has occurred The details are indicated by BFM 28 y Pu The bit is turned on when BFM 28 is not 0 mode Setting data change l l TE b12 prohibited Setting change is prohibited 2 Caution regarding error status If the error cause is eliminated the error bit will turn off Error status data automatic transfer function b0 of BFM 60 If the error status with automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM 61 the data in BFM 29 can be transferred to a specified data register Only when an error is detected data will be automatically transferred from FX3u 4DA to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened For a detailed description of the status automatic transfer function refer to Subsection 5 4 18 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 11 BFM 30 Model code 9 3 3 Initial value at delivery K30
165. Version Number Check E e Any versions from Ver 2 20 initial version to the latest version of the FX3U Series are compatible x e Check the version number of the FX3uc Series The version number should be 1 30 or later E For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 2 5 2 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Power The PTW ADP needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of the PTW ADP is on TI dav var nexs M 2 Platinum resistance thermometer sensor cable Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer from other power cables or inductive cables For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 ld QYY NEX4 gt v 5 3 Special Device Check Check whether the special devices for the PTW ADP are correctly used x amp 1 Temperature measurement Verify that the special device for the selected channel is correctly selected This special device should be Sa U selected depending on the connecting position and the channel T 2 Averaging time Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range The averaging time should be set in the range 3 from 1 to 4095 If the set averaging time is outside the specified range an error occurs gt O 3 Error status 59 Check that no error is detected in the PTW ADP If an error is detected check th
166. X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 1 1 Outline of Functions OO 1 Outline This chapter outlines the FX3u 4DA ADP referred to as 4DA ADP 1 1 Outline of Functions The FX3u 4DA ADP is an analog special adapter Which is connectable with the FX3u and FX3uc Series PLC to output the voltage current data for up to 4 channels 1 Up to 4 units of 4DA ADP can be connected to the PLC Including other analog special adapters 2 Either voltage output or current output can be specified for each channel 3 The D A conversion results will be automatically output as the values to the special data register of the FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Point and section to be 4 adapters maximum including other petal of connectable ial adapt units ia ia i FX3u FX3uc Series PLC To check the connectable Sears PLC model number refer to Section 1 3 ooocoooc0o Oo00000000 Sac pagacdosucl HOODODOO000 TE boo0o02000 Oo0o000g00 o ooo ol Oo oogog loco HULU fescoslfeococosceg n fecood O00 4th 3rd 2nd 1st A adapter adapter adapter adapter Fora deiaied ae description of wiring Analog data refer to Chapter 3 Inverter etc For a detailed des
167. X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for the PT ADP 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating temperature 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative A humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Compliant with EN 68 2 6 Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm NESS ibrati Tested 10 times in each resistance DIN Rail Mounting direction X Y and Z Direct Mounting 1 Shock Compliant with EN 68 2 27 resistance 147 m s2 Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise Using noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min voltage Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt 2 Between all terminals and ground terminal Compliant with JEM 1021 Grounding Working l Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working l n altitude Compliant with IEC6
168. a Input 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog input using TC ADP follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4AD TC ADP Refer to Chapter 1 o Outline of system eCompatible PLC version number eCompatible programming tool version number Outline Refer to Chapter 2 Specifications check Specifications eOperation environment ePerformance specifications Refer to the common elnput characteristics pages System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control eSelection of units Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring eSelection of sensor cable ePower supply line Refer to Chapter 4 eAnalog input line Programming Programming eDetails of special devices eExamples of basic programs If the error status data or the input analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 5 Troubleshooting FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number TC ADP is compatible with the following PLC Compatible PLC Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later After May 2005 initial production FX3UC Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later After August 2004 1 Version check Special data register D8001 contains informati
169. a detailed description of output characteristics change refer to Chapter 7 BFM 19 Data change prohibition of setting change D 26 Setting range K3030 or other than K3030 Initial value K3030 Numeric data type Decimal K Setting in the following buffer memory areas is prohibited e BFM 0 output mode setting Output mode setting BFM 5 output setting upon PLC stop BFM 9 offset gain setting value write command BFM 10 to 13 offset data BFM 14 to 17 gain data BFM 20 initialization function BFM 32 to 35 data to be output upon PLC stop BFM 38 upper lower limit function setting BFM 41 to 48 upper and lower limit values of upper lower limit function BFM 50 corrective function setting by load resistance BFM 51 to 54 load resistance values BFM 60 status automatic transfer function setting BFM 61 Error status data automatic transfer to data register specification BFM 62 Upper lower limit function status with automatic transfer to specified register specification BFM 63 Disconnection detection status with automatic transfer to specified data register specification Specify the following value as the setting change prohibition mode BFM 19 Set value K3030 Other than K3030 Description permits data change disables data change Cautions regarding setting of the setting change prohibition mode e While changing the setting value the output is stopped and H0000 is automatically writ
170. aa r a aA F 22 11 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents FX3u 4AD P TW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 Outline G 3 127 SOUTIMNE ON FUNCIONS aasien na a feewsrabee TA se ssa eens aa tease eee G 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation cc cccccccccsecceceeeeececeeeeeseecesseeeeseeeesseesseeeetaaeeees G 4 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number c ccecccccseeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesseeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeeas G 5 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version NUMDE ccccceeeeeseeeeceeeeseeeeceeeeseueeseeeeesseeesaeeeens G 5 2 Specifications G 6 2 1 Generne SDCCINCALOMS reran ele cent E S G 6 2 2 POWEF SUDDIV SPEGCIICAOMS ri setae chines E E a G 7 2 3 Perormance oS DECIIICANONS serrer E eluates nl oly tem eetal E aeeincadeese G 7 24 AID CONVERSION TING sneno ies cast eaten e ecencscasetacacne vena cameetad o Seimesouedasedeat G 8 20 Temperature MeasuremeN xiii cs cal Ae clk peeled ek ie ce cineca tae ad a a eae diee G 8 3 Wiring G 9 Oe Terminal MAY OG ota res cla cia a ett ccc tat ate tated sawn stone A ce leu tela Retake atts G 10 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque ccccccccccceeceeeeeceseeeeeseeeesaeeeeseeeesaeeeeaes G 11 320 POWE OUPO LING ra E dashcenad A AAI G 12 3 3 1 To connect to FX3U Series PLC nnnnannnnnnnennnnennnnenrnnnrrrsnrrnenrenerrnnnrrnrrnrsnrrnnrrernrnenrrnrrrsnrreenree
171. ad resistance is valid gt O Other than above a eas Invalid setting values unchanged SZ L 2 Setting range and initial value of load resistance BFM 51 to 54 Set the load resistance value for each channel allocated to the following BFM 3 maid Description Setting range Q Initial value Q i z number p g rang 5a 51 Load resistance value for channel 1 i 52 Load resistance value for channel 2 1000 to 30000 30000 U 53 Load resistance value for channel 3 5 54 Load resistance value for channel 4 gt B SS aS D 33 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 3 Cautions regarding use of the output corrective function by load resistance e While changing the settings the output is stopped and HOOO0 is automatically written in the output status BFM 6 At the completion of writing the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and the output will be restarted e This function is valid only in the voltage output mode mode 0 or 1 e The corrective function by load resistance is valid only at a load resistance from 1 k to 30 kQ e Ifa setting is out of the upper setting range b7 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on e When not using this function the output characteristics at a load resistance of 30 KQ are applied 4 Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 5 10
172. ae dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI 2 When 0 is set differential is not Subsection es i C 6 Differential time TD 0 to 32767 x 10 ms Seed 397 x O 7 gt These devices are occupied for internal processing of PID operation Do not change data v z 19 H 3L dAYt N X4 gt O UONONISUI Cid 88 ONS l 7 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual A PID Instruction FNC 88 3 Parameter 3 1 Parameter List S3 to S3 28 nalog Control Edition Input variation incremental It is valid when operation direction 1 0 to 32767 20 alarm set value ACT bit 1 of 1 is 1 Input variation decremental It is valid when operation direction 1 0 to 32767 It is valid when operation direction Output variation Wan ees a alarm set value OIO SArGr VASEJ ON Eor eet or ACT bit 5 of 1 is 0 CS It is valid when operation direction Subsection Output upper limit set value 32768 to 32767 ACT bit 2 of 1 is 0 3 2 2 or ACT bit 5 of 1 is 1 It is valid when operation direction Output variation mer ee E alarm set value ane et nz ee P or ACT bit 5 of 1 is 0 Cs3 23 It is valid when operation direction Output lower limit set value 32768 to 32767 ACT bit 2 of 1 is 0 or ACT bit 5 of 1 is 1 0 O incremental is not it is valid when operation direction exceeded l l l a Input variation incremental is
173. ailed description of software compatible with the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC refer to Section 1 4 dyr NEXd dyr oNeX4 5 2 1 Buffer memory direct specification When directly specifying the buffer memory specify the following device in the source or destination area of the applied instruction as follows U LNG Enter a numeric value in L1 Unit number 0 to 7 ell Le Buffer memory number 0 6999 1 Example 1 If the following program is created data in buffer memory BFM 10 of unit 1 will be multiplied by the data K10 and then the multiplication result will be output to data registers D10 D11 EAD command FNC 22 U1 G10 K10 D10 Fac Uncre Kio 010 Unit number L Multiplication result Buffer memory number Multiplier 2 Example 2 If the following program is created the value in data register D20 is added to K10 and written to buffer memory BFM 6 of unit 1 WRITE command FNC 20 D20 K10 U1 G6 a abo 22 11o unes gm Addition Unit number gm Buffer memory number Augend Addend 5 2 2 FROM TO instruction conventional method Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI x 1 FROM instruction Reading out BFM data to PLC iS Use the FROM instruction to read the data from the buffer memory ae In a sequence program use this instruction as follows oz L READ command FNC 78 K1 K10 D10 K1 FROM 2 x lt S __ Numer of transfer Unit
174. al Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 10 BFM 27 Abrupt change detection status B 36 Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H When channel data BFM 10 to 13 is updated if the difference between the previous value and the new value is larger than the set abrupt change detection value value set in BFM 91 to 94 the following operation will be performed e If new value previous value gt abrupt change detection value The direction bit will turn on e If previous value new value gt abrupt change detection value The direction bit will turn on For a detailed description of abrupt change detection status data resetting refer to Subsection 5 4 18 Assignment of each bit of BFM 27 For the abrupt change detection function of each channel the and directions are assigned as shown in the following table Bit No Channel number Description bO direction for abrupt change detection b1 direction for abrupt change detection b2 direction for abrupt change detection b3 direction for abrupt change detection b4 direction for abrupt change detection b5 direction for abrupt change detection b6 direction for abrupt change detection b direction for abrupt change detection b8 to b15 Not used Caution regarding use of abrupt change detection st
175. al auxiliary relay on off to switch the output mode of 4DA ADP between the current output mode and the voltage output mode z To switch the output mode use the following special auxiliary relays gt Special auxiliary relay Mirs Ta Description es ist f and ma m s M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the output mode of channel 1 H M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the output mode of channel 2 OFF Voltage output y M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode of channel 3 ON Current output c M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 Switches the output mode of channel 4 T gJ U 1 Program Example To switch the output mode of a channel create a sequence program as follows U 1 To switch the channel output mode of 2 To switch the output mode of channel 2 channel 1 of the 1st analog special of the 1st analog special adapter to the e adapter to the voltage output mode current output mode Aa S ee M8001 M8000 M8260 8261 Normally OFF Normally ON E 15 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting 4 4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting This setting can hold the analog data output or to output the offset data OV for voltage output mode 4mA for current output mode when the PLC stops To cancel or set the output holding function use the following special auxiliary relays Special auxiliary
176. al filter function be sure to set the averaging time of the corresponding channel to 1 Averaging time BFM 2 to 4 for channels 1 to 4 If the averaging time is set to a value other than 1 and the digital filter is set to a value other than 0 the digital filter setting error b11 of BFM 29 will occur e If one of the channels uses the digital filter the A D conversion time will be set to 5 ms for all the channels e Ifthe digital filter set value is not in the range from O to 1600 the digital filter setting error 011 of BFM 29 will occur B 30 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 4 BEM 10 to 13 Channel data Numeric data type Decimal K Q O 3 O T 3 e2 Use these buffer memories to store the A D converted digital values The channel data BFM 10 to 13 for channels 1 to 4 and the data update timing will depend on the set averaging time BFM 2 to 5 for channels 1 to 4 or the digital filter setting condition BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 as shown in the following table For a detailed description of the averaging time refer to Subsection 5 4 2 For a detailed description of digital filter functions refer to Subsection 5 4 3 QVv onexs dyr NEXd Averaging Digital filter Channel data BFM 10 to 13 update timing time function ane
177. al i a om block moe Class D Class D 7 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line e Ground the terminal to class D grounded power supply line 100Q or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit e For the timing of power on off when using an external power supply see the following manual of the PLC to be connected Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 3 2 To Connect To the FX3uc Series PLC 4DA ADP FX3uUc Series PLC Main unit 15V vA FX2NcC Series PLC Input extension block Power Power Power crossover H connector connector connector Terminal Black Green Black Red block L Class D 24V DC grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line e For the 24V DC power supply line be sure to use the same power as the FX3uc Series PLC e Ground the terminal to a class D grounded power supply line 1009 or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 3 4 Analog Output Line 3 4 Analog Output Line The analog output type voltage output or current output can be selected for each channel If voltage output is selected 4DA ADP Terminal 4 block chu avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt k g avp onex4 lt 4 ch V a p pa VO lt e AAA AA fe iG
178. alculated from the following 1 0 160uA for 16mA full scale Total accuracy formula will be added when ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C Addition will be 100mV per 1 47x100 0 9 Rs 47 D A conversion 200us The data will be updated at every scan time time For a detailed description of data update refer to Section 2 4 O ddv ld ave nexd TT dav var nex4 gt lt I 2 20mMA 3 l gt I gt U 7 a y 4 Sz Output 2 H characteristics o D po Q i I mn gt x lt z lt o lt 4mA ooo o gt 4000 4080 0 gt 4000 4080 gt g Digital input Digital input U e The photo coupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC raaior medd The DC DC converter is used to insulate the driving power supply line from the analog 2 output area ag e Channels are not insulated from each other 58 25 Numbers of I O 2 0 point This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC points occupied E 7 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 2 4 D A Conversion Time 2 4 D A Conversion Time E 8 This section describes the D A conversion time D A conversion and special data register update timing D A conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC During execution of the END instructi
179. all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product C x T WIRING PRECAUTIONS A N gt gJ CAUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual a If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be D burnt out a Do not wire vacant terminals externally es i E Doing so may damage the product is gt Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems TI dav
180. alue CD at every sampling time The sampling time is specified by Command as Target Measured PID Output value value Parameters value SV PV MV l 5 dyr oNneX4 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt Vdr nexs UO ddagv dvr nexa TI dav var nexs M dy ld QYY NE X4 O ddv M1d QVt NEXS4 T gt O 88 ONS OL OVP NEXA UONONISUI Cid FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 How to Use PID Instruction PID Instruction FNC 88 2 2 Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto Tuning Explanation of set items points The target value SV is set The PID instruction does not change the settings Target value Caution on using the auto tuning limit cycle method SV If the target value for auto tuning is different from the target value in the PID control it is necessary to set a value to which a bias value is added and then store the actual target value when the auto tuning flag turns OFF Measured n l value PV This is the input value of the PID operation 1 1 Auto tuning in the limit cycle Twenty nine devices are occupied from the head device specified in S 29 2 Auto tuning in the step response method Parameter a Operation setting ACT When bits 1 2 and 15 are something other than 0 Twenty five devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 25 b Operation setting ACT When bits 1 2 and 15 are 0 Twenty devices are occupied f
181. alue and the new value is larger than the set abrupt change detection value value set in BFM 91 to 94 the system will judge that the channel data is changed abruptly The result of abrupt change detection will be written to BFM 27 as the abrupt change detection status data The abrupt change detection value setting range depends on the set input mode BFM 0 as shown in the following table Input mode BFM 0 Set a Setting range Initial value Description value Voltage input 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 do oe Voltage input 10V to 10V 4000 to 4000 Voltage input 2 Analog value direct indication mode 10V to 10V 10000 to 10000 Current input 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 1 to 8191 800 Current input 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 1 to 2047 200 Current input 5 Analog value direct indication mode 4mA to 20mA 4000 to 20000 Current input i 20mA to 20mA 16000 to 16000 11010383 Lie Current input 20mA to 20mA 4000 to 4000 ieee oe Current input 8 Analog value direct indication mode 1 to 4095 400 1 to 10000 1000 1 to 8191 800 1 to 20000 2000 20mA to 20mA 20000 to 20000 1 Caution regarding abrupt change detection value setting To use the abrupt change detection value be sure to turn on the abrupt change detection function b2 of BFM 22 B 42 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 De
182. alue value vonage input 16000 5000mV 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 2000 5000mV EMLA 0 10V to 10V 4000 to 4000 Voltage input 5000mV 2 Analog value direct indication mode Data change Data change Data change Data change 10V to 10V 10000 to 10000 impossible impossible impossible impossible 3 Current input 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 0 4000A 16000 20000A Current input 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 PO 4000A 4000 20000A Current input 4000 4000 uA 20000 20000uA 5 Analog value direct indication mode Data change Data change Data change Data change 4mA to 20mA 4000 to 20000 impossible impossible impossible impossible Current input Current input Current input 0 OuA 20000 20000uA 8 Analog value direct indication mode Data change Data change Data change Data change 20mA to 20mA 20000 to 20000 impossible impossible impossible impossible B 39 Q O 3 O T 3 e2 dyr oNeX4 dyr NEXd Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa TI dav var nexs M O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld dVv nexs dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 2 Offset gain data change Set offset data and gain data to change the input characteristics The offset and gain data can be set for each channel
183. an be shortened For a detailed description of the minimum peak value BFM 101 to 104 and the maximum peak value BFM 111 to 114 refer to Subsection 5 4 19 1 If BFM 125 K200 initial value Data will be transferred to D200 to D207 8 points Specified data register Description D200 Channel 1 minimum peak value BFM 101 D201 Channel 2 minimum peak value BFM 102 D202 Channel 3 minimum peak value BFM 103 D203 Channel 4 minimum peak value BFM 104 D204 Channel 1 maximum peak value BFM 111 D205 Channel 2 maximum peak value BFM 112 D206 Channel 3 maximum peak value BFM 113 D207 Channel 4 maximum peak value BFM 114 2 Caution regarding peak value automatic transfer to first data register specification e lf data registers are already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify the same data registers e Be sure to turn on the peak value automatic transfer function b4 of BFM 22 and the peak value holding function b3 of BFM 22 e The data written to BFM 125 will be retained in the EEPROM B 44 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 3 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing
184. an be transferred to the specified data register Os When over scale is detected data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened L L Represents a numeric value y Z GE convenient rinenen Automatic data transfer function gt setting O gt a a Transfer to data register specification ON Valid Transfer from memory a BFM 128 KO BFM 22 b7 ON BFM 28 DU gt 38 62 aS B 37 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 12 BFM 29 Error status Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Error data is assigned to the bits of BFM 29 1 BFM 29 Bit Assignment Bit No tem Description bO If any bits between b2 and b4 are turned on bO will turn on The 24 V power is not supplied properly Check the wiring condition or the voltage supplied b3 Hardware cnor FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD may be defective Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office The A D conversion value is abnormal b4 A D conversion error Check the over scale status data BFM 28 to localize the error channel b6 BFM reading writing If change in the input characteristics is started this bit will turn on If impossible this bit b6 is on A D conversi
185. an take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward gt B it to the end user 58 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION G 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input G 2 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 1 Outline of Functions OO 1 Outline This chapter describes the outline of FX3u 4AD PTW ADP referred to as PTW ADP 1 1 Outline of Functions The FX3U 4AD PTW ADP is an analog special adapter Connect the FX3u 4AD PTW ADP to the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC to read the temperature data from the 4 channel platinum resistance thermometers 1 Upto 4 PTW ADP units can be connected to the PLC including other analog special adapters 2 After connection of the platinum resistance thermometer Pt100 measurement of temperature will be possible 3 The temperature measurement data will be automatically written to the special data registers of the FX3uU FX3uUC Series PLC 4 adapters maximum including other Numbe
186. andards required to fulfill that job These engineers should also be trained in the use and maintenance of the completed product This includes being completely familiar with all associated documentation for the said product All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with established safety practices All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices The operators should also be familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment Note the term completed equipment refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses the product associated with this manual e This product has been manufactured as a general purpose part for general industries and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life e Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles consult with Mitsubishi Electric e This product has been manufactured under strict quality control However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system e When combining this product with other products please confirm the standard and the code or regulations with
187. ange or disconnection is detected C Yo03 The temperature measurement data p of channel 4 is outside the specified 2S range or disconnection is detected re D8268 4 S 004 EEPROM error in 1st adapter amp a D8268 5 ae l l D Yo05 Averaging time setting error in 1st n adapter 2S gt D8268 6 z Yo06 PTW ADP hardware error in 1st adapter D8268 7 4 007 PTW ADP communication data error in 1st adapter TI dav var nexs M ld QYY NEX4 gt M1d OVt NEXS dav DI CWP NeX4 ae ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS G 19 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 7 Model Code 4 7 Model Code Initial value K21 Numeric data type Decimal K When the PTW ADP is connected model code 21 will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code Special data register D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code Use the special data registers above to check whether PTW ADP is connected or not Description 1 Program Example FNC224 D8269 K24 010 Checks the model code of the 1st LD analog special adapter 4 8 Basic Program Example Create the following basic program example to read out the temperature measurement data The following program will store the temperature measurement data C from channels 1 and 2 of
188. antly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that the output current of the service power supply for sensors varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If an overload occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case CAUTION Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circ
189. are correct 6749 Abnormal PID input variation alarm set value or output lt Alarm output is not given PID operation is continued gt variation alarm set value Set value lt 0 Check whether the target settings are correct lt Auto tuning is finished PID operation is started gt e When auto tuning was started the difference between the Oe een measured value and the target value was 150 or less 6750 Pe e When auto tuning was started the difference between the Improper auto tuning result measured value and the target value was 1 3 or more Check the measured value and target value and then execute auto tuning again lt Auto tuning is forced to finish PID operation does not started gt The operation direction estimated from the measured value at 6751 lt Step response method gt the start of auto tuning was different from the actual operation Auto tuning operation direction mismatch direction of the output during auto tuning Correct the relationship among the target value output value for auto tuning and measured value and then execute auto tuning again l 28 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting PID Instruction FNC 88 6 1 Error Codes SHOL Error description Action code lt Auto tuning is finished gt PID operation is not started gt Because the set value fluctuated during auto tuning auto nexs gJ sw UOWLWOD gt lt Step response method gt tuning w
190. arget value 500 50 C 500 50 C Sampling time TS 3000 ms 500 ms Setting contents TI dav var nexs M Input filter a 2 70 x Differential gain KD 5 0 Output value upper limit 22 2 aan 2000 5 amp Output value lower limit 23 pO 0 G a Input variation alarm bit 1 of 1 Not provided x Output value upper lower limit setting bit 5 of 1 Provided E According to Output value CD 190 operation T 2 1 Operation of the electric heater a 1 During PID control gt D502 x 1 ms lt ON duration gt 2o z OFF ON ON ON ON ON aona ae ee eer D 2 sec 2000 ms 2 sec 2000 ms 2 sec 2000 ms lt cycle gt 2 E oS 2 During auto tuning When the output is 90 of the maximum output i UU U U U 1 8 sec 1800 ms 1 8 sec 1800 ms 1 8 sec 1800 ms 2 sec 2000 ms 2 sec 2000 ms 2 sec 2000 ms l 23 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 5 2 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method 5 2 Program example of auto tuning step response method and PID control Program example of auto tuning step response method and PID control l 24 Initial pulse M8002 ti is 500 0500 beg 12 D D512 MOV T FNC 12 Dedi E MOV O K200 D532 ie FNC 12 aes e PID control is started after auto tuning X010 PID control is started a without auto tuning Auto tuning setting flag X011 MO Auto tuning ON f
191. as not executed correctly 6752 ire Improper auto tuning operation Set the sampling time to a value larger than the output change cycle or set a larger value to the input filter constant After changing the setting execute auto tuning again gt lt lt Limit cycle method gt ac 6753 Abnormal output set value for auto tuning Es o Eas bS ULV upper limit lt LLV lower limit wae ra is forcibly finished gt PID operation is not 5 started gt lt Limit cycle method gt Check whether the target settings are correct 6754 Abnormal PV threshold hysteresis set value for auto C tuning SHPV lt 0 lt Limit cycle method gt lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not a 6755 Abnormal auto tuning transfer status started gt b Data of device controlling transfer status is abnormally Verify that devices occupied by PID instruction are not overwritten overwritten in the program 5 lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not started gt D et The auto tuning time is too long 1 ET S Ea i Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and 2s 6756 Abnormal result due to excessive auto tuning Ea the lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller A measurement time ton gt t ton lt 0 t lt 0 value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check whether the result is improved l
192. ata is for reading only Do not change rewrite the input data using sequence program indicator or device monitor of the programming tool 2 Program Example M8000 T D8260 D100 Normally ON FNC 12 D8261 D101 MOV Even if the input data is not stored in D100 or D101 data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the timer counter set value or in a PID instruction Stores the channel 1 input data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D100 Stores the channel 2 input data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D101 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 5 Averaging Time 4 5 Averaging Time 9 Setting range 1 to 4095 g Initial value KO 5 Numeric data type Decimal K R If the averaging time is set for the 4AD ADP the average data will be stored as the input data The averaging time can be set for each channel xx Set the averaging time in the following special data registers Of gt U O Special data register Ast 2nd 3rd D8264 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8265 Averaging time for channel 2 data D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel 3 data D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel 4 data 1 Cautions regarding averaging time setting Description e Ifthe averaging time is set to 1 the immediate data is stored to the special data register e Ifthe averaging time is set in t
193. ata register to check the description of the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors For a detailed description of the error status refer to Section 6 5 Description Bit Description Bit Description bO Channel 1 over scale detection b5 Averaging time setting error b1 Channel 2 over scale detection b6 4AD ADP hardware error b2 Channel 3 over scale detection b7 4AD ADP communication data error b3 Channel 4 over scale detection b8 to b15 Unused b4 EEPROM error Caution regarding use of error status data If a 4AD ADP hardware error b6 or 4AD ADP communication data error b7 is detected it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at the next power on of the PLC For this reason be sure to create the following program RST D8268 7 Mee Error status of 1st analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error Initial pulse Error status of 1st analog status register b7 OFF communication data error 2 Program Example D8268 0 Detects over scale in channel 1 of the 1st adapter D8268 1 8268 Detects over scale in channel 2 of the 1st adapter D8268 2 Detects over scale in channel 3 of the 1st adapter D8268 3 Detects over scale in channel 4 of the 1st adapter D8268 4 EEPROM error in 1st adapter D8268 5 Averaging time setting error in 1st adapter D8268 6 Hardware error in 1st 4AD ADP D8268 7 nae Comm
194. ation and also describes various programs FXON 2LC Supplied with This manual describes the FX2N 2LC temperature JY992D85601 adjustment special function block hardware such as USER S GUIDE product eee specifications and installation This manual describes the FX2N 2LC temperature FX2N 2LC JY992D85801 Supplied adjustment special function block hardware such as USER S MANUAL separately specifications and installation and also describes various programs DAO FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual Common Items 5 2 Description of Related Manuals O 5 La La La La g 6 Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual 5 1 Series and main unit B Abbreviation generic name Description x x Se PLC ne FX Series PLC Generic name for the FXo FXos FX1S FXON FX1N FX1 FX2 FX FX2N FX3u FX1NC FX2NC and FX3uc Series PLC FX3U Series Generic name for the FX3U Series PLC C FX3U Series PLC or main unit Generic name for the FX3U Series PLC main unit gt lt FX3uUC Series Generic name for the FX3uc Series PLC A gt ae eerie ee Generic name for the FX3UC Series PLC main unit T main unit O g 2 Expansion board and special adapter x Abbreviation generic name Description E gt Expansion board Generic name for communication expansion board and special adapter connec tion expansion board Communication expansion board Generic name
195. attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions
196. atus data e To use the abrupt change status data be sure to turn on the abrupt change detection function b2 of BFM 22 e Perform one of the following operations to turn off the previously turned on bit Turn the power off and on Turn on b2 of BFM 99 to reset the abrupt change detection error status Write H0000 in BFM 27 as the abrupt change detection status data e Even if abrupt change is detected channel data BFM 10 to 13 will be continuously updated Abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer function b6 of BFM 22 If the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM 127 the data in BFM 27 can be transferred to the specified data register When abrupt change is detected data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened L Represents a numeric value Convenient function setting Transfer to data register specification ON Valid Transfer from memory E BFM 127 KL BFM 22 b2 ON BFM 22 b6 ON BEM Hel 5 Automatic data transfer function FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 11 BFM 28 Over scale status Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Q O 3 O
197. avy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem Vdar nexas dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav OI CWp NeX4 ae ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS D 9 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of FX3U 4DA are arranged as follows Signal Application 24V DC power supply Ground terminal V VI Channel 1 analog output e Do not connect any lines V VI Channel 2 analog output e Do not connect any lines V VI Channel 3 analog output e Do not connect any lines V VI Channel 4 analog output 3 2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque The FX3U 4DA terminal block is designed for M3 screws The end disposal of the cable shown below Tighten the terminal to a torque of 0 5 N m to 0 8 N m e When one wire is connected to one terminal 8 2 0 13 Terminal Crimp 6 2 mm 0 24 Screw terminal or less 3 2 0 13 6 2 mm 0 24 C Terminal or less DIH e When two wires are connected to one terminal 63 2 0 13 6 2 mm
198. be output at point 1 in pattern 2 2V D5015 Output update time at point 1 in pattern 2 6s Output update time unit at point 1 in pattern 2 1s ove Benes Point to point interpolation method S shaped interpolation D5017 K10000 p Data to be output at point 2 in pattern 2 10V D5018 Output update time at point 2 in pattern 2 15s NO Output update time unit at point 2 in pattern 2 1s D RNE Point to point interpolation method No interpolation D5020 K500 F Data to be output at point 3 in pattern 2 0 5V D5021 K45 Output update time at point 3 in pattern 2 4500 ms Q9 Output update time unit at point 3 in pattern 2 100 ms Dane IPR Point to point interpolation method S shaped interpolation D5023 K4000 7 Data to be output at point 4 in pattern 2 4V D5024 Output update time at point 4 in pattern 2 9s aN Output update time unit at point 4 in pattern 2 1s pure mae Point to point interpolation method Linear interpolation D 42 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 2 Preparation of data table 5 Example of pattern output 9 Data can be output in a predetermined pattern as shown below Example of pattern 1 in output mode 1 E O shown on the previous page 2 3 When the pattern is repeated B BFM 85 to 88 an are set to 0 or 2 or 2S 2S Output higher S T value SG Point 2 BV gt Linear interpolation C S shaped in
199. bers OFF If a bit is turned off the corresponding data will be stored in the buffer memories in the order of the smallest BFM number to the largest BFM number but when 1 700 points of data are stored data storage will stop 1 Channel number assignment to each bit of BFM 197 b3 Selection of channel 4 data update function BFM 5300 to 6999 1 700 points b4 to b15 Not used Bit No History data stored in bO BFM 200 to 1899 1 700 points b1 BFM 1900 to 3599 1 700 points b2 BFM 3600 to 5299 1 700 points a E ae Not used O 5 4 27 BFM 198 Data history sampling time setting B 48 Setting range 0 to 30000 Initial value at delivery K15000 Numeric data type Decimal K Use this function to set the data history sampling time If one of the channels uses the digital filter function set a multiple of 5 1 Sampling cycle As shown in the following table the sampling cycle depends on whether the digital filter function is used ve ae Value set in 7 Whether digital filter function is used BFM 198 Sampling cycle 0 5 ms x number of selected channels number of channels using the digital filter function Set value ms in BFM 198 x number of selected 1 or more channels number of channels using the digital filter function None of the channels use the digital filter function Series 5 ms x number of selected channels number of channels using the digital filter function One or more channels use
200. c program e Convenient function program If the error status data or the input analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 8 Troubleshooting FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 1 3 Connectable PLC and Version Numbers 1 3 Connectable PLC and Version Numbers FX3U 4AD is compatible with the following PLC Compatible PLC Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later from first product FX3uUC Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later August 2004 and later FX3UC 4AD is compatible with the following PLC Compatible PLC Date of production FX3UC Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later August 2004 and later 1 Version check Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number D8001 2 4 1 0 0 Di a a r aa Wssecsct a woe Version data Example Ver 1 00 PC type Example 24 FX2n FX3u FX2nc and FX3uc series 2 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of product production can be seen from the manufacturer s serial number SERIAL indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product Example FX3U 48MR ES production number 570001 MITSUBISHI CantRotter MODEL FXsu 48MR ES 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 40W OUT 30VDC 240VAC 2A COSo 1 Right side SERIAL 570001 us LISTED 80M1 INDJ CONT EQ C ate MITSUBISHI ELEC
201. can be specified 3 Special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest to the main unit For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Section 4 2 Communic High speed FX3U 4AD FX3U 4AD FX3uU 4AD oe FX3U 4AD np pE eer a e ee eons FXau FXauc Series PLC Sequence program et Special data registers AL D8270 to D8279 d Pf ft Special auxiliary relays Special devices Special auxiliary relays AD PLT speciai data registers 7 mii D8260 to D8269 j i Special auxiliary relays AND M8270 to M8279 AID M8280 to M8289 DY special data registers D8280 to D8289 Pt ft Special auxiliary relays M8290 to M8299 aD tT DY special data registers e The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on However in this case do not include the high speed input output special adapter and the communication special adapter FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices If the 4AD ADP is connected special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table R Read W Write Special Device number Refer Description M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode o
202. can be connected Pa s Temperature sensor j input ePlatinum resistance E thermometer l sensor Pt100 FX3u 4AD PT ADP FXsu 4AD PTW ADP 1 An FX3uU 232 BD FX3U 485 BD FX3uU 422 BD FX3U USB BD or FX3U CNV BD is needed to connect the special adapters A 9 SWW9 UOWWLUOD aVr Nexs WU QVv onexs Vdr nexs UO ddgv dvr nexa dav dav we Mld CvP nex4 Q id ave nexd TI aav var nexs M 3L dAYt N X4 ddv UOHONYSU Qld 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 3 1 2 A 10 e oO iS ab 2O Cc 14 we 1S O Ke Q E gt omt T O ab Q op ee Q Connection of special function blocks FX3U Series i i j H i iq AR E and represent the connecting positions 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products 3 1 FX3U Series PLC For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual supplied with your PLC Refer to the FX3U Series User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 I I I i refer to the previous page Special function block for FX3u FX2N and FXON Terminal block mm e e e e e e e e E E S E e e e e e e e e y To connect the special adapters ff or the expansion boards B _ e e e e e e e e E E Analog in
203. cannot be changed e It takes approximately 5 seconds to determine the input mode For this reason after changing the input mode be sure to wait for 5 seconds or more before writing other data e HFFFF no channels used cannot be set 2 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM The maximum number of EEPROM rewrites is 10 000 times Therefore when creating a program do not frequently write data to the above buffer memories BFM FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 2 BFM 2 to 5 Averaging time Setting range 1 to 4095 Initial value K1 Numeric data type Decimal K Q O 3 O T 3 e2 To change the channel data type from the immediate data channels 1 to 4 BFM 10 to 13 to the average data set the desired averaging time channels 1 to 4 BFM 2 to 5 xx The relation between the set averaging time and the corresponding operation is shown in the following table CE For a detailed description of channel data update timing refer to Subsection 5 4 4 gt O Averaging time BFM Channel data BFM 10 to 13 type Error descriptions C 2 to 5 e lt Immediate data KO will be set and the averaging time 2 0 or less Each time the A D conversion is performed
204. cations FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications swa UOWWLUOD gt This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for the 4AD dyr NEXd 2 1 Generic Specifications dyr oNeX4 Item Specifications Ambient 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating temperature 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative A humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Compliant with EN 68 2 6 Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm Ea Vibrati 10 times of testing in ene gt a LL 0 035 each direction X Y resistance DIN Rail Mounting vo ee ee p 10 57 0 075 Total 80 min each Di M Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa Shock Compliant with EN 68 2 27 resistance 147 m s2 Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise Using noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min voltage Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less Between all terminals and ground terminal Comply with JEM 1021 dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI eronnalng lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt 2 TI ais Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive con
205. ceeds 200 ms the CPU error indicator lamp will illuminate and the PLC will stop Insert WDT instruction watchdog timer refresh between BMOV instructions FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 4 Initialization Program for 4AD Factory Default 7 4 initialization Program for 4AD Factory Default Execution of the following program will reset the input mode BFM 0 offset data BFM 41 to 44 gain data BFM 51 to 54 etc to the factory default status Q O 3 O T 3 e2 1 Conditions The sequence program described in this section runs under the following conditions 1 System configuration The FX3U 4AD unit No 0 should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC 2 Device assignment dyr NEXd dyr oNeX4 Device Description X000 4AD initialization command 2 Example of sequence program 4AD initialization command X000 oe FNC 12 K1 U0 G20 The 4AD will be initialized Mov BFM 0 to 6999 will be cleared 3 Cautions Vdr nexs UO ddagv dvr nexa e It takes approximately 5 seconds to complete initialization Do not write any data to the buffer memory in this time e When initialization is complete the value of BFM 20 will be reset to KO e Priority is given to the data change disable BFM 19 To initialize write K2080 to BFM 19 TI dav var nexs M O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld GVv ne
206. cie glee T Le Version data Example Ver 1 00 5 PC type Example 24 FXan FX3u FX2nc and FXsuc series D 2 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number x E The year and month of production of the product can be seen from the manufacturer s serial number S SERIAL indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product Example E FX3U 48MR ES production number 570001 p Right side MITSUBISHI PF Contaotter z MODEL FXsu 48MR ES gt 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 40W 2 OUT 30VDC 240VAC 2A COS 1 U SERIAL 570001 Mus LISTED 80M1 IND CONT EQ CE x we MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION TE MADE IN JAPAN z oleae pe ET O ele eed Uvedeededecesed Leccencescecesd E EE E E E ENEE E E Ty E Control number O Month Example 7 July 1 to 9 January to September U X October Y November Z December a Year Example 5 2005 last digit of dominical year iS J gt U E 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number L Use the programming tool with the following version number to create programs for PT ADP of the FX3u y FX3uc Series PLC gt GX Developer Ver SWE Porla 5 SWLOID5C GPPW J T she jap r When selecting a model select FX3U CY 1 e SWLID5C GPPW E Bi If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used programming will not be possible 25 4 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer select FX3UC for the PLC type es F 5 F
207. cified data register 5 4 23 Over scale status If the over scale status data automatic transfer to data register is euncecton H b7 data automatic specified in BFM 128 the over scale status data BFM 28 will y l t i 5 4 24 amp transfer function be automatically written to the specified data register T gt Error status data If the error status data automatic transfer to data register is Sipcecion T b8 automatic transfer specified in BFM 129 the error status data BFM 29 will be GO Hs 5 4 25 v function automatically written to the specified data register U O2 Be B 33 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 2 Caution regarding convenient function setting e Even if the data addition function is used the value before adding the addition data BFM 61 to 64 will be checked to detect the over scale error e To use the peak value automatic transfer function b4 of BFM 22 be sure to enable the peak value holding function b3 of BFM 22 e To use the upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer function b5 of BFM 22 be sure to enable the upper lower limit value detection function b1 of BFM 22 e To use the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer function b6 of BFM 22 be sure to enable the abrupt change detection function b2 of BFM 22 3 Caution regarding EEPROM
208. completion of writing the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and the output will be restarted 3 Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 5 10 to 17 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will also be written in the EEPROM of FX3uU 4DA Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 When creating a program therefore do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories BFM D 34 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 19 BFM 61 Error status data automatic transfer to data register specification O 3 3 Setting range 0 to 7999 Initial value K200 3 Numeric data type Decimal K Use this function to automatically transfer the error status data BFM 29 to the data register specified in B BFM 61 25 2S When an error is detected data will be automatically transferred from FX3U 4DA to the PLC For this reason CE the PLC does not need a program for reading data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened a For a detailed description of the error status BFM 29 refer to Subsection 5 4 12 1 If BFM 61 K200 initial value C a ope x lt Specified data Becenption 2 register gt gJ D200 Value of error status BFM 29 gt Q 2 Cautions regarding
209. cription Special devices oo Transfer direction 1st adapter M D8260 to M D8269 Output mode For a detailed description switching 2nd adapter M D8270 to M D8279 of a basic program refer to Output setting data Section 4 8 P 3rd adapter M D8280 to M D8289 oe Error status Ath adapter M D8290 to M D8299 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system 1 The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3uUc D DSS PLC E 3 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt QVr onexs Vdr nexs UO ddgv dvr nexa O ddv ld ave nexd TT dav var nex4 M1d QVt NEXS4 dav OI CWp NeX4 ae ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog output using the 4DA ADP follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4DA ADP Refer to Chapter 1 Outline Outline of system e Compatible PLC version number e Compatible programming tool version number Refer to Chapter 2 Specifications check Specifications e Operation environment e Performance specifications Refer to the common e Output characteristics pages System configuration and selection S
210. cted to the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC including the other special function blocks 2 Each channel has either Voltage Output or Current Output specification 3 The block converts the digital values stored in the FX3U 4DA buffer memory BFM in FX3uU 4DA to analog signals voltage current 4 A predetermined output pattern is set as data table and analog signal can be output according to the data table Point and section to be Up to 8 units connect to the FX3U FX3UC Series PLC including other types of special function blocks Numberorconiccabieuiaits FX3U Series PLC To check the connectable PLC a a O model number refer to MITSUBISHI TAS oPenagyageansenss T7 J POWER POWER Section 1 3 o o no o ever 1066466688885 588 606686866 For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 For a detailed description of nea analog data output programs refer to Chapter 4 7 and 8 For a detailed description of eve the buffer memory refer to Buteememory Section 5 3 and Section 5 4 Program e FROM FNC 78 Transmission direction BFM 0 e TO FNC 79 To use FROM TO instruction i re or to directly specify the BFM e BFM direct aq gt BFM 3098 refer to Section 5 2 specification ULIN GLI Refer to the system configuration shown in the FX3u FX3uc User s Manual Hardware Editi
211. ction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters 2 Alarm setting for input variation and output variation CS3 1 bit 1 and bit 2 5 a O Setting range OFF ON 3 The input variation and output variation can be checked arbitrarily 3 These parameters can be set in 24 z For the operation of upper lower limit alarm output for the input and output values refer to Subsection 3 2 8 B Input variation 1 bit 1 535 When using the input variation alarm it is necessary to set to ON the following bits and set the values to be es checked 6 Set item Setting setting range Operation setting l ON Used ACT CS3 1 Input variation alarm OFF Not used C Input variation 20 Input variation incremental alarm set value 0 to 32767 a X am Set Vale 21 Input variation decremental alarm set value 0 to 32767 5 Output variation 1 bit 2 When using the output variation alarm it is necessary to set the following bits to ON and set the values to be D checked T oo Set item Setting setting range re J l l _ ON Used gt a setting aH Output variation alarm OFF Not used Output value upper lower limit setting Make sure to set it to OFF Output variation 22 Output variation incremental alarm set value 0 to 32767 alarm set value 23 Output variation decremental alarm set value 0 to 32767 Variation means Previous value Current value 3 Upper and lower limits for output value CS3 1 bit 5 Setting range OFF Setting is not provided
212. ction block s to the right side of the FX3U Series PLC e Up to 8 special function blocks can be connected PLC Analog special function block for FX3U FX2N and FXON x mo a arar MELE EG eogegevogsegoggs POWER meeseses TI dav var nexs M ld QYY NE X4 Up to 8 special function units blocks can be connected excluding the special adapters dy For a detailed description of the system configuration refer to the PLC User s Manual Hardware Edition O 2 FX3uc Series PLC x C e Connect the special function block s to the right side of the FX3uc Series PLC e In some cases FX2NC CNV IF or FX3UC 1PS 5V may be needed for connection 35 gJ U e Up to 8 1 special function blocks can be connected L PLC FX3UC or FX2NC Analog FX3UC 1PS 5V FX3U FX2N or FXON Analog special function block ar special function block a gt lt FX2NC CNV IF 2 os Tera BK al l NPR gt Sie 8 5 f 2 fd I Pd POWER 5 O lt se v Eser U a SE oe 9 5 ane Epa _ 3 gS Up to 8 special function units blocks can be connected excluding the special adapters 1 Up to 7 special function units blocks can be connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT PLC Select either FX3UC 1PS 5V or FX2NC CNV IF considering the current components consumpti
213. ction of the Thermocouple 9 3 4 1 Thermocouple type 3 e There are 2 types of thermocouples K type and J type When selecting the thermocouple type make sure B that the same type of thermocouple is connection to all the channels uy e Be sure to use a non grounded thermocouple type CE gt U J 3 4 2 Compensating lead wire To connect the thermocouple use one of the following types of compensating lead wires C a x lt Thermocouple Type of compensating lead wire Type K KX KCA KCB KCC 5 Type J JX 5 e The compensating lead wire indicates a temperature value of approximately 0 12 C higher than that of the D wire resistor 109 Use the appropriate compensating lead wire when considering this difference x e lf the compensating lead wire is very long the wire may be easily affected by noise etc It is therefore E recommended for the length of the compensating lead wire to be 100 m or less 3 5 Wiring of Thermocouple Wiring depends on the thermocouple type selected Refer to the following wiring diagrams 3 5 1 Wiring of thermocouple type K Terminal block TC ADP OPEN 1 Lye 3 Thermocouple Compensating Comipensallllg CCU type K lead wire ae S a ic Temperature Compensating circuit Non HEY dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT M1d QVt NEXS4 gt O x 24V DC Ee 24 is me S Class D 2o grounding v LO LU ch Lirepresents the channel number l U 1 Itis not necessary to con
214. d for A D conversion will be 5 ms x number of selected channels FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 2 4 Input Mode Characteristics BFM 0 2 4 Input Mode Characteristics BFM 0 For the 4AD there are two types of input characteristics voltage 10 to 10V and current 4 to 20mA 20 to 20mA input characteristics The input characteristics depend on the set input mode as described below For each input range there are 3 input modes 1 Voltage input characteristics 10 to 10V Input mode 0 to 2 Set input mode 2 Set input mode 0 Set input mode 1 i Input type Voltage input Input type Voltage input Input type Voltage input asc analog value direct indication Analog input range 10 to 10V Analog input range 10 to 10V Anaoa inout ranae 1010 10V Digital output range 32000 to 32000 Digital output range 4000 to 4000 D A a i Digital output range 10000 to 10000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Offset gain adjustment Possible Offset gain adjustment Impossible Digital value Digital value Digital value FILGU Pariin 40g p m 10200 7 r 32000 i 4000 ies 10000 i gt as 1 iN PN OIG i 12 S Input E ii Input tie Input I j voltage 10V 0 voltage 10V 0 voltage 10V o E 10V E 10V i 10V gt gt It a Si li i gt a 32000
215. data in BFM 28 2 Cautions regarding over scale status data automatic transfer to data register specification e Ifa data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify the same data register e Be sure to turn on the over scale status data automatic transfer function b7 of BFM 22 e The data written to BFM 128 will be retained in the EEPROM Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa 3 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 5 4 25 BFM 129 Error status data automatic transfer to data register specification Setting range 0 to 7999 Initial value at delivery K211 Numeric data type Decimal K TI dav var nexs M Use this function to automatically transfer the error status data BFM 29 to the data register specified in BFM 129 When an error is detected data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened ld QYY NE X4 dy O For a detailed description of the error status data BFM 29 refer to Subsection 5 4 12 7 1 If BFM 129 K211 initial value O Specified data register Description 6 3 D211 Error status data in BFM 29
216. de the range specified for the current input mode 0 to 1640 Remedy Check that the input analog value is within the specified range Also check the wiring EEPROM error b4 Description of error The adjustment data which was set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or has been destroyed Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office Averaging time setting error b5 Description of error The averaging time set for one of the channels channels 1 to 4 is outside the specified range 1 to 4095 Remedy Check that the averaging time is set correctly for each channel 4AD ADP error b6 Description of error The 4AD ADP is not operating properly Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to the 4AD ADP Also check that the 4AD ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 4AD ADP communication error b7 Description of error A communication error is detected between the 4AD ADP and the PLC Remedy Check that the 4AD ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output A B FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable
217. der plate the end of the cable 0 35 Insulation sleeve Contact area Crimp area e To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve If the cable cover is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while referring to the external view Manufacturer CRIMPFOX ZA 3 0 55 Phoenix Contact or CRIMPFOX UD 6 3 Tool e To tighten terminals use a small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in O ddv ld ave nexd TT dav var nex4 the figure to the right a gt Note ue If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not OS be able to be achieved Use the following recommended screwdriver or Usha an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm straight H Manufacturer Model gt GE Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 0 4m 2 5mm 0 01 gt lt 0 09 T oO z U O2 Be E 11 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 3 3 Power Supply Line 3 3 Power Supply Line Connect the 24V DC power supply line of the 4DA ADP to the 24 and 24 terminals of the terminal block 3 3 1 To Connect to the FX3u Series PLC 1 To use an External power supply 2 To use the 24V DC power of the PLC g FX3u Series PLC 4DA ADP FX3u Series PLC TOARRE Main unit Main unit 15V 15V Termin
218. dication mode 4 Refer to the instruction manual of the respective product 5 The offset and gain of the FX3U 4DA cannot be adjusted for channels using the analog value mV or uA specification mode A 7 sw UOWLUOD QVr Nex4 WU QVv Onexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav DI CWP NeX4 ae ddv UONONISU Gid m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2 2 List of Analog Product Models A 8 No of Refer Voltage current input output mixture Voltage 0 32mV Input 10V to 10V DC with SIgn 16 bits Combined use of voltage and 4ch 1 25uA current is possible 20mA to 20mA DC with sign 15 bits i AEN g The offset gain can be 5 Voltage 5mV adjusted 2 Output 10V to 10V DC with sign 12 bits The scaling function is 1ch Current 20uA incorporated OmA to 20mA DC 10bits Voltage 40mV Input OV to 10V DC 8bits 2ch Current 64uA 4mA to 20mA DC 8bits FXON 3A 1 Voltage 40mV Output OV to 10V DC 8bits 1ch Current 64uA 4mA to 20mA DC 8bits 0 1 C 0 1 C 0 1 C Centigrade and Fahrenheit The sampling function is 0 4 C C The input format is common to 2 channels The offset gain can be adjusted Common to 2 input channels 3 Temperature sensor input Combined use of voltage current and thermocoup
219. ductive dust z atmosphere E gt Working l 7 a a Compliant with IEC61131 2 lt 2000m SA L 1 The direct mounting method cannot be used with FX3UC 4AD PLC Other Other Other X equipment equipment equipment C O O O O O z gt Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding O Best condition Good condition Not allowed For a detailed description of grounding refer to Section 3 5 e 3 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use the 4AD 4AD may malfunction J O2 2S 2 B 7 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 3 FX3U 4AD Item Specifications A D conversion 24V DC 10 90MA circuit drive power It is necessary to supply 24V DC from the terminal block 5V DC 110mMA CPU drive power Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit it is not necessary to supply power externally FX3uUC 4AD Item Specifications A D conversion 24V DC 10 80mA circuit drive power It is necessary to supply 24V DC from the power connector 5V DC 100mA ci Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit it is not necessary to supply the power Performance Specifications B 8 Specifications Aalena 20mA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC Input resistance 200kQ Input resistance 250Q in
220. e e men e men e men quip AKIPI JUR Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 5 3 Ifthe pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use 4DA ADP The 4DA ADP may malfunction E 6 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications z 5 S T z Item Specifications D A conversion circuit 24V DC 20 15 150mMA B driving power It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power line to the terminal block uy 5V DC 15mA Of Interface driving power Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit of the FX Series it is not SG necessary to supply the power 2 3 Performance Specifications y x T gt gt gJ Specifications v Item Voltage output Current output D Analog output OV to 10 V DC 4mA to 20mA DC n range External load 5KQ to 1MQ External load 500Q or less a Digital input 12 bits binary z Resolution 2 5mV 10V 4000 4uA 16mA 4000 0 5 50mV for 10V full scale when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C 1 0 100mV for 10V full scale when ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C e 0 5 80uA for 16mA full scale If the external load resistance Rs is less than when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C 5kQ the value c
221. e T1 O lt Tis lt Ti2 lt TH re eee eee Tis Output in PI operation Output MV Output in proportional operation Time Example 2 Proportional operation P operation in cooling forward operation Integral time TI x 0 lt TIS lt TI2 lt TI E TBS z Target N 3 PO ee Measured value in proportional operation e j a al alee ca S 1 Measured value in PI operation Time Integral time TI IN z aa 0 lt TI3 lt TI2 lt TI lt Se A 2 a aa iiaeaa S Output in PI operation a tie T Output in proportional operation Time Important point The integral operation changes the output so that the continuously generated deviation is eliminated As a result the remaining deviation generated in the proportional operation can be eliminated Deviation EV Deviation Time Output of proportional operation integral operation Output of integral operation Output lt i na To eee lt 4 Output of proportional operation Proportional gain KP x Deviation E Time Ti ntegral time l 14 F X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters 3 2 6 Differential gain KD S3 5 o Setting range 0 to 100 3 PID control Differential operation T The filter is applied to the output at the differential operation 2 Only the differential operat
222. e data in the buffer memory during the period Priority is given to the setting of the change prohibition mode BFM 19 Once initialization is completed the value in BFM 20 will automatically change to KO dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT M1d QVt NEXS4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS D 61 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 9 Troubleshooting FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 9 1 PLC Version Number Check 9 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error codes If the D A conversion data is not output or if the proper digital value is not output check the following items e Wiring e Program e Error status PLC Version Number Check as e Any versions from Ver 2 20 initial version to the latest version of the FX3U Series are compatible e Check the version number of FX3UC Series The version number should be 1 30 or later For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 9 2 Wiring Check Check the wiring as follows 1 Power FX3U 4DA needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the 24 V indicator lamp of FX3U 4DA is on 2 Analog output line Use the 2 core twisted shielded cable for the analog output line In addition be sure to separate the analog output line from the other motive power lines or inductive lines
223. e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs 3 e Channels are not insulated from each other z Sumon Sra ns 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 20 occupied v 14 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In the direct indication mode however the l offset gain cannot be adjusted 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition z 1V lt Gain Offset a 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition OF o 5 3mA lt Gain Offset lt 30mA 4 The resolution and the input output characteristics depend on the selected mode 5 If1 or more channels use the thermocouple input s the input voltage current data conversion speed will be 1 ms x number of selected channels A 21 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 2 Analog Output 4 2 Analog Output 4 2 1 FX3u 4DA ADP FX3U 4DA ADP Specifications Voltage output Current output Number of output points 4ch RAISE otou Ge OV to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC oe g External load 5k to 1MQ External load 5009 or less Offset i ae Impossible to change Impossible to change ain Digital input 12 bits binary Resolution 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 4uA 16mAx1 4000 pels er pe ratte 0 5 50m V for 10V full scale 0 5 80uA for 16mA full scale Ambient temp
224. e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method e Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1 For FX2N 2AD combined use of the voltage and current inputs is not possible 2 Use the adjustment volume to adjust FX2N 2AD 3 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will change the resolution A 16 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 3 FX3uU 4AD 9 3 3 FX3U 4AD Specifications g Number of input points 4ch B 10V to 10V DC 20mA to 20mA DC ce Analog input range l 4mA to 20mA DC BE Input resistance 200 KQ Input resistance 250 9 ce TN AD Offset 10V to 9V 1 2 20mA to 17mA 1 3 Gain 9V to 10V 14 17mA to 30mA 13 C Digital output With sign 16 bits binary With sign 15 bits binary 3 Seaton 0 32mV 20Vx1 64000 1 25uA 40mAx1 32000 esolution 2 5mV 20Vx1 8000 5 00uA 40mAx1 8000 T gJ gt U O Ambient temperature 0 5 200uA for 40mA full scale 09 0 5 2540C eae mN tOr ey yee Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input D S U 2s Ambient temperature 1 0 400uA for 40mA full scale 3 0 to 55 C UO ee NORE SUSE Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input z Time required for A D 5 VOEO 500us x number of selected channels WVhen the input mode
225. e details of the error and then check the wiring and programs i For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 2 QO 25S FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 4 Program Check 5 4 Program Check Check the following items for the program 1 Cancellation of error status at power on When the power is turned off and then on again the error status should be cleared b6 and b7 should turn off using the program 2 Check of storage devices Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by the other parts of the programs 5 5 Error Status Check If an error occurs in the PTW ADP the corresponding bit will turn on The temperature measurement data of bO channel 1 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of b1 channel 2 is outside the specified PTW ADP hardware error Description Averaging time setting error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of b2 channel 3 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected PTW ADP communication data error The temperature measurement data of b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to 15 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error o To solve a problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below
226. e functions incorporated in the 4AD to create practical programs This chapter describes the examples of practical programs Program that uses the averaging time Program that uses convenient functions Program that uses the data history function Program that initializes 4AD to the factory default status 7 1 Program That Uses Averaging Time This section describes a program that uses the analog data averaging time input to the 4AD or the digital filter function of the 4AD 1 Conditions The sequence program described in this section is created under the following conditions 1 System configuration The FX3U 4AD unit No 0 should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC 2 Input mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode O voltage input 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 3 current input 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 Averaging time For channels 1 to 4 the averaging time should be set to 10 Digital filter function For channels 1 to 4 the digital filter function should be disabled default Device DO D1 D2 D3 Device assignment Description A D converted digital value for channel 1 A D converted digital value for channel 2 A D converted digital value for channel 3 A D converted digital value for channel 4 2 Example of sequence program B 54 Initial pulse M8002 FNC 12 H3300 uoco RUN monitor MOV P M8000 CT K50 TO FNC 16 K10 UO G2 K4
227. e reduced e If the input filter value is too small the filter effect is small e Ifthe input filter value is too large the input response is bad Because the input filter a is effective to the target value SV all of the proportional operation integral operation and differential operation are affected Pulse input by noise Actual measured value PV Input amplitude Input amplitude processed by input filter Measured value PV processed by input filter 1 12 F X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters 3 2 4 Proportional gain KP S3 3 5 O 3 Setting range 1 to 32767 3 PID control Proportional operation T During the proportional operation the output MV increases in proportion to the deviation difference 2 between the target value SV and the measured value PV B This deviation is called proportional gain Kp and expressed in the following relational expression Tl TI Output MV Proportional gain KP x Deviation EV 25 2 Sg The reciprocal of the proportional gain KP is called proportional band bS As the proportional gain KP is larger as shown in the example below the motion to let the measured value PV be nearer to the target value SV becomes stronger Example 1 Proportional operation P operation in heating backward operation C a 2 lt foo Target value SV S lt Measur
228. each other Number of I O points i 0 point This number is not related to the maximum I O points of the PLC occupied SWW9 UOWLUOD aVr nexs WU QVv onexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr7 nexa dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav OI CWp NeX4 ae ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 2 FX2N 2AD FX2N 2AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 2ch OV to 5V DC OV to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC 4 Analog input range Input resistance 250Q Input resistance 200 KQ Absolute maximum output 0 5V 15V 2mMA 60mA Offset If the digital value is 0 0V to 1V If the digital value is 0 0mA to 4mA If the digital value is 4000 5V to 10V 23 Gain If the digital value is 4000 20mA Digital output 12 bits binary Resolution 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 4 00nA 16mAx1 4000 3 a Ambient temperature i Aaaa E O O 14 z Se pera 1 0 100mV for 10V full scale 1 0 160uA for 16mA full scale gt 0 to 55 C O Time required for A D 2 5ms x number of selected channels conversion Operation synchronized with sequence program 4095 7 7 4000 e z z Input characteristics 3 e 1 T S Sa D D i A m 0 gt 10V 0 4mA 20mA Analog input Analog input
229. ecceecsseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeesaaeeeees B 42 5 4 18 BFM 99 Clearance of upper lower limit error data and abrupt change detection data B 43 5 4 19 BFM 101 to 104 Minimum peak value BFM 111 to 114 Maximum peak value B 43 5 4 20 BFM 109 Minimum peak value resetting BFM 119 Maximum peak value resetting B 44 5 4 21 BFM 125 Peak value automatic transfer to first data register specification cccc0008 B 44 5 4 22 BFM 126 Upper lower error status data automatic transfer to data register specification B 45 5 4 23 BFM 127 Abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to data register SS CICA OM cacti asst cep sae ed Sa re a a AS B 46 5 4 24 BFM 128 Over scale status data automatic transfer to data register specification B 47 5 4 25 BFM 129 Error status data automatic transfer to data register specification c c00e B 47 5 4 26 BFM 197 Selection of cyclic data update function function for data history 08 B 48 5 4 27 BFM 198 Data history sampling time Setting ccccceeecceceseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeesaaeeees B 48 5 4 28 BFM 199 Data history resetting StOPPaGe ccceccececeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeseeesaaeeees B 49 54 29 BEM 200 10 76999 Data NIStONM c020 ech te ee A B 50 6 Changing Input Characteristics B 51 6 1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics ccccecceeeee
230. ecification Valid if b7 0 to 7999 K210 at delivery Decimal of BFM 22 is set to ON Error status data BFM 29 automatic transfer 129 to data register specification Valid if b8 of BFM 0 to 7999 K211 at delivery Decimal 22 is set to ON 197 Selection of cyclic data update function function 9 40000 Hexadeci for data history mal 198 Data history sampling time setting Unit ms 0 to 30000 K15000 Hexadeci 199 Data history resetting stoppage 3 H0000 A 200 Channel 1 data history initial value KO f Decimal 2 ee a a a 1899 Channel 1 data history 1 700th value pf KO Decimal 1900 Channel 2 data history initial value pF KO f Decimal Oooo o o o 3599 Channel 2 data history 1 700th value pf KO Decimal 3600 Channel 3 data history initial value pF KO f Decimal Oooo o o o 5299 Channel 3 data history 1 700th value pf KO Decimal 5300 Channel 4 data history initial value PF KO f Decimal Oooo o o o 6999 Channel 4 data history 1 700th value pf KO Decimal 1 If power failure occurs the EEPROM will retain its data 2 Use bO to b3 3 Use bO to b3 and b8 to b11 B 27 Q O 3 O T 3 e2 dyr NEX4 aVr nexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa dy d OL OYH NEX4 la MLd OYH NEXH Q id ave nexd TI aav var nexs M ddv ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX
231. eck 6 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status If analog data is not output or if the proper analog value is not output check the following items e Version number of PLC e Wiring e Special devices e Programs e Error status 6 1 PLC Version Number Check e Any versions from Ver 2 20 initial version to the latest version of the FX3U Series are compatible e Check the version number of FX3UC Series The version number should be 1 20 or later For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 6 2 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Power The 4DA ADP needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of the 4DA ADP is on 2 Analog output line Use the 2 core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog output line In addition be sure to separate the analog output line from other power lines or inductive lines For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 6 3 Special Device Check Check whether the special devices for the 4DA ADP are being used correctly 1 Output mode switching Verify that the special device for switching the output mode is correctly set Turn off the device to set the output mode to the voltage output mode Turn on the device to set the output mode to the current output mode 2 Output setting data C
232. ecution of table KO to K32767 KO Decimal from channel 4 89 Output completion flag of table output function aaa H0000 eae 9 1 9 Head device number in data table KO to K32767 K1000 Data table transfer command H0000 Chapter 6 KO Decimal Chapter 6 1300 to 1598 Data table in pattern 5 KO KO Decimal Chapter 6 KO oe 9 1600 to 1898 Data table in pattern 6 1900 to l 9198 Data table in pattern 7 a 2200 to 2498 Data table in pattern 8 a Decimal Chapter 6 Decimal Chapter 6 2500 to 9798 Data table in pattern 9 2800 to l 3098 Data table in pattern 10 ile Specify whether to start or stop the table output function for each channel setting a hex code 0 or 1 in each digit Decimal Chapter 6 Decimal Chapter 6 2 Specify the data table transfer command and the register type setting O or 1 in the last two digits of the hex code D 20 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 Buffer Memory Details z 5 4 1 BFM 0 Output mode specification 2 Initial value at delivery H0000 B Numeric data type Hexadecimal H uy ec Specify the output modes of channel 1 to 4 L 4 hexadecimal digits are assigned to specify the output modes of the 4 channels o gt Change the value of each digit to change the output mode of each channel 0 to 4 and F can be set for each digit C HOOOO z ch
233. ed value PV Remaining deviation gt A a Proportional gain E 5 KP3 gt KP2 gt KP1 D x Time ie UO gt S Proportional gain KP3 gt KP2 gt KP1 Output MV Time Example 2 Proportional operation P operation in cooling forward operation l e Proportional gain KP3 gt KP2 gt KP1 Measured value PV day G eave nexs TI aavvarnexa ITI Temperature Pea ee ee es ee es Se lt Remaining deviation aide valle a Time z Ta Gs z S l S Proportional gain H KP3 gt KP2 gt KP1 5 TI 2 a O gt z gt ae G Time 3 2 5 Integral time TI S3 4 Setting range 0 to 32767 x 100 ms 0 is handled as oo no integration 2g PID operation Integral operation 8 amp 5 During the integral operation the time after deviation is generated until the integral operation output becomes the proportional operation output This is called integral time and is expressed as TI As Tl becomes smaller the integral operation becomes stronger 1 13 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters Example 1 PI operation in heating backward operation TI3 VA N z a a a aa Measured value in PI operation P Se Measured value in proportional operation Target Jf Integral time TI O lt Ti3 lt Ti2 lt TI1 Temperature Time Integral tim
234. eeaeeeeseeeesseeeeseeeesseesesseeeees B 4 1 3 Connectable PLC and Version Numbers ccccccccceececeeeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeseaeeeseeeesseeesseeeesseeeees B 5 1 4 Version Number of Compatible Programming ToOoIsS cccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeesaaes B 6 2 Specifications B 7 2 41 Generne SDECIICANONS narar oo eco e eeSccatie Soe heed eee Sie S ich ier tuntanduen dened umeontiace B 7 2 2 POWE SUDDIY SPCGIIICAHONS Aresia a det naan tee alien a abenavad a a E B 8 2 9 PEROrMan Geo PCCINGALONS zags ae TA T hie ia ease B 8 2 4 Input Mode Characteristics BFM 0 osiin nainen aa Aa aE aE a B 9 3 Wiring B 11 Os ISSEY ONG esti caiecrece Selassie B 12 3 2 Cable and Terminal Tightening TOrqQue ccccsceccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeesaaeeensaees B 13 3 2 1 Power cable FX3UC 4AD cccccccsesscccceeseceeceesseeeceueeceecaueeeessuuseeesseuceeessusesessuaseeessuseeessaaaeeess B 13 Size Cabe EA SU AAD aires eat eee ae ei ee B 13 3 2 3 Cable EX SUC AAD it dented cos ck saben Renda aa a Nea Yas Ca ea ea AeA B 14 3 0 examples OF POWER Supp CCUG sects cada esa adele eae cei Dec eehs Mee crib ce cad Nes certiceatos B 15 C321 FEA SUAD sx eae eee ad Se en i ee eee ne ee ea er B 15 392 FA UCAAD ames ae ee eee em eee RC oe REM een nee Pen ee erry See eee ene B 16 3 3 3 Cautions regarding connection Of power CableS cccceeccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeesaaeeeee
235. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesseeeeesaeeeeeas B 51 7 Examples of Practical Programs B 54 7 1 Program That Uses Averaging TMC score lek the cet lent ine othe peach lnereineaetieeventaic B 54 7 2 Program That Uses Convenient FUNCTIONS ccccccccccceeeeeceseeecceeeecceeeecseseessageeessageeessaaess B 55 7 3 Program That Uses Data History FUNCTION ccccccccccceececeeeeeceeeeeceeeeceaeeeseseeseaeeeseeeesseeeeseas B 57 7 4 Initialization Program for 4AD Factory Default cccecccccsseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeseeeseeseeeseaeeessaaeees B 59 8 Troubleshooting B 60 8 1 PEC Version Number Chek sci titetadeediders Sicttanedsnudatediateusdeisn duahedlwibeeedcuaaundavenieGeat Ueadiataenwees B 60 9 2 WINE ONEC orriren E O aes ne pean a aiacne pesen teases caenteocuamseseteewanenteense B 60 8 9 Program ONCOR ctsasten na lace ssachea sanctions E E E Sencamasenauaeaans N B 60 SA EMO otaluis CMEC Korsas RE A B 61 8 5 4AD Initialization and Test PrOGrann sisgc2sxed2cs2schescacsidescoesbinsebevslasiiecs Mseotkeetdas ht Otieeceeee B 62 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents FX3u 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 1 Outline C 3 AA OUTING Ob RUNG OMS tei cia a tc Phe bach ad se td tararee a tat tdatur nmi yat at utdaarene ieee cranes C 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation cccceccccceccccececceeeeceeceeseeceseeeeeseeeesseesseeeetsneeees C 4 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Ve
236. eeeeseeceseeeeeseeeessaeeseaeesseeeseneessaaeees H 16 AA Selecion ol TYPEK Or J rniga a E EE H 17 4 5 Temperature MEASUre MeN ics cassist ecet sci bop cbdateslecd sie chee asad eeelecain gaa leineeedeind sodetuedeentdadawlaiaadats H 17 AO FAV STAGING TIMOS aa a a a a E O H 18 A EROR a aaa a a E ee H 19 AO MOGE C OOO pene tenes A S TA ee ee eee eee H 21 4 9 Basie Programi EXAM Eson ae a e a Gaeta ee aea H 21 5 Troubleshooting H 22 5 1 PLC Version Number Check cccccccsscccesceceeeceuceceeececeseecsaceseueesueeseueesecsaeesaueesueesseeesaeesanas H 22 S2 WAI GNOCK aerate a N E ETETE A E A ER H 22 9 39 Special Device Check rrou E E e e a E Ee E EER H 22 S4 Program CHECK orrera a E A a S H 23 S9 Enor SLES CECE aa a a lesihe hslnaehaie as taaateSAstethals bhatt cdseanetatomedat ches H 23 13 14 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents PID Instruction FNC 88 1 Outline l 3 AA UTIME or MUNG HOM sa hc ceccactatsh ced etaorhies cutdue rare aaad stot datae mutant at aad ar ewe leadstatdeur ames sot l 3 1 2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction ReferencCe ccccceceesseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeeesaees l 4 2 How to Use PID Instruction l 5 2 1 Explanation of function and operation cccccsecccceecccseececeeeeceececeeeceseecesseeeeseeeesseeeseeeeseeeessneeeess l 5 2 2 Relationship Between Parameter Setting and AUtO TUNING c cccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeneese
237. eeenes l 6 3 Parameter l 7 3 1 Parameter List S3 10 S9 T20 ranea E E eeeeedad ae eee l 7 92 Derails OL aramee Secara rn ne ene ele ee l 9 32 1 Samping MIME TS OO ana a e a ceased l 9 3 22 Operation SeuingQtAGT 50 hosen E OEA l 10 3 2 3 suit iilter a SS 2ra e E E N EA l 12 3 2 4 Proportional gain KP SS 9s a hire A I 13 3 2 0 Mmtegral time ATN S9 F cack sss isa E a a tie elas e sauna tase sa dacomcadalds I 13 3 2 0 Differential gain KD SS 40 2 2 es et ee A aa I 15 3 2 7 Differential time TD S3 6 cc ccccccceeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeesaaeeeeeeseeseeessaeeeeeesaeeeeesseeeeeeeas I 15 3 2 0 Alarm output lag x So F 2A sens Se ch tate a eee cae Mees doen evea bil ideale oasle l 17 4 Auto Tuning l 18 TI METI Cy CIE AVEC TINO Gli recane E cede I 18 4 1 1 Parameters set in auto tuning of limit Cycle method eee ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesseaeeeeeas I 18 4 12 AUC LUMI Procedure niaaa E E EE I 19 4 1 3 Reference How to obtain three constants in PID control limit cycle method 0cccce I 20 4 2 Step Response Method ceitean a E l 21 4 2 1 Parameters to be set by auto tuning step response method ccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas l 21 A 2 AVONIN PrOCGOUICsisanauire wince E E I 21 4 2 3 Reference How to obtain three constants in PID control step response method 05 22 4 3 Cautions on Auto TUNING EX CUTION
238. el 2 BE RST D8268 6 l RST D8268 7 M8002 Error status of 1st analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error Error status of 1st analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error Sets the temperature unit to centigrade C M8001 M8002 Sets the averaging time to 1 for channel 1 data Sets the averaging time to 5 for channel 2 data Stores the current value of the channel 1 temperature measurement data in the D100 Stores the average value of the channel 2 temperature measurement data in the D101 M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D100 MOV FNC 12 Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101 data register D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction F 20 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 1 PLC Version Number Check 5 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status If the temperature measurement data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the following items e Version number of the PLC e Wiring e Special devices e Programs e Error status 5 1 PLC Version Number Check e Any versions from Ver 2 20 initial version to the latest version of the FX3U Series are compatible e Check the version number of the FX3Uc Series The
239. eli sek terion eE TETEE hoc caeaste wa tea nec tars ave sesnacaeen ea ctecenean scesuaee G 22 DO ENOL Olas GMC CK nsr a a a eines asda aewsd eos aiaeeaaeaed ee ade G 22 12 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents F X3u 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 1 Outline H 3 AA OUTS Oli UNC OMS gti es recaishe te catalan te heh teint cet a ak sc ateetareret nck tatdtur eee vat at ataetarene ieee erat eand H 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ccccccccccsscccceceesseeececeeseeeeseeeeeseeeessaeeeseeeesseeeees H 4 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number ccccccseseecceeeeeeceeseeeceeueeesseeeessaesesseeseessegeesees H 5 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ccceccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeeas H 5 2 Specifications H 6 ZA Geneng SOCGCIICALIONS oct cctetanacotatetucebetibe secede tvesenbs atone taseten ms ooationetacetnsedeatee nedeerd saalondessSosctwieaans H 6 2 2 POWEF SUDPIY SPSCIICALONNS serina a a ceilede Uecns Meda teed re ve dseahea dds H 6 2 5 P rormance Specifications saana seant iat ine Giatisdeed dad a a at H 7 2 4 ALD CONVErSION WIM Gx 5 2c 05s0 2c sssocancosaue nos E A ueai suas ssessagaursoaetee H 8 2 5 Temperature MEaSUureme n cccccccsseecceeecencecseeceueceueecaeecaueecueeaeessueesaeesaueesaeessueeseeeseneensaeess H 8 3 Wiring H 9 ro alae Fermina bEayo 0 Geter eaemrate ee seein A
240. eloped the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 4 Procedures for executing table output function 4 Cautions regarding table output e When BFM 99 data table transfer command is not HOOOO the table output function cannot be started e When an error occurs during transfer of data table start the table output after setting the correct data table e While the table output completion flag BFM 89 is ON output of a new table cannot be started e The table output function is valid only while the PLC is in RUN mode e While even a single channel is outputting data table BFM 80 is not H0000 it is prohibited to change BFM 0 5 9 to 17 19 20 32 to 35 38 41 to 48 50 to 54 and 60 to 63 e The pattern can be changed during output as shown below The change is invalid while the table output completion flag BFM 89 is ON Output value Pattern 5 SS m A ATON all x bu a Pattern 1 ge t I I I _ eo ignored and data is output at point 1 in output pattern 5 Time Table output start Change from output pattern 1 to output pattern 5 5 Check the table output completion flag BFM 89 initial value H0000 The value in BFM 89 indicates whether the table output from each channel has been completed After data is
241. ely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems TI dav var nexs M Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions 2 Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 gt Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem gt Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires 5 Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed ddv OL AVP NEXA T uononysu did 88 ONS H 9 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of the TC ADP are arranged as follows Signal Application a O i External power 3l O 2 Ol Ground terminal eo Off Unused e oll Do not connect any lines OJ J type Switches the type between OLJ J type
242. er s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 2 2 2 Special function block 2 Description of Analog Products 2 2 List of Analog Product Models No of Voltage current input Voltage 0 32mV 10V to 10V DC with sign 16 bits 4AD 4ch ee Current 1 25uA 20mA to 20mA DC __ with sign 15 bits Voltage 0 32mV 10V to 10V DC with sign 16 bits 4AD 2 4ch FANA Current 1 25uA 20mA to 20mA DC with sign 15 bits Voltage 0 32mV 10V to 10V DC with sign 16 bits 4AD 2 4ch Pa Current 1 25uA 20mA to 20mA DC with sign 15 bits Voltage 0 63mV 10V to 10V DC with sign 15 bits 8AD 8ch PAROA Current 2 5uA 20mA to 20mA DC with sign 14 bits Voltage 5mV 10V to 10V DC with sign 12 bits 4AD 4ch Pena Current 10uA 20mA to 20mA DC with sign 11 bits Voltage 2 5mV OV to 10V DC 12bits FX2N 2AD 1 2 Current 4uA 4mA to 20mA DC 12bits Voltage current output Voltage 0 32mV 10V to 10V DC with sign 16 bits FX3U 4DA 4ch e gt Current 0 634 A OmA to 20mA DC 15bits Voltage 5mV Ach 10V to 10V DC with sign 12 bits C TA A Current 20uA OmA to 20mA DC 10bits Voltage 5 mV 10V to 10V DC with sign 12 bits FX2N 4DA 1 4ch Current 20uA OmA to 20mA DC 10bits Voltage 2 5 mV OV to 10V DC 12 bits FX2N 2DA 1 2ch Current 4uA 4mA to 20mA DC 12bits Combined use of voltage and current inputs is possib
243. erature 5 0 to 55 C 1 0 100mV for 10V full scale 1 0 160uA for 16mA full scale If the external load resistance Rs is less than 5kQ the load will be increased as shown in the Reference following formula Increase 100 mV per 1 5 47x100 f Reay VON Time required for D A conversion Overall accuracy 200us Data updated every scan time Output characteristics N Analog output S gt Q O O 2 a lt iN gt 0 4000 0 4000 Digital input Digital input e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC Insulation method e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs e Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points 0 point This number is not related to the maximum I O points of the PLC occupied A 22 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 2 Analog Output 4 2 2 FX2N 2DA O 5 S FX2N 2DA aj Specifications 3 Voltage output Current output Number of output points 2ch B Analog output range ao oe SS Utpu EC External load 2k to 1M9 External load 4009 or less RS e If the digital value is 0 If the digital value is 0 Offset OV to 1V 4mA Cant 2 If the digital value is 4000 If the digital value is 4000 C an 5V to 10V 20mA z Digital output 12 bits binary 1 gt
244. ero coined mE analog special adapters ome sl i FX3U FX3uc Series PLC n n Se A ee ace To check the connectable 13H SIH 13H PLC model number refer to B 1 6 i Section 1 3 4th 3rd 2nd 1st geal adapter adapter adapter adapter ae For a detailed description of Analog data wiring refer to Chapter 3 Thermocouple temperature sensor type K or J Transfer direction Special devices For a PE description of special devices Temperature measurement e 1st adapter M D8260 to M D8269 refer to Chapter 4 Setting of temperature unit 2nd adapter M D8270 to M D8279 a e ofa Switching of types between S 3rd adapter M D8280 to M D8289 rater to Section ao type K and type J Setting of averaging time Ath adapter M D8290 to M D8299 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system 1 The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3uc D DSS PLC aVv onexs avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr7 nexa dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI gt O ddv 88 ONS M1d QVt NEXS4 OL OVP NEXA UONONISU Cid FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Dat
245. error status automatic transfer function setting e Ifa data is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify the same data register var NeX4 e This function is valid by turning on bO of the status automatic transfer function setting BFM 60 e When a value out of the above setting range is set b9 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on e The data set in BFM 61 will be retained in the EEPROM 3 Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 5 10 to 17 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3u 4DA Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 Therefore when creating a program do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories BFM TI dav var nexs M O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld dVv nexs dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS D 35 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 20 BFM 62 Upper lower limit function status data automatic transfer to data register specification D 36 Setting range 0 to 7999 Initial value K201 Numeric data type Decimal K Use this function to automatically transfer the upper lower limit function status data BFM 39 to the data register specified in BFM 62 On
246. es BFM FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 4 BFM 6 Output status 9 3 3 Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H 3 The output status information of channel 1 to 4 is stored B gt lt gt a HOOOO a So ch4e Licht ch3 ch2 Value status HEX Description 3 0 Output updating is stopped J 1 Under output updating gt g The output conditions conform to the output setting upon PLC stop BFM 5 1 Cautions regarding use of output status e The output status setting is valid only if the PLC is running When the PLC is stopped H0000 is automatically written e When the setting in any of the following buffer memory areas is changed output updating is stopped H0000 is automatically written in BFM 6 Vdar nexas BFM 0 Output mode setting BFM 5 Output setting upon PLC stop BFM 9 Offset gain setting value write command BFM 19 Setting change prohibition BFM 20 Initialization function TI dav var nexs M BFM 32 to 35 Data to be output from each channel upon PLC stop v BFM 50 Corrective function setting by load resistance iS BFM 51 to 54 Load resistance for each channel gt J BFM 60 Status automatic transfer function Setting O BFM 61 Error status data automatic transfer to data register specification BFM 62 Upper lower limit fu
247. es PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 8 BFM 22 Convenient function setting Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Q O 3 O T 3 e2 Turn on each bit bO to b8 of BFM 22 to enable the function assigned to each bit refer to the following table Turn off each bit to disable the function of each bit TI TI 2L X lt 1 Function assigned to each bit of BFM 22 SE A gt The channel data BFM 10 to 13 peak data BFM 101 to 104 111 to 114 and data history BFM 200 to 6999 will C be subject to change the addition data BFM 61 to 64 will be Subseciion bO Data addition function added to the measurement data 5415 x When setting the lower limit error data BFM 71 to 74 or the Bi T upper limit error data BFM 81 to 84 add the addition data 5 BFM 61 to 64 to the error data to be set 5 g If the A D conversion data of a channel is outside the range set b1 Upper lower limit by the lower limit error data BFM 71 to 74 and the upper limit Subsection D detection function error data BFM 81 to 84 the result will be written to BFM 5 4 16 a 26 as the upper lower limit error status data a When channel data BFM 10 to 13 is updated if the z difference between the previous value and the new value is Abrupt change l l Subsection b2 jeiecionduncidn larger than the set abrupt change detection value value set in 5417
248. es PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment Terminate the cable end as shown below To connect the platinum resistance thermometer sensor use the cable supplied with the Pt100 platinum resistance thermometer or a twisted pair shielded cable 1 Cables Applicable cable and tightening torque Wire size Tightening TENAGA stranded single wire torque Sinale wi 0 3mm to 0 5mm e To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable A sas AWG22 to 20 and then twist the core before connection 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 e To connect a single wire cable just strip the cover off the cable before connection 0 22 Nem to e Rod terminal with insulation sleeve 2 2 S 0 3mm to 0 5mm 0 25 Nem recommended terminal os AWG22 to 20 l AI 0 5 8WH Manufactured by Phoenix Contact with Refer to the rod terminal Caulking tool insulation _ external view shown in CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact sleeve the following figure or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact 2 Termination of cable ends To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve e To directly terminate the end of a stranded single
249. esolution 2 5mV 10V 4000 10uA 16mA 1600 0 5 50mV for 10V full scale e 0 5 80uA for 16mA full scale when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C Item Vdr nexs w dadY dYr N X4 Total accuracy 1 0 100mV for 10V full scale e 1 0 160uA for 16mA full scale when ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C when ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C A D conversion 200 us The data will be updated at every scan time time For a detailed description of data update refer to Section 2 4 dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT Input 5 characteristics a S x gt Oo O A w E D 1 U a 5 E 0 gt 10V 10 2V 0 4mA gt 20mA 20 4mA Analog input Analog input H m e The photo coupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC a insulation melnod aia converter is used to insulate the driving power supply line from the analog input T e Channels are not insulated from each other O SUDET or a 0 point This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC I points occupied O2 5S E C 7 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 4 A D Conversion Time This section describes the A D conversion time 1 A D conversion and special data register update timing A D conversion is performed at e
250. esseeeeseaeeeesaneees A 11 3 2 2 Connection of special function DIOCKS ariarian ected cow a accident ae ae ENEE eiaa A 13 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications A 15 7M Mey A 80 aa eee eee porn ane eee ecient ee ne nn ees eee oer eee ee eee ee eee ee A 15 ed Bias IR oo B72 BD ete Se ie ee ere ee ee eee ate er eee A 15 BN 2 uP KONE LAD n a aa tine aa Su ied oxen a a auntie A 16 A I Pad 2 2 LR CO CD CO Re oe eae ee eee A 17 Be RON AAD cree ate carer cheese va ceban et sagen te e ode E NE tienes eked siente ieee a eee A 18 BNE OAD se ace ace cheats a metas oee enacaaena means A a eee tea eecam ets A 19 ARV SO DING A Pe ie ae oes eel ea ey a eae a ence aie A 20 AT PN Et ean eee ee ee ee ne nr en eS ee ee eer ene eee eee re eee A 21 42 Analog OUDIT 2 oxjicaznciiepseate Siac Oust eagle Cae aca Lge aed TE REAREA A 22 42T EXCUADAGADP aes ihe ee ea ee ee eal ae A 22 A22 OND a rset seen aceite Ace tah Sea wegasen a ceecs ae EE cee ha aeeauaueht eee sant Aaa ac ean iea tne ce sd a A 23 AAS FAS WAD A eee a tere nee ere ee eer A 24 OF EO Nee ca decals chia he ect E a cerned ape ce etter Nat delete sh ales deena O dees A 25 AZO PRONG ADA ont ea ie en sh ee a ee a A 26 4 37 Mixed Analog INU OUIDUT earen ent ae endothe tele aactearaae a tlm tete A 27 A OV EONS DA osc cas esac cee aaa dates a a a Te aeea ate ae aia eaei A 27 O25 2 FAON A ee ee cess ee A 29 AA Temperature Sensor INP Ub eyelets Acts ce ae reheat el itn eh aettla els eat te A 30 4 4 1 FX3U
251. eter ACT CS3 1 B 2 Select the auto tuning method limit cycle method T Set the auto tuning method to ON bit 6 in the operation setting parameter ACT CS3 1 ne gt When bit 6 is set to OFF the step response method is selected j 3 Set the auto tuning execution flag to ON C Set the auto tuning execution flag to ON bit 4 in the operation setting parameter ACT CS3 1 3 gt gJ 4 Set the input filter 2 s Set the input filter in the operation setting parameter ACT CS3 2 D 5 Set the sampling time 3 Set the sampling time S2 z 6 Set the Upper Limit Value ULV Set the Upper Limit Value ULV of the output value MV in the operation setting parameter ACT 26 r Set the Lower Limit Value LLV Set the Lower Limit Value LLV of the output value MV in the operation setting parameter ACT Sa 27 8 Set the threshold hysteresis SHPv Set the threshold hysteresis width SHPv in the operation setting parameter ACT CS3 25 dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT 9 Set the target value SV Set the target value SV to in PID instruction z gt J 1 0 Set the ON PID instruction command input to start auto tuning 6 3 G Auto tuning is executed according to the measured value PV H M When auto tuning is completed the auto tuning flag bit 4 and bit 6 turns OFF in the operation set a ting parameter ACT CS3 1 gt T G l 19 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition
252. etting error b11 of BFM 29 will occur L e If one of the channels uses the digital filter the A D conversion time will be set to 5 ms for all the channels 2 gt lt e Ifthe averaging time is out of the setting range the averaging time setting error b10 of BFM 29 will occur 5 e Ifthe averaging time is set the data history function cannot be used 5O U Ea B 29 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 3 BFM 6 to 9 Digital filter setting Setting range 0 to 1600 Initial value KO Numeric data type Decimal K To use the digital filter for channel data BFM 10 to 13 for channels 1 to 4 set the digital filter value in the corresponding buffer memory BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 For a detailed description of channel data update timing refer to Subsection 5 4 4 If the digital filter function is used the relation between the analog input value and the set digital filter value or the digital output value channel data will be as follows e Digital filter value BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 gt Fluctuation of analog signal fluctuation width less than 10 times of sampling If the fluctuation of the analog signal input value is less than the set digital filter value the analog input value will be converted into a stabilized digital output value and stored in
253. exs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 5 FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 4AD TC Specifications Number of input points 4ch Thermocouple type K or J nput Signal JIS C 1602 1995 e Type K 100 C to 1200 C e Type K 148 F to 2192 F Rated temperature range as 3 Type J 100 C to 600 C e Type J 148 F to 1112 F oe e Type K 1000 to 12000 e Type K 1480 to 21920 Agta roupa Type J 1000 to 6000 Type J 1480 to 11120 e Type K 0 4 C e Type K 0 72 F meso AON Type J 0 3 C Type J 0 54 F Overall accuracy 0 5 for full scale 1 C Time required for conversion 240ms 2 x number of selected channels Input characteristics O 4 1112 F 2192 F Type J Type K 1480 gt Temperature Temperature 600 C 1200 C Type J Type K e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs e Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC A 34 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 4 6 FX2N 8AD 4 Comparison of Performance
254. f EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 Therefore when creating a program do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories BFM L L AYt NEX4 ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS D 29 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 13 BFM 38 Upper lower limit function setting Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H When any of the output data BFM 1 to 4 becomes less than the lower limit BMF 41 to 44 or more than the upper limit BFM 45 to 48 the relevant bit of the upper lower limit function status BFM 39 is turned on The upper lower limit function can be set valid or made invalid by writing a 4 digit hexadecimal number HOOOO in BFM 38 HOOOO mse Hon Set value Description 0 The upper lower limit function is invalid 1 The upper lower limit function without output limitation is valid 2 The upper lower limit function with output limitation is valid 2 Other than above vaes Invalid setting values unchanged 1 When any value becomes less than the lower limit BMF 41 to 44 or more than the upper limit BFM 45 to 48 the relevant bit of the upper lower limit function status is turned on The value is output even if it exceeds Lower limit p e The value is output even if it is below the lower limit 2 When any value becomes less than the lower limit
255. f GX Developer select FX3UC for the PLC type H 5 QVr onexs avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa TI dav var nexs M dy ld QYY NE X4 O gt O ddv 88 ONS M1d QVt NEXS4 OL AVP NEXA UONONISU id FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for the TC ADP 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Compliant with EN 68 2 6 Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz mm Tested 10 times in Vibration resistance DIN Rail Mounting 10 57 0 035 each direction X Y 10 to 57 0 075 Total 80 min each Direct Mounting Compliant with EN 68 2 27 Shock resistance 147 m s2 Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Using noise simulator of Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Ambient temperature Noise resistance Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min voltage Between batch of all terminals and ground terminal 5MQ or more using 500V DC Compliant with JEM 1021 Insulation resistance i
256. f Parameters 3 2 2 Operation setting ACT S3 1 Setting range OFF forward operation ON backward operation 1 Forward operation or backward operation 1 bit 0 Select the PID control direction forward or backward e During auto tuning for the limit cycle method It is necessary to set the PID control direction forward or backward for auto tuning e During auto tuning for the step response method The PID control direction forward or backward is not required as the direction is automatically set when auto tuning is complete Forward operation 1 bit0 0 As the measured value PV becomes larger than the target value SV the output MV increases For example cooling is a forward operation lt Cooling gt Measured value PV Temperature Target value SV Time Backward operation 1 bit 0 1 As the measured value PV becomes smaller than the target value SV the output MV increases For example heating is a backward operation lt Heating gt Target value SV Measured value PV Temperature Time Relationship between the forward backward operation and the output MV measured value PV and target value SV The relationship is as follows Target value SV Output MV Forward operation Backward operation Measured value PV 1 10 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instru
257. f any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION F 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 1 Outline of Functions OO 1 Outline This chapter describes the outline of FX3u 4AD PT ADP referred to as PT ADP 1 1 Outline of Functions The FX3U 4AD PT ADP is an analog special adapter Connect the FX3u 4AD PT ADP to the FX3U FX3UC Series PLC to read the temperature data from the 4 channel platinum resistance thermometers 1 Up to 4 PT ADP units can be connected to the PLC including other analog special adapters 2 After connection of the platinum resistance thermometer Pt100 measurement of temperature will be possible 3 The temperature measurement data will be automatically written to the special data registers of the FX3uU FX3uUC Series PLC 4 adapters maximum including other Number of connectable analog special adapters l units FX3u FX3uc Series PLC To check the connectable Gees PLC model number refer to Section 1 3
258. f channel 1 R W M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 RW Section Special 7 43 aay M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the input mode of channel 3 RW relay M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 Switches the input mode of channel 4 RW Basen M8274 to M8284 to M8294 to penance l M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel 1 input data Le Eea D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel 2 input data eg Section pa263 bears D8283 D8203 Chame inputa R D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 Setting R W range 1 to 4095 Special D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 Setting RIW data range 1 to 4095 Section i ing ti i 4 5 register D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Everlong time for channel 3 Setting R W range 1 to 4095 D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel 4 Setting R W range 1 to 4095 D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code 1 Ts pra 4 3 Switching of Input Mode avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt gt lt oO 2 gt gt Vdr nexs w dadY dYr N X4 Turn the special auxiliary relay on off to switch the input mode of 4AD ADP between the current input mode and the voltage input mode To switch the input mode use the following special auxiliary relays day G eave nexs TI aavvarnexa ITI Special auxiliary relay T x escription M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 E M
259. fer time Scan time x _ x number of FX3u 4DA units connected to main unit 64 Fractions omitted Example e Scan time 50 ms including increase in scan time caused by data table transfer e Number of data table items to be transferred 2991 items when the number of patterns is 10 and the number of points in each pattern is 99 e Number of units connected to FX3uU 4DA 8 units 2991 Transfer time 50 ms x x 8 units 64 18800 ms D 47 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt QVv ONnexs ddgv dvr nexa Vdar nexas dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 4 Procedures for executing table output function 6 4 Procedures for executing table output function D 48 After setting the output patterns for the channels BFM 81 to 84 and the number outputs for the channels BFM 85 to 88 turn on the table output function start stop command BFM 80 to execute the table output function Set the output patterns for the channels BFM 81 to 84 initial value K1 Set the output patterns for the channels in BFM 81 to 84 The output pattern can be changed in the middle of outputting the table Setting range for BFM 81 to 84 1 to 10 When a value out of the sett
260. fer to Subsection 5 4 1 B 19 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Input FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 4 1 Analog Input Procedures 3 Creation of sequence program Create the program as follows to read analog signals e While referring to step 2 set the input mode H e While referring to step 1 set the unit number in L Input mode step 2 Unit number step 1 RUN monitor FNC 12 kek H UL NG vovg 77 voeo M8000 eG KO y FNC 15 LK G1 K4 Initial pulse M8002 Specify the input mode BFM 0 for channels 1 to 4 5 seconds after starting the PLC the digital values of channels 1 to 4 BFM 10 to 13 will be read out to DO to D3 Unit number step 1 4 Sequence program transfer and data register check 1 Transfer the sequence program and start the PLC 2 The 4AD analog data input mode will be stored in data registers DO to D3 of the PLC 3 Check that the data is stored in DO to D3 If the data is not properly stored refer to Chapter 8 Troubleshooting B 20 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input ee 5 Buffer Memory BFM This chapter describes the buffer memory incorporated in 4AD 5 1 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory 1 Assignment of unit numbers Un
261. fied The head device number BFM 98 in the data table to be K21 K98 transferred is out of the setting range K22 The value indicated by bO to b3 of the transfer command K99 BFM 99 is not 0 or 1 K23 The value indicated by b4 to b7 of the source register K99 type in BFM 99 is not 0 or 1 Any of the output patterns BFM 81 to 84 does not meet K31 the following requirement One of K81 to K84 1 lt Output pattern lt 10 The output update time unit in the data table that is held Number of BFM where the output update K162 i in the buffer memory is not 0 1 2 or 3 time unit is specified K171 The interpolation method in the data table that is held in Device number where the interpolation the PLC is not 0 1 or 2 method is specified The number of table outputs in BFM 85 to 88 does not K32 meet the following requirement One of K85 to K88 O lt Number of repetitions of output lt 32767 K33 The bit corresponding to each channel in the table output K80 start stop command in BFM 80 is not 0 or 1 D 50 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 5 Details of table output error 2 Cautions regarding table output errors Errors in data table When the data table in the PLC contains an error the error can be detected during transfer of the data to the buffer memory in FX3uU 4DA In this case the error code BFM 90 is K1L 1 and the device number i
262. for 232BD 422BD 485BD and USBBD 232BD FX3U 232 BD FX2N 232 BD FX1N 232 BD 422BD FX3U 422 BD FX2N 422 BD FX1N 422 BD 485BD FX3U 485 BD FX2N 485 BD FX1N 485 BD USBBD FX3U USB BD Special adapter connection expansion board CNVBD FX3U CNV BD FX2N CNV BD FX1N CNV BD Special adapter Expansion board Generic name for CNVBD Generic name for High speed input output special adapter Special adapter communication special adapter and Analog special adapter dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI High speed input output special adapter Generic name for High speed input output special adapter z G 2HSY ADP FX3U 2HSY ADP E 4HSX ADP FX3U 4HSX ADP g U Communication special adapter Generic name for communication special adapter 232ADP FX3U 232ADP MB FX2NC 232ADP FXoN 232ADP FX 232ADP L FX3U 485ADP MB FX2NC 485ADP FXon 485ADP FX 485ADP v Analog special adapter Generic name for analog special adapter z FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 8 FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 2 5S FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual Common Items 5 2 Description of Related Manuals 3 Extension unit Abbreviation generic name Description Voltage current input Generic name for the FX2N Series extension unit FX2NC Series extension unit and FXON Series extension unit Extension unit The number of connectable units however depends on the type of the main unit To check
263. from the main unit and written set in the 4AD buffer memory To read write data from to the 4AD buffer memory the buffer memory can be directly specified using the FROM TO instruction or an applied instruction Using this function sequence programs can be easily created Main unit AAD e BFM direct AAD specification e TO instruction e BFM direct e BFM direct specification specification Sequence aS e FROM instruction program fe a e BFM direct specification e FROM A D A D instruction conversion conversion Analog data Analog data Flowmeter pressure sensor etc 1 Since buffer memory direct specification UL GLI can directly specify the buffer memory in the source or destination area of an applied instruction programs can be created efficiently gt For a detailed description of buffer memory reading writing refer to Section 5 2 For a detailed description of the buffer memory refer to Section 5 4 B 22 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method To read or write to the 4AD buffer memory use the FROM TO instructions or buffer memory direct specification However to use buffer memory direct specification software compatible with FX3U FX3UC Series PLCs is required Q O 3 O T 3 e2 For a det
264. fset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 4mA lt Gain Offset lt 32mA A 18 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 5 FX3uc 4AD 9 3 3 FX3UC 4AD Specifications g Number of input points 4ch B 10V to 10V DC 20mA to 20mA DC ce Analog input range l 4mA to 20mA DC BE Input resistance 200 KQ Input resistance 250 9 ce TN AD Offset 10V to 9V 1 2 20mA to 17mA 1 3 Gain 9V to 10V 14 17mA to 30mA 13 C Digital output With sign 16 bits binary With sign 15 bits binary 3 Seaton 0 32mV 20Vx1 64000 1 25uA 40mAx1 32000 esolution 2 5mV 20Vx1 8000 5 00uA 40mAx1 8000 T gJ gt U O Ambient temperature 0 5 200uA for 40mA full scale 09 0 5 2540C eae mN tOr ey yee Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input D S U 2s Ambient temperature 1 0 400uA for 40mA full scale 3 0 to 55 C UO ee NORE SUSE Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input z Time required for A D 5 VOEO 500us x number of selected channels WVhen the input mode is set to 0 WVhen the input mode is set to 6 7 16320 16000 7 3 T x oY IQ v 20mA 0 hat F P 20mA Ei 2 ee oO G Input characteristics an Z 16000 gt edocs 16320 y WVhen the input mode is set to 3 U 16400 G 16000 7 le IE z IN oo 1 1 T 1 IN e 1 gt
265. g value write command e While changing the setting the output is stopped and HOO00 is automatically written in the output status BFM 6 At the completion of writing the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and output will be restarted e Ifthe analog value specification mode mode 1 or 4 is used the offset gain cannot be changed When other output mode has been set it is possible to change to same characteristics as those in the output mode 1 or 4 e Ifthe write command is not executed the offset and gain data will not be stored in the EEPROM e When b1 of the error status BFM 29 is set to ON the offset and gain data will not be stored in the EEPROM For a detailed description of offset and gain setting refer to Subsection 5 4 6 D 24 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 6 BFM 10 to 13 Offset data BFM 14 to 17 Gain data O 3 3 Setting range See below Initial value See below 3 Numeric data type Decimal K If the output mode is specified in BFM 0 the initial value of the offset data and gain data of each channel will B be automatically stored AA The initial offset data and the gain data are set for each mode as shown in the following table VA e Offset data Analog output value when the output data in BFM 1 to 4 are 0 reference offset value 5 e Gain data Analog out
266. gain KP Integral time TI x100ms Differential time TD x10ms Only proportional 1_ Output value control P operation RL MV PI control 2a 2 x Output value PI operation MV PID control x Output value 50 L PID operation MV 4 3 Cautions on Auto Tuning Execution 1 Countermeasures with in the program when the input value PV does not change When the input value PV does not change normally due to factors such as wire breakage in an analog input line auto tuning is not finished Detect and avoid such occurrences by introducing a sequence to monitor the input value or the elapsed time from the start of auto tuning 1 22 F X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method PID Instruction FNC 88 5 1 Example System and operation 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method The following is an example of a program for the operation application system shown below 5 1 Example System and operation avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs System configuration Temperature sensor Shielded compensating Thermocouple conductor ey Temperature chamber Vdr nexs UO ddagv dvr nexa Electric heater X010 Auto tuning command 1 Since turning on off is frequently carried out be sure to use the X011 PID control command transistor outputs Kam During auto During PID tuning control T
267. geeeneeen T g Supplied separately x njipret T mre amp For sequence programs z eProgramming manual Supplied separately Analog products Depending on the product type the Installation Manual or the User s Manual is supplied with the product For a detailed description refer to the separate manual User s Manual Analog Control Edition as described below day G eave nexs TI aavvarnexa ITI For installation and parts identification a eInstallation Manual Supplied Pgh For a detailed description of the programming method refer to the sl o E separate manual jz oE For installation parts identification use and examples of programs User s Manual Supplied SB T Necessary information is in the user s manual but for a detailed description lap a refer to the separate manual T gt U E L Analog control a 2 Voltage input Current input Voltage output Current output Temperature input gJ gt H For use of each analog control product gO LGR eUser s Manual Analog Control Edition Supplied separately l For each analog product use this manual for details on wiring setup details example U programs and troubleshooting methods z aS A 37 FX3U FX3UC Serie
268. gs D 38 6 2 Preparation Ol Cala ADC nies ose inanecsanetenausbsdscueeteasancntadcantetiaganas aaene youn cen gaanctnasinstunaninehoateticats D 39 6 3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory ccccseeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeeeeaeeeeeenees D 44 6 4 Procedures for executing table output FUNCTION cc eeccceccneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeesaaneeeeeeaas D 48 6 5 Detalls of table OULDUTM Err O iacta nue xaeusuzlbucoareiaees cdl e bed ae aa Cban eE D 50 6 6 Examples uses of table output function ec cccccceececceeeeceeeeeceeeeseeeeeseaeesseeeeseaeesseeeessaeeeags D 52 7 Changing Output Characteristic D 53 7 1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics ccccccceccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeesaaneeees D 53 8 Examples of Practical Programs D 56 8 1 Example of Program for Analog Output Operation Regular Operation cccccesseeeeeeeeeees D 56 8 2 Example of Program using Useful FUNCTIONS cccccccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeesaeeeesaueeeeeeesaeeeeaeneesaes D 57 8 3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation Pattern Output Operation D 59 8 4 Program to Initialize FX3U 4DA Factory Default ccccceccceccseseeeseeeeeeseeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeees D 61 9 Troubleshooting D 62 9 1 PLG Version Number CheCK nerenin a i a an G D 62 SARA TIn e Eg E EA EEE EA EA EE I AA EA A EE EET D 62 23 Prodan GING merina O D 62 O 4 Eror Status CMOCK scenarier
269. gt v O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld GVv nexs dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data 4 Programming 4 1 This chapter describes how to create programs that can read analog data using the PT ADP Loading of A D Conversion Data F 14 1 The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX3U FX3uUC Series PLC 2 If data is stored in the special devices the averaging time can be set and the input mode can be specified 3 Special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest to the main unit For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Section 4 2 Communi High speed cation input output FX3U 4AD FX3U 4AD FX3uU 4AD special FX3uU 4AD special PT ADP PT ADP PT ADP adapter PT ADP adapter FX3u EX3uc Series PLC 1st Special devices Special auxiliary relays M8260 to M8269 AID O re Special data registers D8260 to D8269 Special auxiliary 3 e M8270 to M8279 A D Stl lt t ld Special data registers tlt JF Special auxiliary relays Sequence program A D M8280 to M8289 Special data registers i D8280 to D8289 i fl Special auxiliary relay
270. gt 1300 C 0 gt 2400 F Temperature Temperature 100 e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs e Channels are insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1 For FX2N 2LC the rated temperature range digital output value and resolution depend on the selected sensor and mode 2 Accuracy is not guaranteed for the temperature range of 0 C to 399 C 0 F to 799 F of the thermocouple B input and for the temperature range of 0 F to 32 F of the PL Il and WRe5 26 inputs A 36 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment Common Items 5 1 How to Use the Manuals 5 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment sw UOWLWOD This chapter describes the FX3U FX3UC Series PLC main unit instruction manual and the various manuals of B analog products uly ec Ow SO 5 1 How to Use the Manuals s Various analog products can be connected to the FX Series PLC to control the analog inputs and outputs C 5 2s PLC T S For PLC wiring and installation gt 5 eHARDWARE MANUAL Supplied This manual is supplied with the product D User s Manual Hardware Edition i remot MER geggggg
271. he terminal and terminal to the Class D grounding line 100 or less together with the ground terminal of the main unit To perform crossover wiring to connect the power line from FX3UC 4AD to a succeeding extension block remove the resin cover from the power crossover connector using nippers For the timing of power on off when using an external power supply see the following manual of the connected PLC Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Refer to the FX3uc Series User s Manual Hardware Edition FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 4 Analog Input Line 3 4 Analog Input Line The analog input type voltage input or current input can be selected for each channel Q O 3 O T 3 e2 3 4 1 FX3u 4AD TI TI gt lt gt lt External power supply FX3U 4AD wiring A gt 24 15V SO 24 EL 15V e Class D grounding If current input is selected NO Q gt 6 8kQ f is Ca Co Ji OO 2 LI Fh OS d l V L Vdr nexs UO ddagv dvr nexa lt a piel D D I i 2 O 1 o5 i ao i Cc I m I 1 T I 1 1 0 o N E 7 PL T S on oO i N je 8b ee oO A A T 5 O N GJ Ea iS als NO chL LJ represents the channel number 1 For FX3U Series PLC AC power type the 24V
272. he 5V DC power supply unit incorporated in the FX3uc Series PLC is deteriorated Refer to the FX3uc Series User s Manual Hardware Edition The following analog special function blocks for the FX3U FX2NC FX2N and FXON can be connected to the FX3UC Series PLC FX Series Type Analog special function blocks for the FX3uU FX3U 4AD FX3uU 4DA Analog special function blocks for the FX2NC FX2NC 4AD FX2NC 4DA Analog special function blocks for the FX2N Analog special function blocks for the FXON FXON 3A FX2N 8AD FX2N 4AD FX2N 2AD FX2N 4DA FX2N 2DA FX2N 5A FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 2LC A 13 sw UOWLUOD aVr nexs WO QVv Onexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr7 nexa dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav O CWp NeX4 on ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 2 FX3uc 32MT LT PLC Special function block for FX2nc XN zS oO oO iS ab 1e G 09 op xX O Oo ne Oo pra c T ab Q op N Q D FX2nc C NV I F Special function block for FX2NC
273. he PLC Insulation method e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs e Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points 0 points occupied This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC A 30 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 4 2 Specifications Number of input points Input signal Rated temperature range Digital output Resolution Ambient temperature 25 5 C Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Overall accuracy Time required for conversion Input characteristics Insulation method Number of I O points occupied FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input FX3U 4AD PTW ADP Centigrade C SWW9 UOWLUOD Fahrenheit F 4ch B 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor s yy JIS C 1604 1997 a gt A 100 C to 600 C 148 F to 1112 F SG 1000 to 6000 1480 to 11120 0 2 C to 0 3 C 0 4 F to 0 5 F C 0 5 for full scale a Ix gt J 3 1 0 for full scale v 200us Data updated every scan time V Bay O P Opee 111209 as E DE L OS mato E o2 148 F it 0 gt 600 C o 0 gt 1112 F 14000 Temperature 1480 emperature e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC e The DC DC converter is used to insula
274. he bit is turned on when the offset or gain data BFM 10 to 17 in the EEPROM has a setting error 2 Remedy Check the output mode BFM 0 and the offset and gain data BFM 10 to 17 3 Power supply error b2 dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT 1 Description of error 24 V power is not correctly supplied x C 2 Remedy Check the wiring condition or the supply voltage a ta E 4 Hardware error b3 L 1 Description of error FX3u 4DA may be defective X E 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 5 v ea 5 Error when setting the function for output upon PLC stop b5 1 Description of error The bit will turn on when the functions setting value for setting output upon PLC stop is not correctly set 2 Remedy SE Check the output mode BFM 0 and the setting value of output data upon PLC stop BFM 32 to 35 62 D 63 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 9 Troubleshooting FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 9 5 FX3U 4DA Initialization and Test Program 6 Upper lower limit function value setting error b6 1 Description of error The bit will turn on when the setting value of the upper lower limit function is not correctly set 2 Remedy Check the output mode BFM 0 and the lower limit BFM 41 to 44 and upper limit BFM 45 to 48 settings value of the upper lower limit function 7 Error in corrective function setting by load
275. he digital data to be subject to D A conversion to be output as analog data in D100 and D101 Description M8000 Performs D A conversion using the digital data stored in the D100 for channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter Normally ON Performs D A conversion using the digital data stored in the D101 for channel 2 of the 1st analog special adapter E 16 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 6 Error Status 4 6 Error Status 1 Description of setting a If an error is detected on 4DA ADP the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register B The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data ae lt X lt ce Special data register E e gt Description 2O CEET ae eee D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to check the description of the error C Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors x Ss Bit Description z bO Channel 1 output data setting error 5 b1 Channel 2 output data setting error D b2 Channel 3 output data setting error b3 Channel 4 output data setting error a b4 EEPROM error S b5 to b15 Unused 2 Program Example D8268 0 Channel 1 output data setting error on 1st adapter D8268 1 Channel 2 o
276. he product Example FX3U 48MR ES production number 570001 MITSUBISHI PROGRAMMABLE MODEL FXs3u 48MR ES Right side 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 40W OUT 30VDC 240VAC 2A COS 1 SERIAL 570001 is LISTED 80M1 IND CONT EQ CE ate MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN i SAATE EE NEON EE IIN Maseceasesaeed E IAE S O Te TT Control number Month Example 7 July 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December Year Example 5 2005 last digit of dominical year Compatible Programming Tool Version Number Use the programming tool with the following version number to create programs for the 4DA ADP of the FX3U FX3uUC Series PLC GX Developer Ver SW8 P or lat er or later sd SWLID5C GPPW J Ver 8 13P When selecting a model select FX3U C e SWLID5C GPPW E If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used programming will not be possible 1 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer select FX3UC for the PLC type E 5 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt QVr onexs Vdr nexs UO ddagv dvr7 nexa O ddv ld ave nexd TT dav var nex4 M1d QVt NEXS4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 2 1 Generic Specificatio
277. he range from 2 to 4095 the average value will be calculated to conform to the set averaging time and the average value obtained will be stored in the special data register Vdr nexs w dadY dYr N X4 e After turning the PLC power on the current data is stored to special data registers until the number of data items reaches the set averaging time After this the average data will be stored e Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set value is outside the setting range an error signal will be output For a detailed description of the error status refer to Section 6 5 2 Program Example M8000 Sets the averaging time for channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter to 1 Normally ON Sets the averaging time for channel 2 of the 1st analog special adapter to 5 FNC 12 K5 D8265 e a day G eave nexs TI aavvarnexa ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 6 Error Status 4 6 Error Status If an error is detected in the 4AD ADP the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data Special data register D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status d
278. he standard output characteristics are provided for each output mode BFM O at the time of B factory shipment wo Changing the offset data BFM 10 to 13 and gain data BFM 14 to 17 can change the output ce characteristics of each channel This chapter describes how to change the output characteristics SE w 7 1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics C G 1 Cancel the setting change prohibition mode 5 gt If setting change is prohibited write K3030 in BFM 19 The setting change prohibition mode will iz be canceled 2 Determine the output mode BFM 0 Vdar nexas Determine the output mode BFM 0 optimum for the selected channels and the voltage current specifications Set value HEX Output mode Analog output range Digital input range 0 Voltage output mode 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 1 wots aa es anal Vale mM The characteristic cannot be changed specification mode 2 Current output mode OmA to 20mA O to 32000 3 Current output mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 32000 4 urreni ouput analog Vag pA The characteristic cannot be changed specification mode 5toE Setting not allowed F Channel not used Example Enter HFFOO in BFM to set output mode O for channels 1 and 2 and prevent use chan TI aovvornex M ld QYY NE X4 dy O nels 3 and 4 z Cautions regarding data setting iS e Ifa value 1 or 4 is set for a channel the output characteristics of the channel cannot be changed 35 J U e Set the
279. heck that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected This special device should be selected depending on the connected position and the channel 3 Error status Check that no error is detected in the 4DA ADP If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wiring and programs For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 6 4 Program Check 6 4 Program Check Check the following items for the program 1 Device for setting specified digital value Check that different values are not written to this device using other programs 6 5 Error Status Check If an error occurs in the 4DA ADP the corresponding bit will turn on Bit Description bO Channel 1 output data setting error b1 Channel 2 output data setting error b2 Channel 3 output data setting error b3 Channel 4 output data setting error b4 EEPROM error b5 to b15 Unused To solve the problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below 1 Output data setting error b0 to b3 1 Description of error The specified digital value is outside the specified range Analog data will not be correctly output 2 Remedy Check that the specified digital value is within the specified range 2 EEPROM error b4 1 Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before de
280. hen check the wiring and programs For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 Vdr nexs w dagv dvr nexa 6 4 Program Check Check the following items for the program 1 Clearing of error status at power on When the power is turned off and then on again the error status should be cleared b6 and b7 should turn off using the program 2 Check of storage devices Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by other parts of the program TI dav var nexs M O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld GVv nexs dav OI CWp NeX4 ae ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS C 23 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 6 5 Error Status Check 6 5 Error Status Check C 24 If an error occurs in the 4AD ADP the corresponding bit will turn on Bit Description Bit Description bO Averaging time setting error b1 Channel 2 over scale detection b6 4AD ADP hardware error b2 4AD ADP communication data error b3 Channel 4 over scale detection Unused To solve the problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 Over scale detection b0 to b3 Description of error The input analog value voltage or current value is outside the specified range The digital value is out of the range specified for the voltage input mode 0 to 4080 or outsi
281. hi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in Opportunity lost profits incurred to the user or third person by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic
282. his manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem Q O 3 O T 3 e2 dyr NEXd dyr oNeX4 Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav OI CWp NeX4 ae ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout FX3U 4AD Signal Application i 24V DC power supply D Ground terminal V VI Channel 1 analog input FG V 7 Channel 2 analog input FG V T Channel 3 analog input FG V l 7 Channel 4 analog input FX3UC 4AD Signal Application V1 11 i Channel 1 analog input COM1 SLD V2 Channel 2 analog input COM2 SLD i Do not connect any lines 2 V3 ha Channel 3 analog input COM3 SLD V4 at Channel 4 analog input COM4 SLD L l T Ground terminal FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque Q O 3 O T 3 e2 3 2 1 Power cable FX3uc 4AD The power crossover cable type C shown in the following table is supplied with the FX3Uc 4AD To connect the power cable refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit TI TI There are 3 types of power cables as shown in the fol
283. i Oo gt U 0 4mA 20mA 53 z e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs L e Channels are not insulated from each other X GE A Seoc ORO pomt 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC S occupied 2 BO 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In the direct indication mode however the aS offset gain cannot be adjusted l 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 7 1V lt Gain Offset J 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition gt B 3mA lt Gain Offset lt 30mA ae 4 The resolution and the input output characteristics depend on the selected mode Be 5 If 1 or more channels use the digital filter s the time required for A D conversion will be 5 ms x number of selected channels A 19 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 1 6 FX2Nc 4AD 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 1 Analog Input Specifications Number of input points Analog input range Absolute maximum output Offset Gain Digital output Resolution Ambient temperature 25 5 C Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Overall accuracy Time required for A D conversion Input characteristics 4 Insulation method Number of I O poin
284. ial data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number oios Wesesccccnesees PEscoesseeecend Masweceseceeee Bescecceccedecdl PC type and T T Version data Example Ver 1 00 version number PC type Example 24 FXan FX3u FX2nc and FX3uc series 2 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the product can be seen from the manufacturer s serial number SERIAL indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product Vdr nexs w dadY dYr N X4 Example FX3U 48MR ES production number 570001 MITSUBISHI PPZONTROLLER MODEL FXsu 48MR ES Right side 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 40W OUT 30VDC 240VAC 2A COSo 1 TI dav var nexs M SERIAL 570001 is LISTED 80M1 ND cont Ea C E ae ate MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION a MADE IN JAPAN I D gt gt SF ey ee 5 U o4 ERARE AREE E S E A N O E EEEE E O Month Example 7 July 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December Year Example 5 2005 last digit of dominical year Te TT Control number M1d QVt NEXS4 ddv 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number L Use the programming tool with following version numbers to create programs for the 4AD ADP X GE GX Developer vonar or lat 2o er or later i SWOID5C GPPW J Ver 8 13P When select
285. ies PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline PID Instruction FNC 88 1 2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction Reference 1 2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction Reference The PID instruction executes using the speed type or measured value differential type operation expression According to the contents of S3 1 bit O operation setting ACT specified by in the PID control either for forward operation or backward operation is executed Each value required in the operation is specified by a corresponding parameter or later 1 Basic operation expression for PID control Operation direction ACT PID operation expression CS3 1 b0 Ts AMV KP EVn EVn 1 EVn Dn Forward operation EVn PVnf SV one D 2PV PV PV D DM E oe Vas et i Ts KD TD l a at Ts KD TD ii MVn ZAMV Ts AMV Kp EVn EVn 1 EVn Dn Backward EVn SV PVnf operation ON E TD KD TD Dn Toso 2PVnf 1 PVnf PVnf 2 a TD Dn 1 MVn XAMV 1 Symbols EVn Deviation in sampling at this time Dn _ Differential term at this time EVn 1 Deviation in previous cycle Dn 1 Differential term in previous cycle SV Target value KP Proportional gain PVnf Measured value in sampling at this time after filter Ts Sampling cycle PVnf 1 Measured value in previous cycle after filter TI Integral constant PVnf 2 Measured value in two cycles before after filter TD Differential
286. ignal will be output For a detailed description of error status refer to Section 5 5 2 Program Example M8000 Sets the averaging time to 1 for the channel 1 data of the 1st analog special adapter Normally ON Sets the averaging time to 5 for the channel 2 data of the 1st analog special adapter G 17 dyr NeX4 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa TI dav var nexs M gt ddv Ld QVp Nexs M1d OVt NEXS4 T ddv 88 ONS OL Vr NEXA UONONISU id m FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 6 Error Status 4 6 Error Status If an error is detected in the PTW ADP the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data Special data register D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to determine the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors Description Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data bO of channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data b1 of channel 2 is
287. inductive lines 2 If current input is selected be sure to short the line between the VL terminal and the ILl terminal O Channel number 3 5 Grounding dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT Grounding should be performed as stated below x e The grounding resistance should be 100Q or less iS e Independent grounding should be performed for best results ue When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following Sz figure For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC Series H x lt pay a eauipmen z equipmen equipmen gt Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding i Best condition Good condition Not allowed I The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible gt B Ss 3 C 13 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data 4 Programming 4 1 This chapter describes how to create programs that can read analog data using the 4AD ADP Loading of A D Conversion Data 1 The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX3U FX3UC Series PLC 2 If the data is stored in the special devices the averaging time can be set and the input mode
288. ing a model select FX3U C SWOD5C GPPW E i U O If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used programming will not be possible az Dg 1 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer select FX3UC for the PLC type 68 Co C 5 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for the 4AD ADP 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating temperature 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative A humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Compliant with EN 68 2 6 Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm o ibrati Tests 10 times in each resistance DIN Rail Mounting i direction X Y and Z Direct Mounting 1 Shock Compliant with EN 68 2 27 resistance 147 m s2 Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise Using noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min voltage Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt 2 Be
289. ing range Initial value Data type Reference Channel 1 upper limit value error setting Maximum digital uel Valid if b1 of BEM 22 is set to ON Value in input range 7n ma 99 Channel 2 upper limit value error setting From lower limit Maximum digital Dedal Valid if b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON H PA eR value in input range Subsection jog Channel 3 upper limit value error setting digital value in Maximum digital a 5 4 16 Valid if b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON input range value in input range Channel 4 upper limit value error setting Maximum digital FOR Valid if b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON Value in input range A ma Channel 1 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50 of R ARN Valid if b2 of BFM 22 is set to ON full scale SHO eea ee j deena Channel 2 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50 of K nee Valid if b2 of BFM 22 is set to ON full scale a a a E T E Channel 3 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50 of 5 4 17 me Valid if b2 of BEM 22 is set to ON full scale nega cena Channel 4 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50 of P l ioe Valid if b2 of BEM 22 is set to ON full scale OUI SCAN I ORA Clear of upper lower limit error data or abrupt J Subsection Channel 1 minimum peak value Valid if b3 of Channel 2 minimum peak value Valid if b3 of Channel 3 minimum peak value Valid if b3 of 9 4 19 Channel 4 minimum peak value Valid if b3 of dan Hexadeci Subsection 109 Minimum peak value resetting H0000 5420 Chan
290. ing range is set the error code K31 is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the number of the buffer memory K81 to K84 that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on Set the number of table outputs for the channels BFM 85 to 88 initial value KO Set the number of table outputs for the channels in BFM 85 to 88 The number of outputs can be changed even during outputting the table Setting range for BFM 85 to 88 0 to 32767 When 0 is set output of the table will be repeated until the table output is stopped by BFM 80 When a value out of the setting range is set the error code K32 is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the number of the buffer memory K85 to K88 that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on Table output start stop BFM 80 initial value H0000 Table output is started and stopped by setting BFM 80 as shown below HOOOO mse Coons Set value Description 0 The table output function of each channel is stopped The table output function of each channel is started 1 After output of the final point in the last cycle O will be automatically written Other than above ve Invalid values When a value out of the setting range is set the error code K33 is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the number of the buffer memory K80 that has dev
291. ing with heavy electrical systems e When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions e Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems e Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed
292. input control Use the PLC to check the workpiece machine temperature measured with a thermocouple or platinum resistance thermometer sensor FX3U FX3uUC Series PLC block or special adapter E Temperature data Temperature data L Analog data Temperature Digital value ii sensor input E AAA special function e M th enone of the Check the temperature equipment using the PLC To determine whether or not a unit can be connected to the PLC refer to Chapter 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products FX3U Series Temperature sensor input products e FX3U 4AD PT ADP For detailed description refer to Section F e FX3U 4AD PTW ADP For detailed description refer to Section G e FX3U 4AD TC ADP For detailed description refer to Section H Other Series Temperature sensor input products e FX2N 8AD e FX2N 2LC e FX2N 4AD TC e FX2N 4AD PT For a detailed description of the other temperature sensor input products refer to the corresponding manuals A 3 SWW9 UOWWLUOD aVr Nexs WU QVv onexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2 1 Types of Analog Products 2 Description of Analog Products
293. int to point interpolation method 2s is gt Te g 6 Output data l 7 Output update time l 5 Point m U 8 Unit of output update time at each point Device specified in BFM 98 total number 2 and point to point interpolation method of data tables 1 1 DE O2 S Note The device number marked by 1 should not exceed D7999 or R32767 2 For a detailed description of the data table items 1 to 8 refer to the following pages D 39 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 2 Preparation of data table D 40 3 Details of data table 1 Number of patterns number of data items 1 Store the number of patterns at the top of the data table device specified in BFM 98 Up to 10 patterns can be prepared The setting range of the number of patterns is 1 to 10 When the number of patterns is out of the setting range table output error code K111 is stored in BFM 90 the device number in which the number of patterns is specified is stored in BFM 91 and b8 in error status BFM 29 is turned on 2 Pattern number of data items 5 to 299 A pattern refers to a predetermined flow of output The contents of a pattern are defined by a combination of points Prepare pattern data following the number of patterns to form the data table Up to 10 patterns can be prepared 3 Number of points number of data items 1 Store the number of points
294. ion block hardware such as specifications JY997D20801 and installation Supplied with This manual describes the FX3U 4DA ADP analog output JY997D14001 PP special adapter hardware such as specifications and product installation Supplied with This manual describes the FX2NC 4DA analog output JY997D07601 PP special function block hardware such as specifications product i and installation and also describes various programs Supplied with This manual describes the FX2N 4DA analog output JY992D65901 PP special function block hardware such as specifications product i and installation and also describes various programs Supplied with This manual describes the FX2N 2DA analog output JY992D74901 PP special function block hardware such as specifications product l l and installation and also describes various programs Supplied with This manual describes the FX2N 5A analog input output JY997D11401 PP special function block hardware such as specifications product l l and installation and also describes various programs Supplied with This manual describes the FXoN 3A analog input output JY992D49001 PP special function block hardware such as specifications product l i and installation and also describes various programs Document number Description This manual describes the FX2N 2AD analog input special function block hardware such as specifications and installation and also describes various programs S
295. ion is affected by the differential gain KD B e When the differential gain KD is small the output is immediately given with regard to changes in the an measured value PV caused by disturbance etc 25 2 e When the differential gain KD is large the output is given after a long time with respect to changes in the ne measured value PV caused by disturbance etc 2 Important points C Set the differential gain KD to 0 and then adjust the operation using the input filter a If the output response is too close to the disturbance increase the differential gain KD x Ss gt gt 9 3 2 7 Differential time TD S3 6 D Setting range 0 to 32767 x 10 ms T PID control Differential operation E Use the differential time TD to respond sensitively to fluctuations in the measured value PV caused by disturbance etc and to minimize the fluctuations e When the differential time TD is large it becomes to prevent large fluctuation in the control target caused by disturbance etc e It is not always necessary to use the differential time when disturbance is small for example TD3 PID operation S a r an a p O 7 d Deviation TD1 PID operation Deviation EV TD2 PID operation Time dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI z Tp3 PID operation l TD3 gt TD2 gt TD1 a TD2 PID operation z oO Tp1 PID operation T z L Gs Time T 3L dAYt N
296. it numbers from 0 to 7 will be assigned to the special function units blocks starting from the left When the units blocks are connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT PLC unit numbers from 1 to 7 are assigned When connected to the FX3U FX3UC D DSS Series PLC Unit Unit number 0 number 1 Input output extension block Input output extension block Special Special function block function block Main unit When connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT PLC Unit number 0 Incorporated Unit Unit CC Link LT number 1 number 2 Input output extension block Main unit FX3UCc 32MT Input output extension Special Special function block function block LT block Unit number 2 Special function unit Unit number 3 Special function unit B 21 Q O 3 O T 3 e2 dyr NEXd dyr oNeX4 Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav OI CWp NeX4 ae ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory 2 Outline of buffer memory The analog signals input into the 4AD will be converted into digital values and then stored in the 4AD buffer memory To switch the input mode between voltage input and current input or to adjust the offset or gain numeric data will be sent
297. iting of offset and gain values of channels 1 and 2 1 It takes approximately 5 seconds to change the input mode BFM 0 This is because all the set values should be changed After changing the input mode be sure to wait for 5 seconds or more before setting other data TI dav var nexs M The input characteristics of each channel can be written in BFM 21 It is also possible to perform batch writing of input characteristics for two or more channels ld QYY NE X4 6 Transfer the sequence program to change the input characteristics dy O Transfer the sequence program and start the PLC Start the PLC and turn on the command X000 to write the input characteristics In approx 5 sec x onds the offset data and the gain data will be written iS J Since the offset data and the gain data are stored in the 4AD EEPROM it is possible to delete the E g sequence program L r Read out the analog data to check the data v Create the following program to check the stored data gt 5a RUN monitor The digital values set for PARN FNC 16 U1 G10 K4 channels 1 to 4 will be read l BMOV out to DO to D3 If data is not stored properly refer to Chapter 8 Troubleshooting E OQ B 53 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 Examples of Practical Programs 7 Examples of Practical Programs 7 1 Program That Uses Averaging Time Use th
298. itten to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld dVv nexs dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS B 45 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 23 BFM 127 Abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to data register specification B 46 Setting range 0 to 7999 Initial value at delivery K209 Numeric data type Decimal K Use this function to automatically transfer the abrupt change detection status data BFM 27 to the data register specified in BFM 127 When abrupt change is detected data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened For a detailed description of the abrupt change detection status data BFM 27 refer to Subsection 5 4 10 If BFM 127 K209 initial value Specified data register Description D209 Abrupt change detection status data in BFM 27 Caution regarding abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to data register specification e Ifa data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer fu
299. l cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaaeeees F 13 3 5 Wiring of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor ccccseccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaaeeees F 13 lt 2 fel 1610 1 91 G10 meee renner mt eter re enn ed Rr ee N Tene SO ee eee ee eee F 13 4 Programming F 14 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data cccccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeessaeeesseeeeeesaneeessaeeees F 14 4 2 LISCOL Special DEVICES srein a A A A tick teo F 15 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit 0 0 00 eccccccceceeeeeseeceseeeeeseecesseeeeseaeesseeeeseeesaueessaeeeseueessaaaees F 15 4 4 Temperature MEaSureMen cccccccsscccssceceeeceucecanecseeceueesaueeseeceueesueeseuseseesaaeesueesueessueessagss F 16 A FAV SrA ING WING esperner obs ncssnecansee den lastanecas state ules inecoa antec lsat emecoa setae aasteaehece nn etecasl F 17 O EFON tens echditaracica sarc E na nact ee AA a F 18 As J MOGel COC rero asaestaebencaunasanacebaetescauesoatsabonies e Ee ES F 20 AS asic Program eX ail Crsccsccchis cece shecc Soechinsnice scotia Soe each actos fod onaee ti escasleasasa fdas Sc shea oats icaseasee F 20 5 Troubleshooting F 21 5 1 PEC Version Number Check oraninin aster eee eee ieee F 21 2 V VII OCI esse aetna aE E Ain clack caketon hac hones E E F 21 9 SPeClal DEVICE NOCH cree Fett adele Geen ats tne ccusinbactd iaeccasiied E F 21 9A Program CNCCK c2tesarcnedeancctaansateue des a a aa a a a E F 22 99 Emor Status GEC soare
300. l 3 4 5 D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Setting range 1 to 4095 Averaging time for channel 4 D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Setting range 1 to 4095 D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code 20 s poi 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit pra Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa eo gt O aa gt v ld QYY NE X4 dy To switch the temperature unit of the PT ADP turn the special auxiliary relay ON for Fahrenheit F or OFF for Centigrade C O To switch the temperature unit use the following special auxiliary relays V Special auxiliary rela gt i i d Description l y oF l U Selection of temperature unit M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 OFF Centigrade C H ON Fahrenheit F T 2 1 Program Example gt 1 To switch the temperature unit to centigrade C 2 To switch the temperature unit to Fahrenheit F 2 O for the 1st adapter for the 2nd adapter U M8001 M8000 i 8260 Normally OFF Normally ON 38 62 aS F 15 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 4 Temperature Measurement 4 4 Temperature Measurement F 16 The temperature data input in the PT ADP will be stored in the special data registers The special data registers that store the temperature data are shown in the following table Special data register D8260 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data D82
301. l be stored as data history in the data registers Vdr nexs UO ddagv dvr nexa 6 Device assignment Device Description input X000 Clearance of data history X001 Temporarily stoppage of data history A D converted digital value of channel 1 D1 A D converted digital value of channel 2 D2 A D converted digital value of channel 3 D3 A D converted digital value of channel 4 D100 to D199 Channel 1 data history 100 data samples D200 to D299 Channel 2 data history 100 data samples D300 to D399 Channel 3 data history 100 data samples D400 to D499 Channel 4 data history 100 data samples Data register dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT M1d QVt NEXS4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS B 57 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input B 58 2 Example of sequence program Initial pulse H3300 UO GO RUN monitor MOV fi M8000 i 2 BC TO Clear data history X000 FNC 12 HOOOF U0 G199 Mov B Ho00F fuoistes Temporarily stop data history X001 FNC 12 HOFOO U0 G199 Mov B HoFo0 uoi199 Temporarily stop data history X001 Cie FNC 12 K100 vevi FNC 12 H 1 Mov E 0000 U0 G199 TO FNC 15 200 D1 K1 FNC 07 WDT FNC 15 UoG1900 D200 K100 BMOV FNC 07 WDT FNC 15 UoG3600 D300 K100 BMOV FNC 07 WDT FNC 15 UoG4300 D400 K100 BMOV FNC 07 WDT U0 G
302. l type input control type eF X3U 4AD eFX3U 4DA eF X3U 4AD TC ADP eF X3U 4AD ADP eF X3U 4DA ADP eF X3U 4AD PT ADP eF X3UC 4AD eF X3U 4AD PTW ADP Refer to Subsection Refer to Subsection Refer to Subsection z oo ig gt 3 O gt lt Flowmeter Inverter etc ea A aes J pressure sensor etc R ae sensor OZ U L AA 3L dAVt N X4 ddv In addition to the above applications the FX3U FX3UCc Series PLC can be used for various purposes UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS A 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Introduction Common Items 1 1 Outline and Features of Analog Control 1 1 1 Analog input control Input the voltage current signal from a flowmeter pressure sensor etc to the PLC to monitor the condition of the workpiece or equipment FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Voltage or A D conversion current Analog input data special function E block or special a adapter Check the flux rate using the PLC Output the current or voltage data from the flux rate or the pressure To determine whether or not a unit can be connected to the PLC refer to Chapter 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products FX3uc Series Analog input products e FX3uUC 4AD For detailed description refer to Section B FX3U Series Analog input products e FX3U 4AD For detailed de
303. lag M1 Initial pulse M8002 RUN monitor M8000 Initial pulse M8002 PID control is started after auto tuning X010 X011 PID control is started without auto tuning PID control is started without auto tuning FNC 12 K3000 D510 a p FNC 12 H0031 D511 E FNC 12 i K1800 D502 Nee Kt800 502 FNC 12 k500 D510 MOVP FNC 79 KO KO H3303 K1 moe ko Ko Hass Ki FNC 78 Kg K10 D501 K 4 FROM RST D502 X11 FNC 88 D500 D501 D510 D502 PID control is PID started after auto tuning X10 The target value is set to 50 C The input filter constant a is set to 70 The differential gain KD is set to 0 The output value upper limit is set to ON for 2 sec The output value lower limit is set to ON for 0 sec The auto tuning setting is started Auto tuning ON flag The sampling time Ts for auto tuning is set to 3 sec Operation setting ACT Auto tuning is started The output value for auto tuning is set to ON for 1 8 sec The sampling time Ts for normal operation is set to 500 ms The mode of FX2N 4AD TC is set Ch 1 Unused Ch 3 Unused Ch2 Ktype Ch 4 Unused Data is read from the channel 2 in FX2N 4AD TC The PID operation is initialized PID instruction is driven The PID operation is executed F X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method PID Instruc
304. le The offset gain can be adjusted The sampling function is incorporated Combined use of voltage and current inputs is possible The offset gain can be adjusted The sampling function is incorporated Combined use of voltage and current inputs is possible The offset gain can be adjusted The sampling function is incorporated Combined use of voltage current and thermocouple is possible The offset gain can be adjusted The sampling function is incorporated Combined use of voltage and current inputs is possible The offset gain can be adjusted Combined use of voltage and current inputs is possible The offset gain can be adjusted Common to 2 input channels Combined use of voltage and current outputs is possible The offset gain can be adjusted Combined use of voltage and current outputs is possible The offset gain can be adjusted Combined use of voltage and current outputs is possible The offset gain can be adjusted Combined use of voltage and current outputs is possible The offset gain can be adjusted 3 Refer ence 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 To connect this block to the FX3UC Series PLC either the FX2Nc CNV IF or FX3UC 1PS 5V is required 2 Connectable with the FX3UC Series PLC only 3 The offset and gain of the FX3U 4AD FX3uUc 4AD FX2NCc 4AD and FX2N 8AD cannot be adjusted for channels using the analog value direct in
305. le is possible Compatible with thermocouple types K J and T The unit can be switched between 3 Type K 100 C to 1200 C Type J 100 C to 600 C FX2N 8AD 1 8ch Type T 100 C to 350 C incorporated 1 1 1 Type K Compatible with thermocouple 100 C to 1200 C FX2N 4AD TC 1 4ch Wpee a 3 Type J 03 The unit can be switched between 100 C to 600 C i Centigrade and Fahrenheit Compatible with the platinum Pt100 resistance thermometer sensor FX2N 4AD PT 1 4ch A 5 0 2 C to 0 3 C Pt100 or JPt100 3 100 C to 600 C The unit can be switched between Centigrade and Fahrenheit Example Compatible with thermocouple Type K types K J R S E T B N PL Il 100 C to 1300 C WRe5 26 U and L Compatible with the platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 JPt100 0 1 C or 1 C The unit can be switched between FX2N 2LC 1 2ch Depends on the Centigrade and Fahrenheit 23 Pt100 sensor input range The temperature adjustment 200 C to 600 C function PID operation etc is incorporated The peak disconnection detection function is incorporated A CT sensor is needed 1 To connect this block to the FX3Uc Series PLC either the FX2NC CNV IF or FX3UC 1PS 5V is needed 2 The offset and gain of the FX2N 5A cannot be adjusted for channels using the analog value direct indication mode or the analog value mV or uA specification mode 3 Refer t
306. lease contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 5 PTW ADP communication data error b7 1 2 Description of error A communication error is detected between the PTW ADP and the PLC Remedy Check that the PTW ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office G 23 QVv ONnexs avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa TI dav var nexs M gt ddv Ld QVp Nexs M1d OVt NEXS4 T ddv 88 ONS OL Vr NEXA UONONISU id m FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 5 Error Status Check MEMO G 24 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt QVv ONnexs FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input Vdr nexs UO ddagv dvr nexa TI dav var nexs M ld QYY NE X4 O ddv M1d QVt NEXS4 gt O x T gt Foreword 5 Zo T U This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for the FX3U 4AD TC ADP special I adapter 4 channel thermocouple input and should be read and understood before atte
307. licable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment Terminate the cable end as shown below To connect the platinum resistance thermometer sensor use the cable supplied with the Pt100 platinum resistance thermometer or a twisted pair shielded cable 1 Cables Applicable cable and tightening torque Wire size Tightening TENAGA stranded single wire torque Sinale wi 0 3mm to 0 5mm e To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable A sas AWG22 to 20 and then twist the core before connection 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 e To connect a single wire cable just strip the cover off the cable before connection 0 22 Nem to e Rod terminal with insulation sleeve 2 2 S 0 3mm to 0 5mm 0 25 Nem recommended terminal os AWG22 to 20 l AI 0 5 8WH Manufactured by Phoenix Contact with Refer to the rod terminal Caulking tool insulation _ external view shown in CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact sleeve the following figure or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact 2 Termination of cable ends To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve e To directly terminate the end of a stranded single wire cable Terminatonereablecnd Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude a Do not solder plate the end of the cable e To terminate cable
308. livery from our factory cannot be read out properly or is destroyed 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office E 21 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt QVr onexs Vdr nexs UO ddgv dvr nexa O ddv ld ave nexd TT dav var nex4 M1d QVt NEXS4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 6 5 Error Status Check MEMO E 22 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input avr Nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt QVv ONnexs FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa eo gt O aa gt v O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld dVv nexs ddv L x T gt F Foreword ots This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for the FX3U 4AD PT ADP special I adapter 4 channel platinum resistance thermometer input and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit 5 Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward gt B it to the end user 58 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights o
309. llowing buffer memories For a detailed description of the buffer memory refer to Section 5 4 and subsequent sections BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference 0 Output mode setting for channels 1 to 4 H0000 at delivery ao ae a 4 Hexadeci Subsection 1 i penetra Le Hexadeci Subsection mal 5 4 4 Command to write offset gain setting value of j 9 4 channels 1 to 4 10 Channel 1 offset data Unit mV or uA 41 Channel 2 offset data Unit mV or uA Hexadeci Subsection mal 5 4 5 Decimal Decimal Depending on the Depending on Subsection 12 Channel 3 offset data Unit mV or pA mode used the mode used Decimal 9 4 6 131 Channel 4 offset data Unit mV or uA Decimal 141 Channel 1 gain data Unit mV or uA Decimal 15 Channel 2 gain data Unit mV or uA Depending on the Depending on Decimal Subsection 16 Channel 3 gain data Unit mV or uA mode used the mode used Decimal 9 4 6 17 Channel 4 gain data Unit mV or uA Decimal To permit data 4 l ae rae bine Subsection 19 Setting change prohibition To disable data K3030 at delivery Decimal 547 change Value other than K3030 Initialization function Set K1 in this buffer memory to perform Subsection ue initialization At the completion of initialization oo So pecma 5 4 8 the KO will be automatically set 98 Disconnection detection status Valid only in Hexadeci Sub
310. lock 4 channel analog input and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward az it to the end user 2 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION B 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input B 2 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 1 1 Outline of Functions A 1 Outline F This chapter outlines the FX3u 4AD FX3uc 4AD For common descriptions of the FX3u 4AD and FX3uc 4AD these model names are referred to as the 4AD dyr NEXd dyr oNeX4 1 1 Outline of Functions The FX3u 4AD is an analog special function block which is connectable with the FX3u and FX3uc Series PLC C used to capture 4 ch voltage current data The FX3uc 4AD cannot be connected to the FX3u Series PLC E i gt lt 1 Up to 81 units can be connected to the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC including the othe
311. lowing table Types A and B are supplied with the Zg main unit and type C is supplied with the input extension blocks or the special function blocks for FX3uc LS Series Type Application Modil Length Cable supplied with A Power cable for main unit FX2NC 100MPCB i i In r FX3uc Series PLC main unit nput power cable for inpu B extension block PANE eee r aa e Input extension block for FX2NC 0 1m Series 0 3 e Special function block for FX3UC FX2NC Series Input power crossover cable for input extension block PANE ORTE E Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa The crossover cable type C can skip up to 4 16 point output blocks to connect units If more blocks should be skipped to supply power to an input block use cable type B lt Self made power cable gt To use self made power cables use the following wire rods and connectors Specifications model Wire size AWG24 0 2mm Crimp style terminal 50083 8014 manufactured by Molex Japan Co Ltd Bend 51030 0330 manufactured by Molex Japan Co Ltd ousin i For input extension block 51030 0230 manufactured by Molex Japan Co Ltd Supply the 24V DC power to FX3uc 4AD via the power supply connector 3 2 2 Cable FX3U 4AD day G eave nexs TI aavvarnexa ITI The FX3U 4AD terminal block is designed for M3 screws The end disposal of the cable shows blow gt X lt Tighten the terminal to a torque of 0 5 N m to 0 8 N m 2 D gt e When one
312. lt 0 Error description Action Incorrect input filter constant a Orga a lt 0 or 100 lt a or lt PID operation is stopped gt 6733 Incorrect proportional gain KP KP lt 0 A data error has occurred in the set value in a control parameter 6734 Incorrect integral time T1 TI lt 0 or in the middle of PID operation ae Check the parameters 6735 Incorrect derivative gain KD KD lt 0 or 201 lt KD 6736 Incorrect derivative time TD TD lt 0 lt Auto tuning is continued gt 6740 Sampling time TS lt Operation cycle The operation is continued in the condition sampling time TS cyclic time operation cycle Variation of measured value exceeds limit Orge APV lt 32768 or 32767 lt APV 6743 Deviation exceeds limit EV lt 32768 or 32767 lt EV 6744 Integral result exceeds limit done Out of range from 32768 to 32767 lt PID operation is continued gt The operation is continued with each parameter set to the 6745 o value exceeds limit due to derivative gain maximum or minimum value D 6746 Derivative result exceeds limit Out of range from 32768 to 32767 6747 PID operation result exceeds limit Out of range from 32768 to 32767 eee _ Output upper limit value and output lower limit value are 6748 P OUP HPUpPer AIIE Ser valle sx EGK ONEN Nat exchanged for each other PID operation is continued gt set value Check whether the target settings
313. lues corresponding to the analog signals to be output in BFM 1 to 4 BFM number Description 1 Data to be output from channel 1 2 Data to be output from channel 2 3 Data to be output from channel 3 4 Data to be output from channel 4 5 4 3 BFM 5 Output setting upon PLC stop D 22 Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H It is possible to set the output conditions from channel 1 to 4 when the PLC is in the stopped state HOOOO naed Hom Set value HEX Output conditions 0 The final value during running is held 1 The offset signal is output 2 The output data set in BFM 32 to 35 are output 3 to F Invalid setting values unchanged The output conditions depend on the output mode BFM 0 1 Cautions regarding output conditions setting upon PLC stop e While changing the setting values the output is stopped and H0OO0O0 is automatically written in the output status BFM 6 At the completion of change the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and output will be restarted 2 Caution regarding EEPROM writing e If data is set in BFM 0 5 10 to 17 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3uU 4DA Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 times Therefore when creating a program do not frequently write data to the above buffer memori
314. ly turn off 2S v2 ee D 31 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 16 BFM 41 to 44 Lower limit values of upper lower limit function BFM 45 to 48 Upper limit values of upper lower limit function Initial value See below Numeric data type Decimal K When the upper lower limit function has been made valid by the setting of BFM 38 set the upper and lower limit values to be used The setting range depends on the output mode 1 Setting range of upper and lower limits and initial values Initial value Output mode BFM 0 Setting range Lower limit value Upper limit value BFM 41 to 44 BFM 45 to 48 0 32640 to 32640 32640 32640 1 10200 to 10200 10200 10200 2 Cautions regarding upper and lower limit values setting Check that the lower limit value is not equal to or more than the upper limit value If the lower limit value is equal to or more than the upper limit value b6 of the error status BFM 29 is turned On D 32 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 17 BFM 50 Setting of output corrective function by load resistance O only in voltage output mode BFM 51 to 54 Load resistance values 3 Initial value BFM 50 H0000 BFM 51 to 54 K30000 3 Numeric data type BFM 50
315. ly when the value becomes more than the upper limit or less than the lower limit data will be automatically transferred from FX3U 4DA to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program to read data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened For a detailed description of the upper lower limit function status BFM 39 refer to Subsection 5 4 14 If BFM 62 K201 initial value Specified data register D201 Value of upper lower limit function status BFM 39 Description Cautions regarding upper lower limit function status automatic transfer function setting e Ifa data is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify the same data register e This function is valid by turning on b1 of the status automatic transfer function setting BFM 60 e When a value out of the above setting range is set b9 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on e The data set in BFM 62 will be retained in the EEPROM Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 5 10 to 17 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3u 4DA Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 When creating a program therefore do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories BFM FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory
316. mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 1 to 4095 4095 Current input 5 Analog value direct indication mode 3999 to 20400 3999 20400 4mA to 20mA 4000 to 20000 Current input 20mA to 20mA 16000 to 16000 Slane te k ee Current input 20mA to 20mA 4000 to 4000 eee ne mee Ua Current input 8 Analog value direct indication mode 20400 to 20400 20400 20400 20mA to 20mA 20000 to 20000 1 Cautions regarding upper lower limit error setting e To use the set upper lower limit error data be sure to turn on the upper lower limit error detection function b1 of BFM 22 e To use the data addition function bO of BFM 22 together with this function be sure to add the addition data channels 1 to 4 BFM 61 to 64 to the upper lower limit values to be set In addition observe the data setting range Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa 25 j B 41 Q O 3 O T 3 e2 dyr oNeX4 dyr NEXd TI aovvornex M O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld dVv nexs dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 17 BFM 91 to 94 Abrupt change detection value setting Setting range See below Initial value See below Numeric data type Decimal K When channel data BFM 10 to 13 is updated if the difference between the previous v
317. mit error value b7 Upper limit error value b8 to b15 Not used 2 Cautions regarding use of upper lower limit error status data e To use the upper lower limit error status data be sure to turn on the upper lower limit detection function b1 of BFM 22 e Perform one of the following operations to turn off the previously turned on bit Turn the power off and on Turn on bO or b1 of BFM 99 to reset the upper lower limit error status Write H0000 in BFM 26 as the upper lower limit error status data day G eave nexs TI aavvarnexa ITI e Even if an error is detected channel data BFM 10 to 13 will be continuously updated 3 K 3 Upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer function b5 of BFM 22 l 5 If the upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM 126 the data SA in BFM 26 can be transferred to the specified data register When the upper lower error is detected data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For L this reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scanning time of the PLC can be V shortened O Represents a numeric value gt Ue Convenient uneton Automatic data transfer function 5 setting ree Transfer to data register specification I ON Valid Transfer from buffer memory ian BFM 126 KO 2 J BFM 22 b1 ON BFM 22 b5 ON Sea aa Be 23 2 B 35 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manu
318. mometer Data Input 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog input using the PTW ADP follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4AD PTW ADP Refer to Chapter 1 Outline of system eCompatible PLC version number eCompatible programming tool version Refer to Chapter 2 number Outline Specifications check Specifications eOperation environment ePerformance specifications elnput characteristics Refer to the common pages System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control eSelection of units Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring ePower supply line ePlatinum resistance thermometer sensor line Refer to Chapter 4 Programming Programming eDetails of special devices eExamples of basic programs lf the error status data or the input digital value is abnormal refer to Chapter 5 Troubleshooting FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number 3 3 PTW ADP is compatible with the following PLC 5 Compatible PLC Date of production FX3u Series PLC After May 2005 initial production B FX3uc Series PLC After August 2004 lt x F So J 1 Version check
319. mon Items 4 3 Mixed Analog Input Output 4 3 2 FXON 3A FXON 3A Specifications Number of input output 2ch 1ch points Analog input tO Pe 4mA to 20mA DC OV 00y DG 4mA to 20mA DC OV to 5V DC OV to 5V DC Input resistance 200kQ External load 1k to 1MQ S asv ama input 15V 60mA If the digital value is 0 If the digital value is 0 If the digital value is 0 If the digital value is 0 Input resistance 250Q output range External load 500Q 273 Orsel OV to 1V OMA to 4mA OV to 1V 4mA 943 If the digital value is 250 If the digital value is 250 If the digital value is 250 If the digital value is 250 cain 5V to 10V 20mA 5V to 10V 20mA Digital input 0 to 250 0 to 250 output 8 bits binary 8 bits binary Resolution 40mV 10Vx1 250 64uA 16mMAx1 250 40mV 10Vx1 250 64uA 16mMAx 1 250 accuracy Time required TO instruction processing time x 2 FROM instruction processing time for conversion operation synchronized with sequence program 10V 20mA 3 lt I O G E E iw A D e tf characteristics 5 D lee lt en 5 lec 4mA a 0 gt 10V 0 4mA 20mA 0 250 0 250 Analog input Analog input Digital input Digital input If the input data consists of 9 bits or more only the lower 8 bits will be valid and the other bits will be ignored Insulation e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input and output area from the PLC
320. mpting to install or a use the unit 5 Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward gt B it to the end user ae This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION H 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input H 2 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 1 1 Outline of Functions OO 1 Outline This chapter describes the outline of FX3u 4AD TC ADP referred to as TC ADP 1 1 Outline of Functions The FX3u 4AD TC ADP is an analog special adapter Connect the FX3U 4AD TC ADP to the FX3uU FX3uC Series PLC to read the data from the 4 channel thermocouple 1 Up to 4 TC ADP units can be connected to the PLC Including other analog special adapters 2 Thermocouple types K and J can be connected However it s impossible to use both types K and J with 1 adapter 3 A D conversion data will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 4 adapters maximum including other Nimb
321. n cycle of the PLC ne e Inthe auto tuning 5 Set the sampling time to 1 000 ms 1 second or more 1 Maximum error C The maximum error of the sampling time Ts is from one operation cycle 1 ms to one operation a cycle S 1 When the sampling time TS is a small value Fluctuation of the maximum error described above may cause a problem 2 In such a case execute the PID instruction in the constant scan mode or program it in a timer interrupt D routine sf 2 When the sampling time TS is shorter than one operation cycle of the PLC z A PID operation error K6740 occurs however when PID operation is executed the sampling time TS is S equal to the operation cycle of the PLC In such a case use the PID instruction in a timer interrupt 1600 to i800 and clear CS3 7 just before executing the PID instruction For a detailed description refer to FX3u FX3uc Series Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Edition 7 is reset X000 When the interrupt routine is executed for the first time the register for internal processing is cleared by the pulse generation command FNC 88 D 1 D1 D1 Mie 0 2 oro oreo 1610 The PID operation is executed day G eave nexs TI aavvarnexa ITI MLld AYt N X4 ddv L L AYt NEX4 gt O UONONISUI Cid 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details o
322. n status e The ON bits of the upper lower limit function status are latched after the output data has returned to the specified ranges between the upper and lower limits e The upper lower limit function status can be reset by the following methods Use the upper lower limit function status reset function BFM 40 Turn the power supply off then on 3 Upper lower limit automatic transfer function b1 of BFM 60 If the upper lower limit automatic transfer data register is specified in BFM 62 the data in BFM 39 can be transferred to a specified data register Only when an error is detected data will be automatically transferred from the FX3U 4DA to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened For a detailed description of the status automatic transfer function refer to Subsection 5 4 18 dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI 5 4 15 BFM 40 Clearance of upper lower limit function status Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H MLld AYt N X4 ddv The flags can be reset by turning on the following bits of BFM 40 L 1 Assignment to each bit of BFM 40 A gt lt gt Bit Description gt bO Clearance of lower limit status 2 A b1 Clearance of upper limit status b2 to b15 Invalid l Be O 2 Operation to be performed after resetting 5 At the completion of status reset the bits of BFM 40 will automatical
323. nals and ground terminal Compliant with JEM 1021 Grounding Working l Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working l n altitude Compliant with IEC61131 2 lt 2000m 1 If PTW ADP is connected to the FX3uc Series PLC direct installation is not possible e men e men e men quip AKIPI JUR Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 6 3 Ifthe pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use the PTW ADP The PTW ADP may malfunction G 6 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications z 5 S T z Items Specification A D conversion circuit 24V DC 20 15 50MA B driving power It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power supply to the terminal block yy 5V DC 15mA Of Interface driving power Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit it is not SG necessary to supply the power 2 3 Performance Specifications lt gt Specifications Items S Centigrade C Fahrenheit F D nouson 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor D perag Pt100 JIS C 1604 1997 e lt Peter a 100 C to 600 C 148 F to 1112 F
324. nction status with automatic transfer to specified data register x C BFM 63 Disconnection detection status with automatic transfer to data register specification J BFM 99 Data table transfer command E g L L AYt NEX4 ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS D 23 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 5 BFM 9 Offset gain setting value write command Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Channel numbers are assigned to 4 lower bits of BFM 9 If one of those bits is turned on the offset data BFM 10 to 13 and the gain data BFM 14 to 17 of the corresponding channel will be written in the internal memory EEPROM When written in the internal memory the data will be valid 1 Channel number assignment to each bit of BFM 9 Bit No Description bO Channel 1 offset data BFM 10 and gain data BFM 14 writing b1 Channel 2 offset data BFM 11 and gain data BFM 15 writing b2 Channel 3 offset data BFM 12 and gain data BFM 16 writing b3 Channel 4 offset data BFM 13 and gain data BFM 17 writing b4 to b15 Not used The WRITE command can be given to two or more channels at the same time Set HOOOF to write the data of all the channels in the EEPROM On completion of writing H0000 bO to b3 OFF will be set automatically 2 Cautions regarding giving offset gain settin
325. nctions do not specify the same data register e Be sure to turn on the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer function b6 of BFM 22 and the abrupt change detection function b2 of BFM 22 e The data written to BFM 127 will be retained in the EEPROM Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 24 BFM 128 Over scale status data automatic transfer to data register specification Setting range 0 to 7999 Initial value at delivery K210 Numeric data type Decimal K Q O 3 O T 3 e2 Use this function to automatically transfer the over scale status data BFM 28 to the data register specified in BFM 128 x2 When over scale is detected data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For this reason CE the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened a For a detailed description of the over scale status data BFM 28 refer to Subsection 5 4 11 1 If BFM 128 K210 initial value Specified data register Description D210 Over scale status
326. nd Terminal Tightening Torque g 3 Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment Terminate the cable ends as shown below 1 Cables B Applicable cable and tightening torque T mm OR single wire torque 0 e To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable and then twist the core before connection e To connect a single wire cable just strip the cover off the cable before connection 2 2 Single wire 0 3mm lt to 0 5mm AWG22 to 20 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 0 22Nemto e Rod terminal with insulation sleeve Rod terminal 0 3mm to 0 5mm recommended terminal with AWG22 to 20 l Al 0 5 8WH Manufactured by Phoenix Contact E Refer to the rod terminal Caulking tool sleeve followina fi CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact ollowing figure or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact external view shown in the Vdr nexs w dagv dvr nexa 2 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve e To directly terminate the end of a stranded single wire cable Termination or cabe erd Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude g ZZ Do not solder plate the end of the cable e To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve If the cable cover is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into the insulation sleeve For this rea
327. ne or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed O ddv ld ave nexd TT dav var nex4 M1d QVt NEXS4 dav OI CWp NeX4 ae ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS E 9 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of the 4DA ADP are arranged as follows Signal Application External power 24 24 Grounding terminal oooo0oo0o00000 11 Channel 1 analog output 2 Channel 2 analog output OOOO UU V3 COM2 2 V2 COM1 1 Vi 13 Channel 3 analog output 14 Channel 4 analog output ooooo ooon COM4 l4
328. nect any lines to the e terminal 3 5 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below e The grounding resistance should be 100Q or less e Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of each Series Other i Other r Other i z equipmen z equipmen equipmen Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed e Use the following grounding wire FX3U 4AD AWG14 2mm FX3uc 4AD AWG22 20 0 3 to 0 5mm e The PLC grounding point should be close and all grounding wires should be as short as possible B 18 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Input FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 4 1 Analog Input Procedures A o 9 4 Analog Input z This chapter describes the minimum programming necessary to readout the 4AD analog data Follow the procedure below to confirm that the analog data can be properly read out dyr NEXd dyr oNeX4 4 1 Analog Input Procedures 1 Unit number check C gt lt Unit numbers from 0 to 7 will be assigned to the special function units blocks starting from the left 5 When units blocks are connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT PLC unit numbers from 1 to 7 are z assigned Check the unit number assigned
329. nect lines to the J type terminals Leave these terminals disconnected z n2 2 Keep the thermocouple away from inductive noise commercial power etc 25 2 ee H 13 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 3 6 Caution Regarding Wiring 3 5 2 Wiring of the thermocouple type J Terminal block TC ADP type J pe c Temperature compensating circuit Thermocouple Compensating type J lead wire 3kQ cho lt a Shield Temperature aaa Rai ch Ce ia a a 5V 2aV Dc Bae ae ze Class D grounding LLJ LLJ ch Lirepresents the channel number 1 To use a J thermocouple type be sure to connect the thermocouple to these terminals In addition select J type by turning on the type K J selection special auxiliary relay 2 Keep the thermocouple away from inductive noise commercial power etc 3 6 Caution Regarding Wiring e It is not possible to connect different types of thermocouples to 4 channels of TC ADP Be sure to use the same type of thermocouple for all the channels e TC ADP is not insulated between the channels For this reason be sure to use a non grounded type thermocouple e Be sure not to connect to the termina 3 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below e The grounding resistance should be 100Q or less e Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independen
330. nel 1 maximum peak value Valid if b3 Channel 2 maximum peak value Valid if b3 l Channel 3 maximum peak value Valid if b3 f 5 4 19 Channel 4 maximum peak value Valid if b3 F Hexadeci Subsection 119 Maximum peak value resetting H0000 5 420 Peak values Minimum BFM 101 to 104 Maximum 111 to 114 automatic transfer Subs ctcn 125 2 to first data register specification Valid if b4 of 0 to 7992 K200 at delivery Decimal 5421 BFM 22 is set to ON Occupies of 8 consecutive points 1 Use bO to b2 2 If power failure occurs the EEPROM will retain its data 3 Use bO to b3 B 26 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM Subsection 5 4 22 Subsection 5 4 23 Subsection 5 4 24 Subsection 5 4 25 Subsection 5 4 26 Subsection 5 4 27 Subsection 5 4 28 Subsection 5 4 29 BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference Upper lower limit error status data BFM 26 126 automatic transfer to data register specification 0 to 7999 K208 at delivery Decimal Valid if b5 of BFM 22 is set to ON Abrupt change detection status data BFM 27 127 automatic transfer to data register specification 0 to 7999 K209 at delivery Decimal Valid if b6 of BFM 22 is set to ON Over scale status data BFM 28 automatic 128 transfer to data register sp
331. ng positions 3 2 FX3UC Series PLC Te a m m For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual supplied with AFN T Gea to your PLC i PN ee Refer to the FX3UC Series User s Manual Hardware Edition SEEE E 4To connect the special adapters refer to Subsection 3 2 1 1 3 A Special function p N block for FX2Nc European terminal block o m e A oS FX3uc 4AD SS A re gt European terminal block 12 0 ab S c 1S ab Ke c 7p ae amp is Ke c Q prar c ram T ab Q i ee Q D Special function block for FX2NC e Special function block for FX3u FX2nc CNV IF FX2N and FXOoN J Analog input eFlowmeter ePressure sensor eSignal converter etc Analog output elnverter etc Temperature sensor input e Thermocouple ePlatinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 e For a detailed description of special function block connectability and system configuration Refer to the FX3uc Series User s Manual Hardware Edition e Use the FX3uc 1PS 5V extension power supply unit if the capacity of t
332. nit number 2 Special function unit Unit number 3 Special function unit avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs ddgv dvr nexa Vdar nexas dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT M1d QVt NEXS4 dav OI CWp NeX4 ae ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method 2 Outline of buffer memory The digital values set in FX3U 4DA will be converted to analog signals To switch the output mode between voltage output and current output or to adjust the offset or gain numeric data will be sent from the main unit and written set in the FX3U 4DA buffer memory To read write data from into the buffer memory of FX3U 4DA the buffer memory can be directly specified using FROM TO instructions or an applied instruction Using this function sequence programs can be easily created FX3uU F X3UC e BFM direct Series PLC FX3U 4DA FX3uU 4DA specification e TO instruction e BFM direct e BFM direct specification specification Sequence oa SAI ET e FROM instruction program ns e BFM direct specification e FROM D A instruction conversion conversion Analog data Analog data Inverter DC motor etc 1 Since buffer memory direct specification UL GLI can directly specify the buffer memory in the source or destination area of an applied instruction
333. ns 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for 4DA ADP 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating temperature 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative A humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Compliant with EN 68 2 6 Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm sd ibrati 10 times of testing in ett ae A a rect resistance DIN Rail Mounting each direction X Y 10 to 57 Le 0 075 Total 80 min each Direct Mounting ee a Shock Compliant with EN 68 2 27 resistance 147 m s2 Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise Using noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min voltage Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt 2 Between all terminals and ground terminal Compliant with JEM 1021 Grounding Working l Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working l n altitude Compliant with IEC61131 2 lt 2000m 1 If 4DA ADP is connected to the FX3uc Series PLC direct installation is not possibl
334. ns etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases a Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design b Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user c When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided d Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced e Relay failure or output contact failure caused by usage beyond the specified Life of contact cycles f Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage g Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi h Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubis
335. nsulation resistance meter Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less ereunaing lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt 2 yeOLING Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working altitude Compliant with IEC61131 2 lt 2000m 3 1 If TC ADP is connected to the FX3uc Series PLC direct installation is not possible 2 pic Other Other Dae Other e men e men e men quipr quipr quip Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 7 3 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use the TC ADP The TC ADP may malfunction 2 2 Power Supply Specifications Item Specifications A D conversion circuit 24V DC 20 15 45mA driving power It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power supply to the terminal block 5V DC 15mA Interface driving power Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit it is not necessary to supply the power H 6 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 2 3 Performance Specifications 2 3 Performance Specifications Specifications Item Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Thermocouple type K or J JIS C 1602 1995 Rated temperature Type K 100 C to 1000 C
336. nt temperature 0 55 C Overall accuracy Time required for conversion I O characteristics 3 Other Specifications Insulation method Number of I O points occupied 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 3 Mixed Analog Input Output FX2N 5A Voltage output Current output ich OmA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC External load 5009 or less 10V to 10V DC External load 5k to 1MQ 10V to 5V OmA to 10mA 9V to 10V and 3 mA to 30 mA or less and Gain Offset gt 1V Gain Offset gt 3mA With sign 12 bits binary 10 bits binary 5mV 10Vx1 4000 20uA 20mAx1 1000 0 5 200uA for 40mA full scale o 0 5 100mV for 20V full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output 1 0 400uA for 40mA full scale o 1 0 200mV for 20V full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output 2ms When the output mode is set to 0 When the output mode is 4 The dotted line is for mode 2 N Analog output 3 iN 3 gt Qg 0 gt 32000 Digital input FX2N 5A The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input and output area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog input and output Channels are not insulated from each other 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Com
337. number data points Buffer memory number Destination register n If the above program is created 1 point of data will be read out from the buffer memory BFM 10 of unit No 1 5 to data register D10 I 2 TO instruction Writing PLC data into BFM z Use the TO instruction to write data to a buffer memory In a sequence program use this instruction as follows Be OQ oS WRITE command TO i EEk of transfer Unit er pae points Buffer memory number Transfer source If the above program is created 1 point of data H3300 will be written to buffer memory BFM 0 of unit No 1 B 23 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM 4AD incorporates the following buffer memories For a detailed description of the buffer memory refer to Section 5 4 and subsequent sections BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference 0 Input mode setting for channels 1 to 4 H0000 at delivery ao ee i F F Decimal Decimal Subsection Decimal 5 4 2 Decimal Ta e a M E E Decimal 11 Channel 2 data current data or average data f 4 Decimal Subsection 13 Channel 4 data current data or average data F Decimal Data change disable Disables adjustment of the following buffer memory locations e Input mode specification BFM 0 e Initializa
338. o prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in t
339. o the corresponding product instruction manual FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3 1 FX3U Series PLC 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products This section shows drawings to describe the configuration of analog units for the FX3U FX3uUC Series PLC 3 1 FX3U Series PLC 3 1 1 Connection of special adapters FX3uU Series gT T E m m e e el lel el le el le el hel te el lel el eel ete el eel ee el teeta tenella tenant eaten tenant enone m e e e e e e e e e e e e e E y ES EA and represent the connecting positions For a detailed installation description refer to the following manual supplied with your PLC Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition C i Ba Te A Analog input p EE a r European terminal block Flowmeter a f e Pressure sensor ig ee e Signal converter etc FXau BD FX3u 4AD ADP T Analog output European terminal block e Inverter etc eoooe eocccocccal o mo i LJ FX3u 4DA ADP Temperature sensor input European terminal block e Thermocouple inst types K and J Up to 4 analog special adapters
340. of line b0 to b3 1 Description of error The input temperature measurement value is outside the specified range The temperature measurement value is not in the range between 55 C to 255 C Or the line between PT ADP and the platinum resistance thermometer sensor is disconnected 2 Remedy Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range Also check the wiring condition 2 EEPROM error b4 1 Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or is destroyed 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 3 Averaging time setting error b5 1 Description of error The averaging time set for one of the channels channels 1 to 4 is outside the specified range 1 to 4095 2 Remedy Check that the averaging time is correctly set for each channel F 22 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 5 Error Status Check 4 PT ADP hardware error b6 1 2 Description of error The PT ADP does not operate properly Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to the PT ADP Also check that the PT ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 5 PT A
341. of the product Example FX3U 48MR ES production number 570001 MITSUBISHI Cantrotter MODEL FXsu 48MR ES 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 40W OUT 30VDC 240VAC 2A COSo 1 Right side SERIAL 570001 Ous LISTED 80M1 IND CONT EQ C ate MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN Lewcecectteeced Rusesdecdcaciad E EE E a E OE Reedeazesssead Te a Control number Month Example 7 July 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December Year Example 5 2005 last digit of dominical year Version Number of Compatible Programming Tools Use a programming tool with the following version number to create FX3U 4DA programs for the FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Software Compatible version number Remarks GX Developer Ve Swe Poria SWLID5C GPPW J sa oe e SWLID5C GPPW E When selecting the model select FX3U C 7 Ver 8 13P If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used some instructions and devices cannot be used 1 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer select FX3UC for the PLC type D 5 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs ddgv dvr nexa Vdar nexas TI dav var nexs M O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld dVv nexs dav DI CWP NeX4 ae ddv UONONISU Gid m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Outp
342. og signals correspond to the set output data If analog signals are not correctly output refer to Chapter 9 Troubleshooting D 55 avr Nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt QVv ONnexs ddagv dvr nexa Vdar nexas dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT M1d QVt NEXS4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 8 1 Example of Program for Analog Output Operation Regular Operation 8 Examples of Practical Programs 8 1 Example of Program for Analog Output Operation Regular Operation When you want to use the initial output characteristics but do not need to use the status information you can operate the PLC with a simple program as shown below 1 Conditions The sequence program described in this section is under the following conditions 1 System configuration FX3U 4DA unit No 0 should be connected to the FX3u Series PLC 2 Output mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode O voltage output 10 V to 10 V Channel 3 should be set to mode 3 current output 4 mA to 20 mA Channel 4 should be set to mode 2 current output 0 mA to 20 mA Initial pulse Transfer H2300 to BFM 0 output modes of M8002 ENC 12 channels 1 to 4 MOV H2300 UO GO ch1 and ch2 Voltage output 10 to 10 V P output mode 0 RUN monitor ch3 Current output 4 mA to 20 mA output M80
343. ollowing program is created the value in the data register D20 is added to K10 and written to buffer memory BFM 6 of unit 1 WRITE command FNC 20 D20 K10 U1 G6 a Fuga 220 Kio unes a Unit number result Buffer memory number Augend Addend 5 2 2 FROM TO instruction conventional method Vdar nexas 1 FROM instruction Reading out BFM data to PLC Use FROM instruction to read out the data from the buffer memory In a sequence program use this instruction as follows READ command FNC 78 Ki Kio bio kt FROM N f f vinnie Lee Buffer memory number Transfer to register dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 ddv L x lt If the above program is created 1 point of data will be read out from the buffer memory BFM 10 of unit No 1 z to the data register D10 5 5g 2 TO instruction Writing PLC data into BFM v Use the TO instruction to write data to a buffer memory In a sequence program use this instruction as follows e WRITE command oys a l Amber of transfer Unit neee pn points Buffer memory number Transfer source If the above program is created 1 point of data H3300 will be written to buffer memory BFM 0 of unit No 1 D 17 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM FX3U 4DA incorporates the fo
344. on For a detailed description of the system configuration refer to the PLC User s Manual Hardware Edition A 5 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2 2 List of Analog Product Models 2 2 List of Analog Product Models The analog input output products compatible with the FX3U FX3UCc Series PLC are described below 2 2 1 Special adapter No of I Refer Voltage current input Voltage OV to 10V DC 2 5mV 12bits i FX3U 4AD ADP Ach Combined use of voltage and c Current 4mA to 20mA DC 10uA 11bits Current inputs is possible Voltage current output Voltage OV to 10V DC 2 5mV 12bits i FX3U 4DA ADP 4ch Combined use of voltage and E Current 4mA to 20mA DC 4yA 12bits current outputs is possible Temperature sensor input Compatible with the platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 The product can be switched between Centigrade and Fahrenheit Pt100 50 C to 250 C 0 1 C Compatible with the platinum resistance thermometer 0 2 C to 0 3 C sensor Pt100 FX3U 4AD PT ADP The product can be switched between Centigrade and FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4ch Pt100 100 C to 600 C Fahrenheit l g z i Compatible with PES E EE A thermocouple types K and J The product can be switched H Type J 100 C to 600 C 0 3 C between Centigrade and Fahrenheit FX3U 4AD TC ADP A 6 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Us
345. on the PLC writes the output setting data of the special data registers performs D A conversion of the data and updates the analog output data FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 4DA ADP n th Ast FX3U FX3uc Seriese PLC Sequence program Digital value D A writing conversion eoceccoc5e D A conversion 200s start command 4ch END instruction D A Digital value writing conversion ints D A conversion 200us 4ch start command 2 D A conversion during PLC stop If the output holding function cancellation setting is disabled by the special device the offset value will be output If the output holding function cancellation setting is enabled the output at switching from RUN to STOP will be latched Just after power on however the offset value will be output until operation begins If two or more analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction data in all the connected adapters will be subject to D A conversion and then output in the order of 1st adapter 2nd adapter 4th adapter D A conversion speed data update time During execution of END instruction the output setting digital data per of 4 channel will be subject to D A conversion which takes 200us after which the analog data will be output END instruction execution time will be 200us x number of connected adapters FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output re g
346. on Time 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 5 This section describes the A D conversion time A D conversion and special data register update timing A D conversion is performed at every arithmetic operation of the PLC During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP n th Ast FX3uU FX3uc Series PLC Sequence program A D conversion start A D command conversion Digital value writing 200 us 4ch A D conversion start END instruction A D command conversion Ps Digital value writing M 200 us 4ch A D conversion during PLC stop Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated If two or more analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter 2nd adapter 4th adapter A D conversion speed data update time During execution of the END instruction the A D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 200us and the data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 200us x number of connected adapters Temperature Measurement H 8 To stabilize the temperature measurement warm up the system for 30 minutes or more after power on FX3U
347. on data cannot be read out correctly a a ae b2 Power supply error b8 Data setting error detection If any bits between b10 and b15 are turned on b8 will turn on 2 a b10 Averaging time setting error The averaging time BFM 2 to 5 is not set correctly Set the averaging time again in the range from 1 to 4095 b11 pietate eetinoeiror The digital filter value BFM 6 to 9 is not set correctly g g Set the digital filter value again in the range from 0 to 1600 The abrupt change detection value BFM 91 to 94 is not set m2 Jampi orango detecton aoc g Correctly set the value again Upnerioweriiimiterror The lower limit error detection value BFM 71 to 74 or the upper b13 PP limit error detection value BFM 81 to 84 is not set correctly detection value setting error Correctly set the value again a The addition data BFM 61 to 64 is not set correctly ote CANO Maa Seung eor Set the addition data again in the range from 16000 to 16000 2 Caution regarding error status If the error cause is eliminated the error bit will turn off Do not directly write H0000 in BFM 29 using a sequence program 3 Error status data automatic transfer function b8 of BFM 22 If the error status data automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM 129 the data in BFM 29 can be transferred to the specified data register When an error is detected data will be automatically transferred from 4AD to the PLC For
348. on for determining the PLC version number s BEREIT IATE EE VONESAT E IAR Y EEEE L SOONER PC type and T Version data Example Ver 1 00 version number PC type Example 24 FXan FX3u FX2nc and FXsuc series 2 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the product can be seen from the manufacturer s serial number SERIAL indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product Example FX3U 48MR ES production number 570001 MITSUBISHI PROGRAMMABLE MODEL FXs3u 48MR ES Right side 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 40W OUT 30VDC 240VAC 2A COS 1 SERIAL 570001 Mus LISTED 80M1 IND CONT EQ C ate MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN AOPOPO E B EE E TEE E S E S E SSN Te a Control number Month Example 7 July 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December Year Example 5 2005 last digit of dominical year 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number Use the programming tool having the following version number to create programs for TC ADP GX Developer Ver SW8 P or lat i 1 er or later m SWLID5C GPPW J Ver 8 13P When selecting a model select FX3U C e SWLID5C GPPW E If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used programming will not be possible 1 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A o
349. on is created under the following conditions 1 System configuration FX3U 4DA unit No 0 should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC 2 Output mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 voltage output 10 V to 10 V Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 2 current output O mA to 20 mA 3 Convenient functions The disconnection detection function upper lower limit function corrective function by load resistance and status automatic transfer function are used 4 Device assignment Device Description Clearance of upper lower limit function status data Clearance of error status data Clearance of disconnection detection status data Input Data to be output from channel 1 Data to be output from channel 2 Data to be output from channel 3 Data to be output from channel 4 Output of channel 1 lower limit error data Output of channel 1 upper limit error data Output of channel 2 lower limit error data Output of channel 2 upper limit error data Output of channel 3 lower limit error data Output of channel 3 upper limit error data Output of channel 4 lower limit error data Output Output of channel 4 upper limit error data Output of disconnection detection signal Output of error detection signal Data register at destination of automatic transfer of error status Data register at destination of automatic transfer of upper lower limit function error status Data register at destination of automatic transfer of disconnection detection erro
350. on sets predetermined output patterns as data table and outputs analog signals according to the data table 2 Outline of procedures for table output function Refer to Section 6 2 Data table is prepared in the data registers Preparation of data table D1000 to 7999 or the expansion registers RO to R32767 Refer to Section 6 3 Transfer of data table e The data table is transferred from the PLC main unit to the relevant buffer memory of FX3u 4DA Refer to Section 6 4 Execution of output table _ Setting and execution e Output patterns BFM 81 to 84 of each channel e The numbers of table output execution cycle number BFM 85 to 88 of each channel e Start stop of table output function for each channel command BFM 80 It is possible to write the data table directly in FX3U 4DA using a program TO instruction etc D 38 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 2 Preparation of data table 6 2 Preparation of data table 1 Outline of data table The data table to be prepared in the PLC consists of the following items 1 Number of patterns 1 to 10 patterns 2 Each pattern 3 Number of points in each pattern 1 to 99 points 4 Condition after output at final point in each pattern 5 Points in each pattern 6 Data to be output at each point 7 Output update time at each point 8 Unit of
351. on to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system 1 Up to 7 units can be connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT PLC D 3 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs ddgv dvr nexa Vdar nexas TI dav var nexs M O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld dVv nexs dav OI CWp NeX4 ae ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting to use the FX3uU 4DA follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4DA Refer to Chapter 1 e Outline of system e Version number of compatible PLC e Version number of compatible programming tool Outline Refer to Chapter 2 Check specifications Specifications e Operation environment Refer to the common e Performance specifications pages e Output characteristics System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the analog control common pages Refer to Chapter 3 e Selection of units Wiring e Power supply line e Analog output line Refer to Chapter 4 Analog data output test program Output mode specification e Output mode specification program for channel 1 to 4 Refer to Chapter 5 Buffer memory BFM check Buffer memory e Buffer memory read write method e List of buffer memories e Details
352. or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 gt Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem a Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed O MLld AYt N X4 dav OI CWp NeX4 ae ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS F 9 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of the PT ADP are arranged as follows Signal Application i p A External power OTL L Ground terminal 3 OL L1 Channel 1 platinum 5 olL L1 resistance thermometer OJLL 11 sensor input i L2 Channel 2 platinum J L2 resistance thermometer a oL 2 sensor input 4 O L3 Channel 3 platinum OIL L3 resistance thermometer gt oll 13 sensor input 3 o L4 Channel 4 platinum OL L4 resistance thermometer a Ol j4 sensor input Doo F 10 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 App
353. oreword This manual describes the analog function of the MELSEC F FX Series programmable controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Outline Precautions e This manual provides information for the use of the FX3U Series Programmable Controllers The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel The definition of such a person or persons is as follows 1 Any engineer who is responsible for the planning design and construction of automatic equipment using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role These engineers should be fully aware of all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment 2 Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national st
354. oting PID Instruction FNC 88 6 1 Error Codes MEMO 1 30 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Warranty o Warranty Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautio
355. ounding eener a Er E a E A E 13 4 Programming E 14 4 1 Writing of D A Conversion Data ccx ssccsctc anccensoeaseorssansceteneqeconseannsazene saeeaspacueeteecoseenseeqsemtoreasanentcie E 14 4 2 LISt Ol Special DEVICES uuri a a a a ai E 15 4S OWIGhING OF OUUM Od Giniotis E E 15 4 4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting 0 0 0 0 cecccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeas E 16 Ao OULpul Se Wing Dalai seg unesiaebaaeeeealataladeccesedeee E 16 AOE PPOR AUS Lars ee cedar eae des a uncicadindleaneedbcae tic donl eto eaue Geeta Saas E 17 Aol WIOGEIHG OO Ces ius su sadascansgtrmoetannantaceiasehaanes O Tease tenia edensd sac E 18 AB Basie VO Ghali Example auna load a a a n a a a a a a E 18 5 Changing of Output Characteristics E 19 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics 00 000nn0nnnennnnnnnennnennnennnnnnnsnnrsnnnnenne E 19 6 Troubleshooting E 20 6 1 PEC Version Number CneGksu4 525 2h canines ete eles E a tGen genteel aeee dee ee E 20 0 2 WINE Oe py 2 eer ree are ret oc rnc S ee E 20 6 3 SDEClal DEVICES MC CK arc ek ees es tas eee esac ao ates ewe eg eat teeta ee eaten eae tareacuniec E 20 6A Progrant CG S85 ars ect ier circa cle naar alent natin N E 21 0 9 Eror Status CHECK teat hart acto T T Sotban i bene ahaa E 21 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents F X3u 4AD P T ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 Outline F 3 127 SOU
356. ouple Data Input 4 7 Error Status 4 7 Error Status If an error is detected on TC ADP the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register F The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data B Special data register mI P 2 Description ge i ae ea es KD D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data 59 Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to determine the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors C Bit Description Bit Description 3 The temperature measurement data bO of channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error T range or disconnection is detected 5 The temperature measurement data D b1 of channel 2 is outside the specified b6 TC ADP hardware error range or disconnection is detected x E The temperature measurement data gt b2 of channel 3 is outside the specified b7 TC ADP communication data error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data b3 of channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error 1 Caution regarding use of error status data lf a TC ADP hardware error b6 or TC ADP communication data error b7 is once detected it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at next power on of the PLC For this reason be sure to create
357. output mode is 2 The dotted line is for mode 1 QO 1000 Digital input e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC Insulation method e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog output e Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset lt 15V 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 4mA lt Gain Offset lt 32mA A 26 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 3 Mixed Analog Input Output 4 3 Mixed Analog Input Output SWW9 UOWLUOD 4 3 1 FX2N 5A 1 Analog input oT gt lt gt lt FX2N 5A ec Specifications Ow J Number of output points 4ch EE E 10V to 10V DC 20mA to 20mA DC pee aes 100mV to 100mV DC 4mA to 20mA DC C g Input resistance 200kQ Input resistance 250Q T A 10V to 10V DC 5 32V to 5V DC Offset A00MV to 100mV DC 32mA to 10mA 320mV to 50mV DC D 10V to 10V DC Gai 5V to 32V and Gain Offset gt 1V 10mA to 32mA and 2S ale 100mV to 100mV DC Gain Offset gt 1 mA E 50mV to 320mV and Gain Offset gt 10mA gt
358. outside the specified b6 PTW ADP hardware error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data b2 of channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PTW ADP communication data error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data b3 of channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error 1 Caution regarding use of error status data If a PTW ADP hardware error b6 or PTW ADP communication data error b7 is detected it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at the next power on of the PLC For this reason be sure to create the following program M8002 Error status of 1st analog special adapter RST b6 OFF hardware error D8268 6 Initial pulse Error status of 1st analog special adapter RST b7 OFF communication data error D8268 7 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 6 Error Status 2 Program Example 9 5 D8268 0 000 The temperature measurement data 2 of channel 1 is outside the specified 2 range or disconnection is detected D8268 1 B Yo00 The temperature measurement data ERUS of channel 2 is outside the specified a a range or disconnection is detected On D8268 2 So 002 The temperature measurement data a of channel 3 is outside the specified D8268 3 r
359. perature measurement The temperature measurement data are for reading only Do not change rewrite the current data using the sequence program indicator or device monitor of the programming tool 2 Example of program M8000 pa D8260 D100 Normally ON FNC 12 D8261 D101 Ney 08261 D101 Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101 data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D100 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D101 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt QVr onexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa TI dav var nexs M ld QYY NE X4 O ddv M1d QVt NEXS4 gt O OL AVP NEXA ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 6 Averaging Time 4 6 Averaging Time Setting range 1 to 4095 Initial value K64 Numeric data type Decimal K If the averaging time is set for the TC ADP the averaged temperature measurement data will be stored in the D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 The averaging time can be set for each channel Set the averaging time in the following special data registers Special data
360. pied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 2 gt lt 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution gt 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1 l ta 1V lt Gain Offset lt 15V oz 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 4mA lt Gain Offset lt 32mA L L AYt NEX4 ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS A 25 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 2 5 FX2Nc 4DA 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 2 Analog Output FX2NC 4DA Specifications Voltage output 4ch Number of output points 10V to 10V DC Analog output range External load 2k to 1MQ A a onan Ambient temperature 25 5 C 0 5 100mV for 20V full scale Ambient temperature a 0 to 55 C 1 0 200mV for 20V full scale Does not include any load fluctuation Time required for D A conversion Overall accuracy When the output mode is set to 0 Output characteristics Current output OmA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC External load 500Q or less 20mA to 20mA 13 16mA to 32mA 1 3 10 bits binary 20nA 20mAx1 1000 0 5 100uA for 20mA full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output 1 0 200uA for 20mA full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output 2 1ms The number of selected channels will not affect this value When the
361. put Digital output With sign 16bits binary With sign 15bits binary Item 4 0 32mV 20V 64 000 1 25uA 40mA 32 000 Resolution 2 5mV 20V x 1 8000 5 00uA 40mA x 1 8000 e Ambient temperature 25 C 5 C Ambient temperature 25 C 5 C 0 5 200uA for 40mA full scale Overmiaccusey 0 3 60mV for 20V full scale Same accuracy 200uA for 4mA to 20mA input Ambient temperature 0 C 55 C e Ambient temperature 0 C 55 C 0 5 100mV for 20V full scale 1 400uA for 40mV full scale Same accuracy 400uA for 4mA to 20mA input Time required for 500us x number of selected channels A D conversion If 1 or more channels use the digital filter s Sms x number of selected channels e The photo coupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method The DC DC converter is used to insulate the analog input area from the power supply unit e Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In the direct indication mode however the offset gain cannot be adjusted 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 3 mA lt Gain Offset lt 30 mA 4 If 1 or more channels use the digital filter s the time require
362. put e Flowmeter e Pressure sensor e Signal converter etc Analog output e Inverter etc Temperature sensor input e Thermocouple e Platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 e For a detailed description of the connectable special function blocks and system configuration Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition The analog special function blocks for the FX3U FX2N and FXON shown in the following table can be connected to the FX3U Series PLC FX Series Analog special function blocks for the FX3U Analog special function blocks for the FX2N Analog special function blocks for the FXON FX3U 4AD FX3U 4DA Type FX2N 8AD FX2N 4AD FX2N 2AD FX2N 4DA FX2N 2DA FX2N 5A FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 2LC FXON 3A FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3 2 FX3UC Series PLC 3 2 FX3uc Series PLC SWW9 UOWWLUOD 3 2 1 Connection of special adapters 1 FX3uc D DSS Series PLC Nexs WW a s A C EATE TEN EEN EN ENEN BEN EN EN E E ESN AEN BN N ES ee R a S P p E A PE PO A E E S EA A R AA E E N nS DAS DA A EA nn EE E AENEA AEA EEEL IEE AE ee ee ne ete A K To connect the special function blocks Jor the conversion adapter
363. put value when the output data in BFM 1 to 4 are the reference gain values The reference gain value depends on the set output mode C 1 Reference offset gain value and initial value set 3 Offset channels 1 to 4 Gain channels 1 to 4 S OUipot mOge BEYS BFM 10 to 13 BFM 14 to 17 g Set value Description pollens Initial value mecience Initial value value value Voltage output Voltage output Analog value mV 0 OmV 5000 5000mV 1 specification mode Data change Data change Data change Data change 10 V to 10 V 10000 to 10000 impossible impossible impossible impossible Current output Current output 4 mA to 20 mA 0 to 32000 po ae ee es 0 Current output Analog value uA OuA 10000 10000uA 4 specification mode Data change Data change Data change Data change 0 mA to 20 mA 0 to 20000 impossible impossible impossible impossible Vdar nexa4 2 Offset gain data change Set offset data and gain data to change the output characteristics The offset and gain data can be set for each channel If the voltage output mode is set write the offset and gain data in mV If the current output mode is set write the offset and gain data in uA To change the offset or gain data execute the offset gain setting value write command BFM 9 dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI The setting range is shown in the following table 3 K Voltage output mV Current output uA 5 gt Offset data 10000 to 9
364. r This thermometer will not be affected by voltage drop in the wiring area and will ensure accurate measurement 3 5 Wiring of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor PT ADP Oo 5V Twisted shielded Terminal 4 7kQ 4 7kQ a a 100kQ p ch ee E 100kQ Shield 5V Pt199 Twisted shielded 4 7kQ 4 7kQ cane 100kQ ee eee ee chu ES O THH T ee 100kQ 24 Class D grounding LLJ LLJ ILJ ch LJ represents the channel number 1 Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer sensor from the other power cables or areas easily affected by inductive noise of the commercial power etc 3 6 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below e The grounding resistance should be 100Q or less e Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC Series Other i Other i Other i 3 equipmen a equipmen equipmen Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed e The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible F 13 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa eo gt O aa
365. r lower limit function status cc ecccceccceceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeessaeeesaaeees D 31 5 4 15 BFM 40 Clearance of upper lower limit function status eee cecccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeees D 31 5 4 16 BFM 41 to 44 Lower limit values of upper lower limit function BFM 45 to 48 Upper limit values of upper lower limit function cece eceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees D 32 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents 5 4 17 BFM 50 Setting of output corrective function by load resistance only in voltage output mode BFM 51 to 54 Load resistance values ccceeeeeeeeeees D 33 5 4 18 BFM 60 Status automatic transfer function SETTING cccecceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaaeeeeeesaees D 34 5 4 19 BFM 61 Error status data automatic transfer to data register specification cc0008 D 35 5 4 20 BFM 62 Upper lower limit function status data automatic transfer to data register SCC INC ANON ana ee 6a cong ue wenecotedecuageetta een ent See ances easement ocd D 36 5 4 21 BFM 63 Specification of data register for automatic transfer at disconnection detection D 37 5 4 22 BFM 80 to 3098 Table output FUNCTION 00 0 cecccceeececceeeceseeeeeceeeeceeecesseueessueeessaeeeseaaess D 37 6 Table Output Function D 38 6 1 Outline of Table Output FUNCTION ccccccccccssececceeeeeeceeececceeueecseaecessseueeeseaeseesseseesssueeessana
366. r of connectable analog special adapters l units FX3u FX3uc Series PLC To check the connectable anes PLC model number refer to Section 1 3 Expansion 4th 3rd 2nd 1st board l adapter adapter adapter adapter PA coral aki 7 eee escription of wiring A Analog data A refer to Chapter 3 Platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 For a detailed description DN Special deviees of special devices refer iaeeurenncat Transfer direction 1st adapter M D8260 to M D8269 aa temperature i For a detailed description 2nd adapter M D8270 to M D8279 of a basic program refer Setting eens 3rd adapter M D8280 to M D8289 to Section 4 8 lt ________ Setting of averaging time Ath adapter M D8290 to M D8299 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system 1 The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3uc D DSS PLC G 3 aVv onexs avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa TI dav var nexs M gt ddv Ld QVp Nexs M1d OVt NEXS4 T ddv 88 ONS OL OVP NEXA UOHONSU Aid FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Ther
367. r special function blocks gt 2 Either voltage input or current input can be specified for each channel 5 3 The A D conversion values will be stored in the 4AD buffer memory BFM D 4 Set the digital filter to read out stable A D conversion values i 2 lt 5 For each channel up to 1 700 A D conversion values can be stored as history data 2 O gt Point and section to be Up to 8 units connect to the FX3U FX3UC Series PLC a including other types of special function blocks K ceecee Number of connectable units O P FX3u Series PLC 6 To check the connectable PLC x ceecee model number refer to ad ppan T T i ma Section 1 3 F gt lt z gt gt T 5 s For a detailed description of 4 wiring refer to Chapter 3 G x lt z For a detailed description of gt EEPE analog data reading programs Ta refer to Chapter 4 6 and 7 Ss g For a detailed description of L eae the buffer memory refer to Program Transmission direction Buller memory Section 5 3 and Section 5 4 e FROM FNC 78 BEM O T e TO FNC 79 To use FROM TO instruction 2 Soa aeee or to directly specify the BFM A e BFM direct aq SSSS BEM 6999 refer to Section 5 2 S specification ULI GLI 4 gJ U Refer to the system configuration shown in the FX3u FX3uc User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire sy
368. r status D 57 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs ddgv dvr nexa Vdar nexas TI dav var nexs M O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld dVv nexs dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 8 2 Example of Program using Useful Functions 2 Example of sequence program Initial pulse M8002 Output modes of channels 1 to 4 will be specified 1 RUN monitor Mov M8000 C K50 i FNC 12 H1122 U0 G38 Upper lower limit function settin uova P FNC 16 K 3200 U0 G41 K2 Setting of lower limit values for channels 1 and 2 FMOVE FNC 16 K6400 U0 G43 K2 Setting of lower limit values for channels 3 and 4 FMOVEE FNC 16 k28800 uo G45 K2 Setting of upper limit values for channels 1 and 2 FMOVEE FNC 16 k25600 UO G47 K2 Setting of upper limit values for channels 3 and 4 FMOVEE FNC 12 H0011 UO G50 Corrective function setting by load resistance MOV J FNC 16 K5000 U0 G51 K2 Setting of load resistance values for channels 1 and 2 1 FMOVE ENC 12 Status automatic transfer function setting 1 MOV H0007 UO G60 The initial setting of destination data registers is used P and the sequence program for this function is omitted X000 H0003 UO G40 Clearance of upper lower limit function status data X001 FNC 12 KO U0 G29 Clearance of error status data MOV J X002 ie U0
369. range O gt Digital output 1000 to 6000 1480 to 11120 Resolution 0 2 C to 0 3 C 0 4 F to 0 5 F e 0 5 for full scale when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C Total accuracy e 1 0 for full scale when ambient temperature is in the range from 0 to 55 C A D conversion 200us The data will be updated at every scan time time For a detailed description of data update refer to Section 2 4 TI dav var nexs M Input characteristics ld QYY NEX4 gt 1112 F i 1480 1750 x T gt e The photo coupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC ue The DC DC converter is used to insulate the driving power supply line from the analog Gz Insulation method input area e Channels are not insulated from each other T Number of I O 0 points X points occupied This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC 5 O te 38 Ss S G 7 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 5 This section describes the A D conversion time A D conversion and special data register update timing A D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then
370. rate the analog input line from other power lines or inductive lines 3 Use of current input mode To use the current input mode for a channel be sure to shortcircuit the line between the VL terminal and the ILJ terminal LI channel number of the channel If the line is not shortcircuited data will not be converted into correct digital data For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 6 3 Special Device Check 6 3 Special Device Check 3 3 O Check whether the special devices for the 4AD ADP are being used correctly 1 Input mode switching Check that the special device for switching the input mode is set correctly B Turn off the device to set the input mode to the voltage input mode Turn on the device to set the input mode o to the current input mode a5 RS 2 Input data oo Verify that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel 3 Averaging time Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range The averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set averaging time is outside the specified range an error occurs 4 Error status Check that no error is detected in the 4AD ADP If an error is detected check the details of the error and t
371. rature A 0 to 55 C 0 5 100mV for 20V full scale Includes corrective function by load fluctuation Time required for D A conversion Overall accuracy When the output mode is set to 0 Output characteristics 32000 Current output OmA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC External load 500Q or less OMA to 17mA 3 3mA to 30mA 3 15 bits binary 0 63A 20mAx1 32000 4 0 3 60uA for 20mA full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output 0 5 100uA for 20mA full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output 1ms The number of selected channels will not affect this value When the output mode is 2 The dotted line is for mode 3 O 32000 Digital input e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC Insulation method e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog output e Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In the analog value specification mode however the offset gain cannot be adjusted 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset lt 10V 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 3mA lt Gain Offset lt 30mA 4 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affec
372. relay 1st M8264 M8274 M8284 M8294 Cancel output holding function setting for channel 1 M8265 M8275 mg285 mg295 Cancel output holding function OFF Holds the analog data output setting for channel just before stop of the PLC Cancel output holding function ON Outputs the offset data at M8266 M8276 M8286 M8296 setting for channel 3 stop of the PLC M8267 M8277 M8287 M8297 Cancel output holding function setting for channel 4 1 Example of program To set or cancel the output holding function for a channel create a sequence program as follows Description 1 To set the output holding function for 2 To cancel the output holding function for channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter channel 2 of the 1st analog special adapter M8001 M8000 M8264 aas CD Normally OFF Normally ON 4 5 Output Setting Data Numeric data type Decimal K The 4DA ADP performs D A conversion on the output setting data digital data into analog data and outputs the analog data Use the special data registers shown in the following table for the output setting data Special data register D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel 1 output setting data D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel 2 output setting data D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Channel 3 output setting data D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Channel 4 output setting data 1 Program Example FNC 12 D100 D8260 FALALA FNC 12 D101 D8261 MOV Using the indicator or the sequence program input t
373. ring FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 3 4 Analog Output Wiring 3 4 Analog Output Wiring The analog output mode voltage output or current output can be selected for each channel aaa 2 13 4 9 External power supply FX3U 4DA wiring i F gt isv Class D grounding _L T If voltage output is o selected Shield 73 ee ee eee eee If current output is selected lt i ae A A A o chL LI represents the channel number For FX3U Series PLC AC power type the 24V DC service power supply is also available Do not connect any wires to the terminal Use a 2 core twisted shield wire for analog output wire and separate it from other power lines or inductive lines If there is ripple or noise in the output voltage connect a capacitor of approximately 0 1 to 0 47uF 25V in the vicinity of the signal receiving side Ground the shielded wire at one point on the signal receiving side 3 5 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below e The grounding resistance should be 100Q or less e Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure Other Other ee e ment e ment Ea quip JUPI For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of each Series Other equipment Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition
374. rom the head device specified in S3 20 PID control normal processing The user sets the initial output value before driving the instruction After that the operation result is stored Auto tuning in the limit cycle method Output value The Upper Limit Value ULV or Lower Limit Value LLV value is automatically MV output during auto tuning The specified MV value is output when auto tuning is finished Auto tuning in the step response method The user sets the step output value before driving the instruction The MV value is not changed by PID instruction during auto tuning 1 When auto tuning is not executed for the limit cycle method the same number of devices as those occupied in the step response method become occupied 2 2 Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto Tuning 1 When auto tuning is not executed parameter setting It is necessary to write the set value of the parameters to CS3 6 using MOV instruction in advance etc before starting the PID operation when auto tuning is not executed When data registers in the latch area are backed up against power failure the setting data is held even after the power of the PLC is turned OFF Therefore writing is not necessary when the power is turned back ON 2 When auto tuning is executed The proportional gain CS2 3 integral time CS3 4 and differential time CS3 6 are important constants for executing the auto tuning function described later and
375. rsion Number c ccccccceeccceececseeeeceececseeceseecessueeeseeeeseeeaeeeeaaees C 5 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeesaeeeeeeas C 5 2 Specifications C 6 21 GOMENIC SOCGCIICALIONS nessen T oaths C 6 2 2 POWER OUDDIV SD CCI CANOINS sensei a a aadue Ma eeszoden thea btleas C 7 2 3 PEMOlMANGe SPECIICAHONS essani E E E Gace hedeied A dibcdeas tide ae C 7 24 AD CONVErSIOM TING een eA E E C 8 3 Wiring C 9 O21 ERMA WAY OUE Waccntssaede teers A A eo eodeuteeee canes C 10 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque cccccccceeccseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeseeeeaes C 11 39 POWer SUDPIY al a see ee ne tps net ae De eo oP oO ae ee A C 12 ool OcCOnmeCr lone EX BU Seres PEG rrna a causa aacdectacd C 12 3 9 2 TOCNE tO INE EXSUC Seres PLO sakes sis oe a a Ne ies Da a oe C 12 34 Ahalog INDUE LING ssi r E A E EA C 13 iS Ho am 6 8 g 01 a 0 escorre a E O en ee E ee oe ee C 13 4 Programming C 14 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Dat ccccccccccceseecceeseeeceseeeceeueeesseseessaseesseseessegeeesseneeessaaeees C 14 4 2 LISt Ol Special DEVICES tai certeih sin nda iatcndeatesatt a C 15 A 3 SWILGHING OF MPU MOJE aiii a C 15 AA PUEDA hie sta rotates a cata same bata nan tinge aegne suse nisaatociseavie ecu wae ese see wean One C 16 Ay Averaging TIME acnes E E C 17 AO BETO AU Soe ee a a a a a a C 18 Aol Model GOdE aAa E E
376. rst point When the pattern is not repeated the output update time unit and the point to point interpolation method for the final point are ignored A 4 digit hexadecimal number HOOOO is allocated as shown below Invalid e eum updating time unit Invalid Point to point interpolation method e Setting of output update time unit Set value Output update time unit 0 10 ms 1 100 ms 2 1s 3 1 min Other than above Invalid values e Interpolation method Data output between points are interpolated every 1 ms and automatically updated Set value Interpolation method 0 No interpolation Output data is held to the next point Linear interpolation Data output between points are interpolated in the shape of a straight line S shaped interpolation Data output between points are 2 interpolated in the shape of an S shaped as shown below Other than above Invalid values e S shaped interpolation Output data D 8 Point n 1 Time 7 When a value out of the setting range is set the error code is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on D 41 avr Nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt QVv ONnexs ddgv dvr nexa Vdar nexas dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT M1d QVt NEXS4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3
377. s D8270 to D8279 Sequence program Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8289 Special data registers D8280 to D8289 Special auxiliary relays M8290 to M8299 Special data registers D8290 to D8299 e The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on However in this case do not include the high speed input output special adapter and the communication special adapter FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices If the PTW ADP is connected special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table R Read W Write Special Device number Special M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit ake auxiliary 178261 to M8271 to M8261 to M82911 rela 9 O O O i M8269 M8279 m8289 m8299 UNUSed Do not use D8260 D8270 D8280 p290 CNaNNel 1 temperature measurement data Description Reference Bo avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs D82614 D8274 D82814 pg291_ Channel2 temperature measurement data D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Channels temperature measurement data D8263 D8273 D8283 p8293 CNannel 4 temperature measurement data Averaging time for channel 1 Special D8264 08274 D828
378. s M8290 to M8299 a speciai data registers e The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on However in this case do not include the high speed input output special adapter and the communication special adapter FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices If the PT ADP is connected special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table R Read W Write Special Device number Special M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit ake auxiliary 178261 to M8271 to M8261 to M82911 rela 9 O O O i M8269 M8279 m8289 m8299 UNUSed Do not use D8260 D8270 D8280 p290 CNaNNel 1 temperature measurement data Description Reference Bo avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs D82614 D8274 D82814 pg291_ Channel2 temperature measurement data D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Channels temperature measurement data D8263 D8273 D8283 p8293 CNannel 4 temperature measurement data Averaging time for channel 1 Special D8264 08274 D8284 D8294 oo range 1 to 4095 ata Averaging time for channel 2 register g D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Setting range 1 to 4095 Sedin Averaging time for channe
379. s written as the error source BFM 91 If an error is caused in the data table by directly rewriting the data in BFM after the data table is transferred the error can be detected when the table is output using incorrect data In this case the error code BFM 90 is K112 and the BFM number is written as the error source BFM 91 Error during transfer of the data table While transferring of the data table an error error codes K31 to K33 does not occur even when the BFM 80 table output function start stop is set to a value out of the setting range An error occurs after the completion of the transfer of the data table Error during output of the table Even if the output value is scaled over during output of the table the output of the table will not be stopped However while the output value is scaled over b10 scale over of the error status BFM 29 stays on When an error error codes K122 to K172 K31 to K33 occurs during output of the table the output of the table is cancelled and the analog output value just before the occurrence of the error is retained Table output errors BFM 90 and table output error source numbers BFM 91 are not retained They will be cleared when the next data table transfer command is given or the table output start function is executed D 51 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt QVv ONnexs ddgv dvr nexa Vdar nexas dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav
380. s B 16 Ob ANAO MDAT HNE aaa a E a e R B 17 3A TFA rs 24 D aaa a a A B 17 3A 2 5c is V2 Deen nn ne a a a N B 18 SOUNANT E A A A Tan a aera a B 18 4 Analog Input B 19 Ae ANAO IMPUTP FOCCOUNCS iaren i a esac iat E E EA So hae Sat aaa laa B 19 5 Buffer Memory BFM B 21 5 1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeees B 21 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method ccccccccsseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesseeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeessaaeees B 23 5 2 1 Buffer memory direct specification 20 0 cee ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaseeeeeesaeeeeeesaaaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeesaeeaeees B 23 5 2 2 FROM TO instruction Conventional method cccccceccseeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeesaaneeees B 23 5 3 buUner MeMO LISE BIIM s s22a cc s202cc sees ns scecaaaseuespeasemnstaamanagansemtenncacaiagagnealaGnesehacaseaebenescaemnanese B 24 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory DetallS 62 2 5 6 iehestertretteet cates tetateatceesesbataeieedielstc tat ntitoneidess B 28 5 4 1 BFM 0 Input mode specification eee cece cceceecceceeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeesueeeeseeeeeseeeeseeecesseeesenseeees B 28 64 2 BEM F210 0 Averaging TMG iiciccts utes ates erent ced heats elec cd Reade bleteel Geecdleieanthuieaee illus B 29 5 4 3 BFM 6 to 9 Digital filter SetminG accftces cc c2ht we ales ebneees seaehce aeeecal yaadeze A cnicdes canes eessene eeeeeeeasiaks B 30 544 IBFM 1010 13 Channel Galas
381. s BB so refer to Subsection 3 2 2 1 A represent the connecting positions C For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual supplied with to your PLC gt Refer to the FX3UC Series User s Manual Hardware Edition a Ba IF Analog input E European terminal block eFlowmeter 5 ePressure sensor D FX3u 4AD ADP eSignal converter etc mn C J eS AK gt i N 3 cae E Analog output Cc r European terminal block gt lt Q E elnverter etc EN A gt c FX3u 4DA ADP gt O O v 2 D g F qv a gt 2S ic at is O l gt QD E Temperature sensor Q f input J 79 3 D E European terminal block fe E Tee oat T i ypes K an z coal S FX3u 4AD TC ADP 2 G D gt O N U Aa S Temperature sensor i input European terminal block ePlatinum resistance JE thermometer sensor Pt100 FXsu 4AD PT ADP FXsu 4AD PTW ADP dav navenes ake Micave nexy G a ddv UOHONYSU Qld 88 ONS A 11 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items A 12 2 FX3uc 32MT LT PLC zo 6b _ ab Se iS amp b OQ iS 4 7p b Q 49 Ee 14 ab Q 79 O 49 C Q
382. s PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment Common Items 5 2 Description of Related Manuals The main manuals necessary for the use of analog products are described below These manuals are classified into two groups manuals necessary for the PLC main unit and manuals necessary for analog products The manuals specified as supplied separately are not supplied with the products Other manuals are supplied with the corresponding products 5 2 1 Analog control manuals The following manuals are common manuals that can be used for any of the FX3u FX3uc Series analog products Supplied with Document product or aor Manual type URDE d Description separately FX3U FX3UC Series PLC FX3U FX3uUc Series User s Manual JY997D16701 Analog Control Edition Supplied separately This manual This manual describes the details of the FX3U FX3UC Series PLC analog products 5 2 2 Manuals related to the FX3uU FX3uc Series PLC main unit For a detailed description of the commands to be used for the sequence programs refer to the programming manual For a detailed description of the hardware such as wiring of the PLC main unit refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition Supplied with Document product or Manual type Description number supplied separately Supplied with This manual describes various items necessary for the JY997D18801 pp
383. s are assigned to the 4 channels as shown in the following table and data is stored in the buffer memories in the order of the smallest BFM number to the largest BFM number Use BFM 199 to stop or reset the data history Number of data BFM number eM e ae es 1st 200 1900 3600 5300 2nd 201 1901 3601 4301 3rd 202 1902 3602 4302 1 00th 1899 3599 5299 6999 Caution regarding data history reading If a large amount of history data is collectively read out to the PLC main unit using the FROM instruction the watchdog timer error may occur in the PLC main unit Therefore when programming separate the history data and then read it out using the FROM instruction Set WDT watchdog timer refresh instruction between the separated data FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Changing Input Characteristics FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 6 1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics re 6 Changing Input Characteristics Q O 3 O T 3 e2 For the 4AD the standard input characteristics are provided for each input mode BFM 0 at the time of factory shipment F Changing the offset data BFM 41 to 44 or gain data BFM 51 to 54 however can change the input ce characteristics of each channel This chapter describes how to change the input characteristics PE J 6 1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics e lt E 1 Determine the input mode BF
384. scription refer to Section B e FX3U 4AD ADP For detailed description refer to Section C Other Series Analog input products e FX2NC 4AD e FX2N 4AD e FX2N 5A e FX2N 8AD e FX2N 2AD e FXON 3A For a detailed description of the other analog input products refer to the corresponding manuals 1 1 2 Analog output control Output the voltage current signal from the PLC to an inverter etc to control the inverter frequency etc Inverter etc FX3U FX3UC Series PLC i Voltage or D A conversion data Analog output current special function block or special a adapter Output the frequency data The frequency will be from the PLC changed depending on the input voltage current To determine whether or not a unit can be connected to the PLC refer to Chapter 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Analog output products for FX3u Series e FX3U 4DA For detailed description refer to Section D e FX3U 4DA ADP For detailed description refer to Section E FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Introduction Common Items 1 1 Outline and Features of Analog Control Other Series Analog output products e FX2NC 4DA e FX2N 2DA e FXON 3A e FX2N 4DA e FX2N 5A For a detailed description of the other analog output products refer to the corresponding manuals 1 1 3 Temperature sensor
385. scription of the test program refer to Chapter 4 B 62 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input avr Nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt gt lt oO 2 gt gt FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input Vdr nexs w dadY dYr N X4 TI aovvornex M O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld dVv nexs ddv L x T gt 25 a Foreword 5 This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for the FX3U 4AD ADP special I adapter 4 channel analog input and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit 5 Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward SE it to the end user 62 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION C 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 1 1 Outline of Functions OO 1 Outline
386. section current mode selection a ee mal 5 4 9 29 Error status H0000 A r mal 5 4 10 30 Model code K3030 K3030 Decimal or 1 If power failure occurs the EEPROM will retain the data 2 Specify the output mode of each channel setting one of hex code 0 to 4 and F in each digit 3 Specify the data to be output from each channel upon PLC stop setting one of hex code 0 to 2 in each digit 4 Use bO to b3 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output Q O 5 BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference 5 O Data to be output from channel 1 upon PLC stop Depending on the 3 1 D 32 Valid only if BFM 5 HOOO2 gama 433 Data to be output from channel 2 upon PLC stop Depending on the KO Decimal B Valid only if BEM 5 HOO2O0 mode used Subsection z z P Data to be output from channel 3 upon PLC stop Depending on the a Dadl 5 4 12 z 2 34 Valid only if BFM 5 HO200 mode used RS O Data to be output from channel 4 upon PLC stop Depending on the 1 35 Valid only if BFM 5 H2000 mode used ae DeciNal ae z Hexadeci Subsection u 38 Upper lower limit function setting H0000 5413 A iN 39 Upper lower limit function status H0000 men geeen SUNSECUON s mal 5 4 14 2 F U 40 Clear of upper lower limit function status 3 H0000 pee eee alert nee
387. sed it is not necessary to set the output mode and the waiting time TO K50 D 59 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs ddgv dvr nexa Vdar nexas dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT M1d QVt NEXS4 dav DI CWP NeX4 ae ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output i D100 0 a Uo G80 X000 M1 m FNC 12 H0101 UO G80 MOV B X001 M1 FNC 12 H og 0000 UO G80 X002 M1 FNC 12 H0100 UO G80 r Vov gg 0 9 voseo FNC 228 aioe LD lt gt Execute the data table transfer command as a pulse execution type instruction D 60 8 Examples of Practical Programs 8 3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation Pattern Output Operation Channel 1 output pattern Channel 3 output pattern Number of repetitions of output of table from channel 1 Number of repetitions of output of table from channel 3 Number of head device in data table Data table transfer command Readout of data table transfer command Turning on of MO At the completion of transfer of data table Start table output function channel 3 Turning on of M1 when table is output from channel 3 Start table output function channel 1 Stop table output function Turning off of M1 when output of table from channel 3 is stopped Restart of table output function channel 3 Turning on of M1 when table is outpu
388. si icc ceks sacle ie a aa a Ea Shad chant aE EE B 31 543 BEM 19 Data change disable scat cee ek ele re B 32 5 4 6 BFM 20 Initialization function resetting to factory default status cc eceeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeees B 32 5 4 7 BFM 21 Input characteristics Writing cccccccccecsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeesaaaaeess B 32 5 4 8 BFM 22 Convenient function SETtING cccceeecccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeeeeesaeeeeesseeeeesaaaesess B 33 5 4 9 BFM 26 Upper lower limit error Status ccccccccesecceceeeeesseeceeeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeseaeeeseeeeseueesaeeeees B 35 5 4 10 BFM 27 Abrupt change detection Status ccc cc cecccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesseeeeeeesseeeeeesaaeeees B 36 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents 5411 BFM 26 OverscCale Status nrc eee A ee ese eee B 37 S54 12 BIW 9 Emor Stall Saa eben cca t yen stn s ut cea cuted aae tuum eatnnabantecmuastau ae iuace baal B 38 DAT BEMH39 Mod l OC 5s can i eS ih hh LN Ie AS ak tt Ae Joe ho B 39 5 4 14 BFM 41 to 44 Offset data BFM 51 to 54 Gain data 00 0 0 cecccccecceceeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeaneees B 39 5 4 15 BFM 01 to 64 Addition date sscan eee eit E E TEE B 40 5 4 16 BFM 71 to 74 Lower limit error setting BFM 81 to 84 Upper limit error setting B 41 5 4 17 BFM 91 to 94 Abrupt change detection value Setting ccccccc
389. son select an appropriate cable while referring to the external view Insulation sleeve Contact area Crimp area Manufacturer CRIMPFOX ZA 3 oe 0 55 Phoenix Contact or CRIMPFOX UD 6 dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI 3 Tool gt 2 lt e To tighten terminals use a small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in e the figure to the right gt U Note Gs If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not H be able to be achieved Use the following recommended screwdriver or o an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm straight X Manufacturer Model 5 O Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 0 4m 25mm ba 0 01 gt lt 6 09 5 U O gS S FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 3 Wiring 3 3 Power Supply Line 3 3 Power Supply Line Connect the 24V DC power supply line of the 4AD ADP to the 24 and 24 terminals of the terminal block 3 3 1 To connect to the FX3u Series PLC 1 To use an External power supply 2 To use the 24V DC power of the PLC seal FX3uU Series PLC a eat FX3U Series PLC 15V Main unit 15V Main unit oe VA fs Terminal block 2E Terminal block Class D Class D 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line e Ground the terminal to a class D grounded power supply line 1009 or less
390. special adapter s to the left side of the FX3uc D DSS Series PLC e Up to 4 analog special adapters can be connected Analog special adapters PLC oq000000000 5 I 38 BOS oo0oo0o0000000 3 5 ooo00l ALJ E ooo00l Up to 4 Analog adapters can be connected For a detailed description of the system configuration refer to the PLC User s Manual Hardware Edition FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2 1 Types of Analog Products 3 FX3UC 32MT LT PLC e Connect the special adapter s to the left side of the FX3UCc 32MT LT PLC e An expansion board is needed to connect the special adapter s e Up to 4 analog special adapters can be connected sw UOWWOD Analog special adapters Expansion board B Tl TI gt lt gt lt ele SA se SHI SE ee i i 20 ol ol HEILE a Ks ee ia FX3u BD C x T gt Up to 4 Analog adapters can be connected represents 422 232 485 CNV or USB For a detailed description of the system configuration refer to the PLC User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 1 2 Special function block gt x lt oo The special function block uses buffer memory BFM to send receive data to from the PLC E gt 1 FX3u Series PLC e Connect the special fun
391. st Program If the above mentioned remedies cannot solve the problem initialize FX3U 4DA and then check the conditions of the FX3U 4DA using the test program For a detailed description of FX3u 4DA initialization program refer to Subsection 8 4 For a detailed description of the test program refer to Chapter 4 D 64 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output avr Nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt QVv ONnexs FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output Vdr nexs UO ddagv dvr nexa TI dav var nex4 O ddv MLd GVv Nexs ld GVv nexs ddv L x T gt eS Foreword a This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation method for the FX3U 4DA ADP special I adapter 4 channel analog output and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the x unit 5 Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward SE it to the end user 68 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION E 1 F
392. stem l I 1 Up to 7 units can be connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT PLC a SS 5S B 3 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting to use the 4AD follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD Refer to Chapter 1 _ e Outline of system e Version number of compatible PLC e Version number of compatible programming tool Outline Refer to Chapter 2 Check of specifications Specifications e Operation environment Refer to the common e Performance specifications pages e Input characteristics System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the analog control common pages Refer to Chapter 3 e Selection of units Wiring e Power supply line e Analog input line Refer to Chapter 4 Analog data reading test program Input mode specification e Input mode specification program for channel 1 to 4 Refer to Chapter 5 Buffer memory BFM check Buffer memory e Buffer memory read write method e List of buffer memories Refer to Chapter 6 e Details of buffer memory Adjustment of input characteristics Adjustment of input characteristics e Input characteristics change procedure Refer to Chapter 7 Program edit Program edit e Basi
393. t 99 Device number where the number of patterns is specified The number of points in the data table that is held in the K122 buffer memory does not meet the following requirement 1 lt Number of points lt 99 The condition after output at final point in pattern Device number where the condition after specified in the data table that is held in the PLC is not 0 the final point output point in pattern is or 1 specified Number of BFM where the number of points is specified K131 The condition after output at final point in pattern K132 specified in the data table that is held in the buffer memory is not 0 or 1 Number of BFM where the condition after output point in the pattern is specified The output update time in the data table that is held in the K151 PLC does not meet the following requirement 1 lt Output update time lt 32767 Device number where the output update time is specified The output update time in the data table that is held in the K152 buffer memory does not meet the following requirement 1 lt Output update time lt 32767 K161 The output update time unit in the data table that is held Device number where the output update in the PLC is not 0 1 2 or 3 time unit is specified Number of BFM where the output update time is specified The interpolation method in the data table that is held in Number of BFM where the interpolation K172 l EN the buffer memory is not 0 1 or 2 method is speci
394. t Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 PID operation is started gt The variation of the measured value PV is small compared with the output value Multiply the measured value PV by 10 so that the variation of the measured value will increase during auto tuning lt Limit cycle method gt 6757 Auto tuning result exceeds proportional gain KP Out of range from 0 to 32767 lt Limit cycle method gt lt Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 PID operation is 6758 Auto tuning result exceeds integral time started gt Tl Out of range from 0 to 32767 The auto tuning time is too long Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and lt Limit cycle method gt the lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller 6759 Auto tuning result exceeds derivative time value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller value to the TD Out of range from 0 to 32767 PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check whether the result is improved Caution With regard to the measured value PV in PID normal measurement data should be read before PID operation begins Especially when the PID operation is executed to the input value in an analog input block pay attention to the conversion time dav dav OL OYH NEX4 la Mid Ovb nex4 Q id ave nexd TI aav var nexs M gt O z UONONISUI did 88 ONS l 29 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troublesho
395. t Characteristics 2 Determine the input characteristics to be changed Determine the digital value to be output according to the input voltage current Example To output digital values in the range from 0 to 32000 by inputting the voltage in the range from 1V DC to 5V DC Input mode O Input characteristics provided at the time Input characteristics newly provided of factory shipment Digital value Digital value OZ OG eccanrre ries ed 32000 Prica 432000 cee Gain reference value 16000 Gain reference value 16000 10 2 V Input voltage _40y 0 Offset reference value 0 5V 10V Input voltage 1V 3V 5V 10 2 V Fe ar 32000 ean eee 32640 3 Determine the offset data Determine the analog input value offset data for digital output value of 0 Set the analog input value in mV for the voltage input mode and set the analog input value in uA for the current input mode Example To set the offset value of 1 V set 1 000 mV For a detailed description of offset data refer to Subsection 5 4 14 4 Determine the gain data Determine the analog input value so that the digital output value is equal to the gain reference value of each input mode The following table shows the gain reference value of each input mode Numeric value 0 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 16000 5000mV Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 2000 5000mV Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 16000 20000nA 1 3 6 T7 Input mode
396. t from channel 3 Readout table output completion flag and table output error Completion of table output from channel 1 Output to YOOO Output to Y001 when table output error occurs FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 8 4 Program to Initialize FX3U 4DA Factory Default 8 4 Program to Initialize FX3U 4DA Factory Default g 3 To initialize FX3U 4DA execute the following program This will return the output mode BFM 0 the offset data BFM 10 to 13 and the gain data BFM 14 to 3 17 will be to the factory default status state B 1 Conditions ee The sequence program described in this section is under the following conditions ee Sg 1 System configuration bs FX3U 4DA unit No 0 should be connected to the FX3u Series PLC a 2 Device assignment C Device Description a X000 4AD initialization command a X gt 2 Example of sequence program g 4DA initialization command X000 FNC 12 K1 U0 G20 The 4DA will be initialized Mov B BFM 0 to 3098 will be cleared 3 Cautions regarding initializing var NeX4 During initialization output is stopped and HOOOO is automatically written in the output status BFM 6 At the completion of initialization the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and the output will be restarted It takes approximately 5 seconds to complete initialization Do not set writ
397. t grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC Series Other Other Other i equipmen equipmen equipmen 3 quip ps quipr quip Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed e The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible H 14 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data re g 3 3 4 Programmin 7 ogra g z r This chapter describes how to create programs that can read out the analog data using the TC ADP B gt lt x 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data p J 1 The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX3U FX3UC Series PLC C 2 If data is stored in the special devices the averaging time can be set and the input mode can be V specified 2 gt 3 Special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned automatically 5 starting from the adapter nearest to the main unit 5 For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Subsection 4 2 Communi High speed D FXsu 4AD FX3u 4AD FXsu 4AD special FXsu 4AD
398. t the resolution A 24 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 2 Analog Output 4 2 4 FX2N 4DA Q 5 S FX2N 4DA aj Specifications 3 Voltage output Current output Number of output points 4ch B 410V to 10V DC OmA to 20mA DC RR Analog output range External load 2k to 1MQ 4mA to 20mA DC i External load 500Q or less bS O Offset 5V to 5V12 20mA to 20mA 1 3 Gain 15 V or less and 32 mA or less and Gain Offset gt 1V Gain Offset gt 4mA C Digital output With sign 12 bits binary 10 bits binary x E Resolution 5mV 10Vx1 2000 1 20uA 20mAx1 1000 4 0 gt 1 0 200m V for 20V full scale 1 0 200uA for 20mA full scale s Overall accuracy Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output Does not include any load fluctuation D aime requiren oroa 2 1 ms The number of selected channels will not affect this value os conversion E O gt When the output mode is set to 0 When the output mode is 2 The dotted line is for mode 1 Output characteristics Analog output S gt IN gt O 1000 Digital input e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog output e Channels are not insulated from each other dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI Number of I O points occu
399. ta Input 4 5 Averaging Time 4 5 Averaging Time Setting range 1 to 4095 Initial value K1 Numeric data type Decimal K If the averaging time is set for the PTW ADP the averaged temperature measurement data will be stored in the D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 The averaging time can be set for each channel Set the averaging time in the following special data registers Special data register D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 data D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel 3 data D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel 4 data 1 Cautions regarding averaging time setting Description e Ifthe averaging time is set to 1 the immediate data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register e Ifthe averaging time is set to 2 or more the average value will be calculated in accordance with the set averaging time and the average value obtained will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register e After turning the PLC power on the average data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data registers D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 until the number of data items is increased to the set averaging time e Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set value is outside the setting range the error s
400. tails of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 18 BFM 99 Clearance of upper lower limit error data and abrupt change detection data Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Q O 3 O T 3 e2 Three error data clearance commands lower limit error data clearance command upper limit error data clearance command and abrupt change detection data clearance command are respectively assigned to the 3 lower bits of BFM 99 v Turning on each bit batch turning on for all channels will reset the corresponding error status flag 26 or ce 27 of BFM kz w 1 BFM 99 bits command assignment bO Lower limit error data clearance command BFM 26 b1 Upper limit error data clearance command b2 Abrupt change detection data clearance command BFM 27 Two or more data clearance commands can be turned on at the same time 2 Operation after resetting BFM 26 27 Each bit will turn off automatically Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa 5 4 19 BFM 101 to 104 Minimum peak value BFM 111 to 114 Maximum peak value Numeric data type Decimal K The minimum channel data channels 1 to 4 value written to BFM 10 to 13 will be written to BFM 101 to 104 as the minimum peak value and the maximum channel data value will be written to BFM 111 to 114 as the maximum peak value 1 Caution regarding peak value To use the minimum peak value and the maximum peak value be sure to turn on the peak value holding
401. te the power supply from the analog inputs e Channels are not insulated from each other 0 points This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS A 31 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 4 3 FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input Specifications Number of input points Input signal Rated temperature range Digital output Resolution Overall accuracy Time required for conversion Input characteristics Insulation method Number of I O points occupied A 32 Centigrade C e Type K 100 C to 1000 C e Type J 100 C to 600 C e Type K 1000 to 10000 e Type J 1000 to 6000 e Type K 0 4 C e Type J 0 3 C 0 gt Temperature FX3U 4AD TC ADP Fahrenheit F 4ch Thermocouple type K or J JIS C 1602 1995 e Type K 148 F to 1832 F Type J 148 F to 1112 F Type K 1480 to 18320 e Type J 1480 to 11120 e Type K 0 72 F e Type J 0 54 F 0 5 for full scale 1 C 200us Data updated every scan time e Type K O o Ts gt 1000 Temperature 0 gt 1832 F Temperature 1480 166 F 600 C e The photocoupler is used to insulate the
402. tem FX3U 4AD PT ADP Refer to Chapter 1 Outline of system eCompatible PLC version number eCompatible programming tool version Refer to Chapter 2 number Outline Specifications check Specifications eOperation environment ePerformance specifications elnput characteristics Refer to the common pages System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control eSelection of units Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring ePower supply line ePlatinum resistance thermometer sensor line Refer to Chapter 4 Programming Programming eDetails of special devices eExamples of basic programs lf the error status data or the input digital value is abnormal refer to Chapter 5 Troubleshooting FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number 9 PT ADP is compatible with the following PLC 5 Compatible PLC Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later After May 2005 initial production B FX3uc Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later After August 2004 xx ST So J 1 Version check Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version a ey ee ee os fo ee gt P
403. ten in the output status BFM 6 At the completion of writing the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and the output will be restarted Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 5 10 to 17 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3uU 4DA Do not turn off power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 Therefore when creating a program do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories BFM FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 8 BFM 20 Initialization function resetting to factory default status O 3 3 Setting range KO or K1 Initial value KO Numeric data type Decimal K When K1 is set in BFM 20 all functions and all buffer memory BFM 0 to 3098 will be initialized to the B default status wo When BFM 20 is not KO or K1 this function is invalid The settings will not be changed and the functions ce will not be initialized PE J 1 Cautions regarding initialization function e During initialization output is stopped and HOOOO is automatically written in the output status BFM 6 C e At the completion of initialization the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and a output will be restarted e Ittakes appro
404. terpolation Se T gt BV 4 gt 9 gt Point 1 VA tcl ac E E Vdar nexas Time Output update Output update Output update time at point 1 time at point 2 time at point 3 1800 ms 2600 ms 500 ms 6 Caution when preparing the data table e Prepare the data table in continuous data registers in the PLC main unit or continuous expansion registers Prepare data without spaces between patterns or points If data has spaces the data cannot be transferred normally to the buffer memory in FX3U 4DA For a detailed description of data table errors refer to Section 6 5 dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS D 43 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory 6 3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory D 44 The data table prepared in the data registers D1000 to D7999 in the PLC or the expansion registers RO to R32767 are transferred to the buffer memory in FX3U 4DA The transfer procedures are shown below Specify the head device number of the data table to be transferred BFM 98 initial value K1000 Specify the head device number of the data table in BFM 98 The setting range is K1000 to K7994
405. the 1st adapter to D100 and D101 respectively The averaging time is set to 1 immediate data for channel 1 and 5 for channel 2 oo RST D8268 6 RST D8268 7 M8002 Error status of 1st analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error Error status of 1st analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error Sets the temperature unit to centigrade C M8001 M8002 Sets the averaging time to 1 for channel 1 data Sets the averaging time to 5 for channel 2 data Stores the current value of the channel 1 temperature measurement data in the D100 Stores the average value of the channel 2 temperature measurement data in the D101 M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D100 MOV FNC 12 Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101 data register D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction G 20 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 1 PLC Version Number Check re g 3 i 3 5 Troubleshooting 5 r a This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status B If the temperature measurement data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the following yy items a K e Version number of the PLC gt O e Wiring e Special devices C e Programs y e Error status is gt i 5 1 PLC
406. the corresponding buffer memory BFM 10 to 13 for channels 1 to 4 e Digital filter value BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 lt Fluctuation of analog signal If the fluctuation of the analog signal input value is more than the set digital filter value the digital output value will follow the analog input value and the digital output value equal to the analog input value will be stored in the corresponding buffer memory BFM 10 to 13 for channels 1 to 4 Analog input value Digital output value The digital output value will follow the analog input value Set digital filter value Set digital filter value Analog input value Converted into stabilized digital output value Fluctuation width is less than 10 times of sampling Time The relation between the set value and the corresponding operation is shown in the following table Set value Operation Less than 0 Disables the digital filter function A setting error will occur 611 of BFM 29 will be set to ON 0 Disables the digital filter function 1 to 1600 Enables the digital filter function 1601 or more Disables the digital filter function A setting error will occur 611 of BFM 29 will be set to ON 1 Application If the measurement signal contains steep spike noise use the digital filter instead of the averaging function The digital filter produces more stabilized data results 2 Cautions regarding digital filter setting e To use the digit
407. the digital filter function Set value ms in BFM 198 x number of selected 10 or more channels number of channels using the digital filter function 1 Only multiples of 5 are valid If any value from 10 to 14 is set the sampling cycle will be 10 ms If any value from 15 to 19 is set the sampling cycle will be 15 ms 2 Caution regarding use of data history function If the averaging time is set the data history function cannot be used 3 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM For a detailed description of cautions regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 28 BFM 199 Data history resetting stoppage Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Q O 3 O T 3 e2 The data history resetting function and the data history stoppage function are assigned to the bits of BFM 199 1 Data history resetting function b0 to b3 The sampled history data can be reset for each channel Turn on a bit to reset all the history data 1st to 1 700th of the corresponding channel Note that two or more bits can be turned on at a time When the data reset is complete the corresponding bit will turn off automa
408. the following program M8002 Error status in the 1st analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error RST D8268 6 Initial pulse day G eave nexs TI aavvarnexa ITI Error status in the 1st analog special adapter D8268 57 OFF communication data error RST MLld AYt N X4 gt O OL AVP NEXA ddv UONONISU id 88 ONS H 19 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input H 20 2 Example of program D8268 0 D8268 1 D8268 2 D8268 3 D8268 4 D8268 5 D8268 6 D8268 7 330000006 4 Programming 4 7 Error Status The temperature measurement data of channel 1 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of channel 2 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of channel 3 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of channel 4 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected EEPROM error in 1st adapter Averaging time setting error in ist adapter TC ADP hardware error in 1st adapter TC ADP communication data error of the 1st adapter FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 8 Model Code 4 8 Model Code Initial
409. the input output characteristics depend on the selected mode 5 If 1 or more channels use the digital filter s the time required for A D conversion will be 5 ms x number of selected channels A 20 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 7 FX2N 8AD O 5 O FX2N 8AD Specifications 5 Number of input points 8ch B 10V to 10V DC ee py Analog input range Input resistance 200 kQ 4mA to 20mA DC 22 Input resistance 250 Q ice PO Offset 10V to 9V 1 2 20mA to 17mA 1 3 C Gain 9V to 10V 1 2 17mA to 30mA 1 Digital output With sign 15 bits binary With sign 14 bits binary a 4 0 63mV 20Vx1 32000 2 50uA 40mAx1 16000 gt Resolution 2 5mV 20Vx1 8000 2 00uA 16mAx1 8000 e gt O Ambient temperature 0 3 120uA for 40mA full scale 14 0 5 25 5 C BO AO VIVE MOR AUV TUL Gale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input D Ambient temperature F 0 5 200uA for 40mA full scale T 3 0 to 55 C A OC Ore U Scaip Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input S Time required for A D 5 agiwenster 500us x number of selected channels When the input mode is set to 0 When the input mode is set to 6 Input characteristics 4 dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 ddv 0 4mA 20mA L e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method
410. this reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened L Represents a numeric value Convenient function setting ON Valid Transfer from memory oa D eee a ait BFM 22 b8 ON BFM 29 DO Automatic data transfer function B 38 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 13 BFM 30 Model code Initial value K2080 Numeric data type Decimal K K2080 fixed value is stored as the model code 5 4 14 BEM 41 to 44 Offset data BEM 51 to 54 Gain data Setting range See below Initial value See below Numeric data type Decimal K If the input mode is specified in BFM 0 the offset data and the gain data of each channel will be automatically stored The initial offset data and gain data are set for each mode as shown in the following table e Offset data Analog input value when the digital value is 0 reference offset value e Gain data Analog input value when the digital value is equal to the reference gain value The reference gain value depends on the set input mode 1 Reference offset gain value and initial value set at delivery Offset Gain Input mode BFM 0 Channels 1 to 4 BFM 41 to Channels 1 to 4 BFM 51 to 44 54 Set ee Reference one Reference oe Description Initial value Initial value value v
411. tically dyr NEXd dyr oNeX4 2 Data history stoppage function b8 to b11 Data sampling can be temporarily stopped for each channel Turn on a bit to temporarily stop sampling history data for the corresponding channel Note that two or more bits can be turned on at a time Turn off the bit to restart sampling of history data 3 Function assignment to each bit of BFM 199 Bit No Channel number Description Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa Pp Data history resetting function z 3 b4 to b7 Not used Pe 510 Data history stoppage function b12 to b15 Not used 4 Caution regarding data history resetting e When a bit is turned on the corresponding data history will be reset dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS B 49 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 29 BFM 200 to 6999 Data history B 50 Initial value KO Numeric data type Decimal K Use this function to sample the A D conversion data of each channel and to write the sampled data to the buffer memories The 4AD can sample up to 1 700 points of A D conversion data of each channel at the sampling cycle specified in BFM 198 and can store the sampled data as history data in the buffer memories as shown in the following table Buffer memorie
412. ting the terminals it is impossible to obtain the correctly converted digital values For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 4 8 3 Program Check Check the program as follows 1 Storage devices Check whether the device holding digital values contains any values written by other programs 2 Setting of averaging time and digital filter function Check if the averaging time or the digital filter function is set for the same channel It is not possible to set both functions for the same channel B 60 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 8 4 Error Status Check 8 4 Error Status Check If an error occurs in the 4AD the corresponding bit of BFM 29 error status buffer memory will turn on To solve the problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below bO Error detection be Data setting error detection b1 b2 Power supply error Averaging time setting error b3 b11 Digital filter setting error b4 Abrupt change detection value setting error b5 BAB Upper lower limit detection setting error b7 ee ee Addition data setting error 1 Error detection b0 1 Description of error If any bits from b2 to b4 are turned on this bit bO will turn on Q O 3 O T 3 e2 dyr NEXd dyr oNeX4 Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa 2 Power supply error b2 1 Description of error The 24 V power is
413. tion Before starting analog input using the 4AD ADP follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4AD ADP Refer to Chapter 1 Outline of system e Compatible PLC version number e Compatible programming tool version number Outline Refer to Chapter 2 Specifications check Specifications e Operation environment e Performance specifications Refer to the e Input characteristics common pages System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control e Selection of units Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring e Selection of sensor cable e Power supply line Refer to Chapter 4 e Analog input line Programming e Details of special devices e Examples of basic programs Programming Refer to Chapter 5 Changing of input characteristics Method of input characteristics change e How to use scaling instruction If the error status data or the input analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 6 Troubleshooting FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number 3 3 The 4AD ADP is compatible with the following PLCs 3 Compatible PLC Date of production B FX3U Series PLC After May 2005 initial production Bu FX3uc Series PLC After April 2004 Oo gt rU J 1 Version check Spec
414. tion FNC 88 5 2 Program example of auto tuning step response method and PID control S 3 3 Auto tuning ON flag 2 H FNC 12 Auto tuning operation is 3 D511 K2M10 confirmed Auto tuning ON flag B M14 uy PLF Auto tuning is finished ae KS gt O Auto tuning is finished M2 RST The normal operation is started C PID operation is executed 2 M3 2 T246 Heater operation cycle gt K2000 T J Heater operation cycle X T246 D RST T246 Preset PID operation gt is executed M3 T246 lt D502 PID operation is executed E FNC226 T246 D502 Yo21 Heater output ig UJ P Error flag 5 M8067 2 020 Error occurs F ae gt lt 2 A END 2 53 d MLld AYt N X4 G ddv L L AYt NEX4 gt O z UONONISUI did 88 ONS l 25 F X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method PID Instruction FNC 88 5 3 Program example of auto tuning step response method 5 3 Program example of auto tuning step response method Auto tuning is started si The target value is set to 50 C MOVP rar ON Tor tee Ne ieee time Ts is set oooO K 70 aT filter constant a is set con gain KD is set ON limit is set WOON n limit is set PLS Auto tuning is started Auto tuning is started MO SET PID instruction operation Initial pulse M8002 ENC 79 The mode of FX2N 4AD TC is set TO Ch 2 Ktype Ch 4 Unused RUN monitor M8000 FNC 78
415. tion function BFM 20 e Input characteristics writing BFM 21 To enable data change K2080 To disable data change Value other than K2080 Subsection 4 19 9 4 5 e Convenient functions BFM 22 K2080 at delivery Decimal e Offset data BFM 41 to 44 e Gain data BFM 51 to 54 e Automatic transfer to data register specification BFM 125 to 129 e Data history sampling time setting BFM 198 Initialization function Set K1 in this buffer memory to perform paid aides oe l Se ae Subsection 20 initialization At the completion of initialization KO or K1 KO Decimal 5 4 6 buffer memory will be automatically reset to KO Input characteristics writing Write the input characteristics offset gain value Keadecis Supeccion 21 At the completion of writing buffer memory will 3 H0000 mal 547 be automatically reset to H0000 b0 to b3 Di OFF 1 If power failure occurs the EEPROM will retain its data 2 To specify the input mode of each channel set each digit using hexadecimal numbers 0 to 8 and F 3 Use bO to b3 B 24 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference Convenient function setting Convenient functions Automatic send 221 function data addition upper lower limit 2 H000
416. to 16000 Averaging time For all the channels the averaging time should be set to 1 default To use the default value it is not necessary to set the averaging time in the sequence program Digital filter function For all channels the digital filter function should be disabled default To use the default value it is not necessary to set the digital filter function in the sequence program Convenient functions The upper lower limit detection function upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer function over scale status data automatic transfer function and error status data automatic transfer function should be used Device assignment Device Description input Clearance of upper lower limit error data Clearance of over scale data Output of channel 1 lower limit error data Output of channel 1 upper limit error data Output of channel 2 lower limit error data Output of channel 2 upper limit error data Output of channel 3 lower limit error data Output of channel 3 upper limit error data Output of channel 4 lower limit error data Output of channel 4 upper limit error data Output of channel 1 over scale lower limit data Output of channel 1 over scale upper limit data Output of channel 2 over scale lower limit data Output of channel 2 over scale upper limit data Output Output of channel 3 over scale lower limit data Output of channel 3 over scale upper limit data Output of channel 4 over scale lower limit
417. to 4 to be output to channels 1 to 4 are transferred from DO to D3 Unit number step 1 4 Transfer of sequence program and analog output signal check 1 Transfer the sequence program and start the PLC 2 Check that analog signals appropriate to the set output data are output If analog signals are not output correctly refer to Chapter 9 Troubleshooting D 14 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output ee 5 Buffer Memory BFM This chapter describes the buffer memory incorporated in FX3U 4DA 5 1 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory 1 Assignment of unit numbers Unit numbers from 0 to 7 will be assigned to the special function units blocks starting from the left one When the units blocks are connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT PLC unit numbers from 1 to 7 are assigned When connected to the FX3U FX3uUc D DSS Series PLC Unit Unit number 0 number 1 Input output extension block Input output extension block Special Special function block function block Main unit When connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT PLC Unit number 0 Incorporated Unit Unit CC Link LT number 1 number 2 Input output extension block Main unit FX3UCc 32MT Input output extension Special Special function block function block LT block U
418. tranded single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve gt e To directly terminate the end of a stranded single wire cable Termination of cable end Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude MMM Do not solder plate the end of the cable 9mm 0 35 e To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve If the cable cover is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into Insulation sleeve Contact area the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while Crimp area referring to the external view Manufacturer CRIMPFOX ZA 3 0 1 70 55 Phoenix Contact or CRIMPFOX UD 6 3 Tool e To tighten terminals use a small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in day G eave nexs TI aavvarnexa ITI the figure to the right x C K Note S If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not Ss be able to be achieved Use the following recommended screwdriver or ee a an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm straight Manufacturer Model v Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 ddm gt Smm 5 l l 0 01 0 09 ory 70 09 3 gJ U U O2 gs FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 3 Wiring 3 3 Power Supply Line 3 3 Power Supply Line Connect the 24V DC power supply line of the
419. ts occupied Voltage input 10V to 10V DC Input resistance 200kQ 0 32mV 20Vx1 64000 2 5mV 20Vx1 8000 0 3 60mV for 20V full scale 0 5 100mV for 20V full scale Current input 20mA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC Input resistance 250 Q 30mA 20mA to 17mA 19 17mA to 30mA 13 With sign 15 bits binary 1 25uA 40mAx1 32000 5 00nA 40mAx1 8000 0 5 200uA for 40mA full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input 1 0 400uA for 40mA full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input 1ms x number of selected channels WVhen the input mode is set to 0 WVhen the input mode is set to 6 1 6320 7 3 16000 le es 1 oI CIS 1 tN 20mA 0 ae Pals 20mA Er ii CO i pA 16000 Oita 16320 20 4mA 0 4mA 20mA The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In the direct indication mode however the offset gain cannot be adjusted 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 3mA lt Gain Offset lt 30mA 4 The resolution and
420. tween all terminals and ground terminal Compliant with JEM 1021 Grounding Working l Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working l n altitude Compliant with IEC61131 2 lt 2000m 1 If 4AD ADP is connected to the FX3uc Series PLC direct installation is not possible e men e men e men quip AKIPI JUR Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 5 3 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use the 4AD ADP The 4AD ADP may malfunction C 6 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 5 S T z Item Specifications A D conversion circuit 24V DC 20 15 40mMA B driving power It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power supply to the terminal block yy 5V DC 15mA is Interface driving power Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit it is not SG necessary to supply the power 2 3 Performance Specifications Specifications Voltage input Current input Analog input OV to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC range Input resistance 194 kQ Input resistance 250 Q en 0 5V 15V 2mA 30mA absolute input Digital output 12 bits binary 11 bits binary R
421. type K and type J 3 OF L1 Channel 1 thermocouple olL L1 sensor input A L2 Channel 2 thermocouple s O C L2 sensor input 3 oL L3 Channel 3 thermocouple O C L3 sensor input s OL LA Channel 4 thermocouple i O C L4 sensor input g H 10 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque g 3 O Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment Terminate the cable end as shown below 3 1 Cables Applicable cable and tightening torque B Wire size Tightening E x Termination ee stranded single wire torque Vs Sinale wi 0 3 mm to 0 5 mm e To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable 57 A Na AWG22 to 20 and then twist the core before connection z e To connect a single wire cable just strip the cover off the 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 cable before connection C r 0 22 Nemto e Rod terminal with insulation sleeve x Rod terminal 2 3 Mm to 0 5mm recommended terminal ig with AWG22 20 Al 0 5 8WH Manufactured by Phoenix Contact 5 insulation Refer to the rod terminal e Caulking tool 2 sleeve a oa ShOWnAN ING CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact i ollowing figure or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact D 2 Termination of cable end 3 To terminate the cable treat the s
422. u Series PLC 2 Output mode Channel 1 should be set to mode 0 voltage output 10 V to 10 V Channel 3 should be set to mode 2 current output O mA to 20 mA Channels 2 and 4 are out of use 3 Convenient function The table output function is used 4 Device assignment Device Description Start of table output function for channels 1 and 3 Stop of table output function Restart of table output function for channel 3 apt Data to be output from channel 1 Data to be output from channel 2 Data to be output from channel 3 Data to be output from channel 4 Data table Completion of output of table from channel 1 Table output error Data table transfer complete Output l During output of table from channel 3 Data table transfer command Table output completion flag It is necessary to separately create the data table For a detailed description of creation of the data table refer to Section 6 2 2 Example of sequence program Initial pulse M8002 FNC 12 HF2Fo UO GO Specification of output modes of channels 1 to 4 MOV amp RUN monitor M8000 CT K50 2 Continued 1 The output mode setting is retained in the EEPROM of the FX3u 4DA For this reason even if the sequence program is deleted the previously set functions will still be valid 2 After setting the output mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each setting After the output mode is specified and the same output mode is u
423. uit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Make sure to ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable connected to a special analog input adaptor or special analog extension block at one point on the PLC However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Noise may cause malfunctions Make sure to ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable connected to a special analog output adaptor or special analog extension block at one point on the analog device side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to the power connectors or terminal blocks Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure GEE S2fcty Precautions D Read these precautions before use 2 WIRING PRECAUTIONS e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product CAUTION e Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out e Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product e Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common ground
424. unication data error in 1st 4AD ADP 930 809 OO OE FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 7 Model Code 4 7 Model Code 5 Initial value K1 aj Numeric data type Decimal K 5 When the 4AD ADP is connected model code 1 is stored in the corresponding special data register R The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code TI TI 2 lt X lt Special data register ee Of escription K D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code Use the special data registers above to check whether a 4AD ADP is connected or not 1 Program Example FNC224 D8269 007 Checks the model code of the 1st LD analog special adapter 4 8 Basic Program Example Vdr nexs w dadY dYr N X4 Create the following basic program example to read out analog conversion A D conversion data The following program will set channel 1 of the 1st adapter to voltage input mode and channel 2 to current input mode and will store the converted A D value of channel 1 data into D100 and that of channel 2 data into D101 x A M8001 Sets the input mode of channel z M8260 1 to the voltage input mode J gt 0 V to 10 V lt M8000 Sets the input mode of channel 8267 2 to the current input mode F 4 mA to 20 mA 2 M8002 RST D8268 6 Error status b6 OFF T 5 gt y RST D8268 7 Error status b7 OFF O iain FNC 12 D8264 Sets the averaging time to 5
425. upplied with product Supplied with This manual describes the FX3U 4DA analog output product A 39 SWW9 UOWWLUOD aVr Nexs WU QVv onexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs ITI MLld AYt N X4 dav DI CWP NeX4 ae ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment Common Items Supplied with Document product or ete Manual type mber ed Description separately Temperature sensor unit ee ee J 997D14701 Supplied with ee a ee USER S MANUAL product zS RE RES p l such as specifications and installation EX3U 4AD PTW ADP Supplied with This manual describes the FX3U 4AD PTW ADP JY997D29101 platinum resistance thermometer input special adapter USER S MANUAL product gt a fe l hardware such as specifications and installation Pe AE Jy997D14801 Supplied with e i ee aie as USER S MANUAL product ERE eg iain ils a specifications and installation This manual describes the FX2N 4AD PT platinum FX2N 4AD PT JY992D65601 Supplied with resistance thermometer input special function block USER S GUIDE product hardware such as specifications and installation and also describes various programs This manual describes the FX2N 4AD TC thermocouple FX2N 4AD TC JY992D65507 Supplied with input special function block hardware such as USER S GUIDE product specifications and install
426. ut Desired digital value 2 Example of program For example create the following program to change the digital output of the 1st analog special adapter Sets the output mode of channel 1 to the voltage output mode Sets the output holding function for channel 1 Program for setting scaling instruction data table Device Number of Sets the number of points D50 X Digital value of specified Ds4 Start coordinate start point on X axis point Y Digital value of desired D A conversion start point DA i X Digital value of specified end point y Digital value of desired D A FNC 12 k2000 D54 MOV a ee Se Se oe mS a Se ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee eee a a m a m FNC 2 The result of operation by scaling instruction will be stored in D100 D8260 in the D8260 3 Cautions regarding programming e GX Developer version 8 13P or later supports scaling instruction SCL FNC259 e Ifthe input digital value for the D A conversion is out of the data table range specified by scaling instruction SCL FNC259 the FX Series PLC will detect an operation error error code K6706 E 19 avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr7 nexa O ddv ld ave nexd TT dav var nex4 M1d QVt NEXS4 dav O CWp NeX4 on ddv UONONISU Gid m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 6 1 PLC Version Number Ch
427. ut 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for the FX3U 4DA 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating temperature 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative A humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Compliant with EN 68 2 6 Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm CIOE Vibrati Tests 10 times in each pein 10 57 i ce 4 0 035 direction X Y and Z resistance DIN Rail Mounting eee Siete Di M i eoon f ario f o ooo Shock Compliant with EN 68 2 27 resistance 147 m s2 Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise Using noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min voltage Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt 2 Between batch of all terminals and ground terminal Compliant with JEM 1021 Grounding Working l Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working l n altitude Compliant with IEC61131 2 lt 2000m 1 When this block is connected to the FX3uc Series PLC the direct
428. utput data setting error on 1st adapter D8268 2 Channel 3 output data setting error on 1st adapter D8268 3 Channel 4 output data setting error on 1st adapter O ddv ld ave nexd TT dav var nex4 D8268 4 EEPROM error on 1st adapter 380006 MLld AYt N X4 dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UONONISU id m 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 7 Model Code 4 7 Model Code Initial value K2 Numeric data type Decimal K 1 Description of setting When the 4DA ADP is connected model code 2 is stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code Use the special data registers above to check whether 4DA ADP is connected or not 2 Program Example Checks the model code FNC D8269 Yo07 of the 1st analog special LD adapter 4 8 Basic Program Example Create the following basic program example to output D A converted analog data The following program will set channel 1 to the voltage output mode and channel 2 to current output mode and will set digital data in D100 and D101 for D A conversion Sets the output mode of channel 1 to the voltage output mode 0 V to 10 V Sets the output holding function for channel 1 Sets the output mode of channel 2 to the current output mode 4 mA to 20 mA
429. very scan time of the PLC During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers PASIN EADP A value FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Sequence program A D conversion start A D command conversion Digital value writing 200us 4ch A D conversion start END instruction A D command conversion ee Digital value writing z 200us 4ch 2 A D conversion during PLC STOP Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated 3 If two or more analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter 2nd adapter 4th adapter 4 A D conversion speed data update time During execution of END instruction the A D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 200us and the data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 200us x number of connected analog adapters C 8 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input EU 5 3 3 Wiring This chapter describes the 4AD ADP wiring B Observe the following caution to wire the 4AD ADP yy ee Ok WIRING PRECAUTIONS D ANGER gt S e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before
430. w Manual type Analog input unit FX3U 4AD INSTALLATION MANUAL FX3U 4AD ADP USER S MANUAL FX2NC 4AD USER S MANUAL FX2N 8AD USER S MANUAL FX2N 4AD USER S GUIDE FX2N 2AD USER S GUIDE Analog output unit FX3U 4DA INSTALLATION MANUAL FX3U 4DA ADP USER S MANUAL FX2NC 4DA USER S MANUAL FX2N 4DA USER S GUIDE FX2N 2DA USER S GUIDE Analog input output unit FX2N 5A USER S MANUAL FXON 3A USER S GUIDE Supplied with product or supplied separately Supplied with This manual describes the FX3U 4AD analog input JY997D20701 Bap special function block hardware such as specifications P and installation and also describes various programs Supplied with This manual describes the FX3u 4AD ADP analog input JY997D13901 M special adapter hardware such as specifications and p installation Supplied with This manual describes the FX2NC 4AD analog input JY997D07801 nae special function block hardware such as specifications P and installation and also describes various programs cudiedaih This manual describes the FX2N 8AD analog input JY992D86001 asi special function block hardware such as specifications P and installation and also describes various programs Supplied with This manual describes the FX2N 4AD analog input JY992D65201 edn special function block hardware such as specifications P and installation and also describes various programs JY992D74701 special funct
431. wing table R Read W Write Special Device number i Description Reference device am ed f M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the output mode of channel 2 RW Section M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode of channel 3 RW 4 3 M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 Switches the output mode of channel 4 RW M8264 M8274 M8284 M8294 Sets the cancel of the channel 1 output R W l holding function Special auxiliary M8265 M8275 M8285 M8295 Sets the cancel of the channel 2 output R W relay holding function Section 4 4 M8266 M8276 M8286 M8296 Sets the cancel of the channel 3 output R W holding function M8267 M8277 M8287 M8297 Sets the cancel of the channel 4 output R W holding function M8268to M8278 to M8288 to M8298 to Unused Do not use i M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 l D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel 1 output setting data avr nexs WW sw UOWLUOD gt aVv onexs Vdr nexs UO dagv dvr nexa 4 3 Switching of Output Mode D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel 2 output setting data Section D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Channel 3 output setting data ORW 4 5 D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Channel 4 tti i R W x srca ee Pe ee eee ee a data D8264 to D8274 to D8284 to D8294 to 564 Do not use i E register D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 T J j U z Section D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code 2 fe x i gt gt z s 5 Turn the speci
432. wire is connected to one terminal 8 gt U 3 2 0 13 Terminal Crimp Gs 6 2 mm 0 24 SETEN terminal H or less A eS 3 2 0 13 6 2 mm 0 24 Terminal 5 or less b g e When two wires are connected to one terminal 3 2 0 13 6 2 mm 0 24 Terminal Crimp F or less i screw terminal T zl ess mm 0 25 25 or more S 3 2 0 13 6 2 mm 0 24 a Terminal or less ks 3 mm 0 25 _ more B 13 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 3 Cable FX3uc 4AD Use the following cables to connect with counterpart equipment Terminate the cable end as shown below 1 Cable Applicable cable and tightening torque Wire size stranded Tightening ae i Termination single wire torque 2 2 e To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable Single wire 0 3mm lt to 0 5mm p AWG22 to 20 and then twist the core before connection 3 e To connect a single wire cable peel the cover off the Double wire 0 3mm AWG22 cable before connection 0 22Nem to Rod terminal with insulation sleeve 0 25Nem recommended terminal Al 0 5 8WH Manufactured by Phoenix Contact e Caulking tool CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact 0 3mm to 0 5mm Rod terminal AWG22 to 20 with Refer to the external insulation view of rod terminal sleeve
433. writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 B 34 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memory Details 5 4 9 BFM 26 Upper lower limit error status Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H If channel data BFM 10 to 13 is out of the range set by the lower limit error data BFM 71 to 74 and the upper limit error data BFM 81 to 84 the following operation will be performed Q O 3 O T 3 e2 i ae m7 e If channel data lt lower limit error set value gt gt The lower limit error bit will turn on CE pS ie gt U e If channel data gt upper limit error set value O The upper limit error bit will turn on For a detailed description of upper lower limit error status data resetting refer to Subsection 5 4 18 1 BFM 26 bit assignment The upper and lower limit error values of each channel are assigned as shown in the following table Bit No Channel number Description bO Lower limit error value b1 Upper limit error value b2 Lower limit error value ch2 n b3 Upper limit error value h4 Vdr nexs UO ddagv dvr nexa b4 Lower limit error value b5 Upper limit error value b6 Lower li
434. ximately 5 seconds to initialize all the data Do not set write data in the buffer memory 5 during this period g e Priority is given to the setting of the value change prohibition mode BFM 19 e At the completion of initialization the value of BFM 20 will automatically change to KO var NeX4 5 4 9 BFM 28 Disconnection detection status only in current output mode Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H When a wire break is detected the bit corresponding to the relevant channel will turn on 1 Assignment to each bit of BFM 28 dav G eave nexs TI dav var nexs IT Bit No Description bO Wire break in channel 1 b1 Wire break in channel 2 b2 Wire break in channel 3 b3 Wire break in channel 4 b4 to b15 Not used 2 Cautions regarding use of disconnection detection status 3 e When any of b0 to b3 is turned on b11 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on 5 e The disconnection detection status is valid only if the output mode BFM 0 is the current output mode E mode 2 to 4 In other output modes each corresponding bit of BFM 28 stays off L 3 Disconnection detection status automatic transfer function b2 of BFM 60 2 If the disconnection detection status with automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM 63 the data a in BFM 28 can be transferred to the specified data register Only when wire break is detected data will be automatically transferred from FX3U 4DA to
435. xs dav OD I CWp NeX4 aoe ddv UOHONSU Aid 88 ONS B 59 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD F X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 8 1 PLC Version Number Check 8 Troubleshooting r This chapter describes troubleshooting methods and error codes If the A D conversion data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the following items e PLC version number e Wiring e Program e Error status 8 1 PLC Version Number Check Verify that the PLC being used is of the following version or later FX3U 4AD Compatible PLC FX3U Series PLC FX3UC Series PLC Version number Ver 2 20 or later Ver 1 30 or later FX3UC 4AD Compatible PLC Version number FX3uUC Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later For a detailed description of version number check method refer to Section 1 3 8 2 Wiring Check Check the wiring as follows 1 Power The 4AD needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the 24 V indicator lamp of the 4AD is on 2 Analog input line Use the 2 core twisted shielded cable for the analog input line In addition be sure to separate the analog input line from any other power lines or inductive lines 3 Use of current input mode To use the current input mode for a channel be sure to short circuit the line between the V terminal and the I terminal of the channel Without short circui
436. ystem configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control e Selection of units Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring e Power supply line e Analog output line Refer to Chapter 4 Programming e Details of special devices e Examples of basic programs Programming Refer to Chapter 5 Changing of output characteristics Method of output characteristics change e How to use scaling instruction If the error status data or the output analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 6 Troubleshooting FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers 1 4 The 4DA ADP is compatible with the following PLCs Compatible PLC Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later After May 2005 initial production FX3uUC Series PLC Ver 1 20 or later After April 2004 Version check Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number D8001 2 410 0 BIIEN EE IIIS 1II IIIF E IOIA AT E IIA AE E OEE PC type and L Version data Example Ver 1 00 version number PC type Example 24 FXan FX3u FX2nc and FX3uc series How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the product can be seen from the manufacturer s serial number SERIAL indicated on the label adhered to the right side of t

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Verbatim 52427 LED lamp  Super 7™  PL-B920 Series Standard Display PL-DU6900/PL  first aid equipment PDF  Des reflex doués pour le ciel  mobotix - EVP Capital Management AG  Operating instructions Open two-stage compressor FZ 16    Hinweis  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file